Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Table of Contents
7 Engg ............................................................................................................................................... 11
7.1 Projects ................................................................................................................................. 11
7.1.1 Projects Engineering................................................................................................... 11
7.1.1.1 Details ....................................................................................................................... 12
7.1.1.2 Staffing ...................................................................................................................... 12
7.1.1.3 Work Order ............................................................................................................... 14
7.1.2 Projects - Contracting .................................................................................................... 28
7.1.2.1 CO .............................................................................................................................. 28
7.1.2.2 CO BOQ Map ............................................................................................................. 37
7.1.2.3 Details ....................................................................................................................... 39
7.1.2.4 Staffing ...................................................................................................................... 39
7.1.2.5 Work Order ............................................................................................................... 40
7.1.3 Sub Project Engineering ............................................................................................. 54
7.1.3.1 Budget ....................................................................................................................... 54
7.1.3.2 Staffing ...................................................................................................................... 57
7.1.3.3 Work Order ............................................................................................................... 58
7.1.3.4 Abstracts ................................................................................................................... 72
7.1.3.5 Stock .......................................................................................................................... 74
7.1.3.5.1 Units .................................................................................................................... 74
7.1.3.5.2 Accessories .......................................................................................................... 77
7.1.3.6 Documents ................................................................................................................ 79
7.1.3.7 WBS ........................................................................................................................... 79
7.1.4 Sub Project Contracting ............................................................................................. 81
7.1.4.1 CO .............................................................................................................................. 81
7.1.4.2 CO BOQ Map ............................................................................................................. 89
7.1.4.3 CO Abstracts .............................................................................................................. 91
7.1.4.4 Budget ....................................................................................................................... 91
7.1.4.5 Staffing ...................................................................................................................... 94
7.1.4.6 Work Order ............................................................................................................... 95
7.1.4.7 Abstracts ................................................................................................................. 109
7.1.4.8 Documents .............................................................................................................. 110
7.1.4.9 WBS ......................................................................................................................... 110
7.2 Inventory ............................................................................................................................. 112
7.2.1 Indents ........................................................................................................................ 112
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
7.2.2 Service Indent ............................................................................................................. 115
7.2.3 Purchase Orders .......................................................................................................... 117
7.2.3.1 PO-Indents .............................................................................................................. 119
7.2.3.2 Rates and Taxes ....................................................................................................... 120
7.2.3.3 Terms and Conditions ............................................................................................. 122
7.2.4 ROPO Mapping ............................................................................................................ 126
7.2.5 GRN ............................................................................................................................. 127
7.2.6 Issue Inventory ............................................................................................................ 131
7.2.7 Return Inventory ......................................................................................................... 135
7.2.8 Gate Pass ..................................................................................................................... 136
7.2.9 Material Reconciliation ............................................................................................... 142
7.2.10 Transfer Order ............................................................................................................. 143
7.3 Tendering ............................................................................................................................ 145
7.3.1 Tender Document ....................................................................................................... 145
7.3.2 Expression of Interest ................................................................................................. 148
7.3.3 Contractor Response ................................................................................................... 149
7.3.4 Float Tender ................................................................................................................ 150
7.3.5 Pre-Tender Estimate ................................................................................................... 151
7.3.6 Tender Opening Form ................................................................................................. 153
7.3.7 Tender Receipt ............................................................................................................ 155
7.3.8 Rate Comparison ......................................................................................................... 161
7.3.9 Tender Link To WO ...................................................................................................... 163
7.4 Contracting .......................................................................................................................... 165
7.4.1 Leads ........................................................................................................................... 165
7.4.1.1 Lead List .................................................................................................................. 165
7.4.1.2 Leads ....................................................................................................................... 165
7.4.2 Clients .......................................................................................................................... 168
7.4.2.1 Client List ................................................................................................................. 168
7.4.2.2 Client ....................................................................................................................... 168
7.4.3 Jobs ............................................................................................................................. 170
7.4.3.1 Job List ..................................................................................................................... 171
7.4.3.2 Job Details ............................................................................................................... 171
7.4.4 Contacts ...................................................................................................................... 173
7.4.4.1 Contact List .............................................................................................................. 173
7.4.4.2 Contacts .................................................................................................................. 173
7.4.5 Bank Credit .................................................................................................................. 173
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
7.4.6 Bond Request .............................................................................................................. 174
7.4.7 Bond Payment ............................................................................................................. 176
7.5 Site-Activity ......................................................................................................................... 176
7.5.1 Abstracts ..................................................................................................................... 176
7.5.2 MBook ......................................................................................................................... 178
7.5.3 MBook Abstracts ......................................................................................................... 181
7.5.4 Labour ......................................................................................................................... 182
7.5.5 Equipment ................................................................................................................... 183
7.5.6 Critical Point ................................................................................................................ 183
7.5.7 Work Execution ........................................................................................................... 184
7.5.8 Cube Results ................................................................................................................ 184
7.6 Billing ................................................................................................................................... 186
7.6.1 Work Order ................................................................................................................. 186
7.6.2 Misc. Expenses ............................................................................................................ 191
7.6.3 Advance ....................................................................................................................... 194
7.6.4 Debit Note ................................................................................................................... 199
7.6.5 Debit Note Receipt ...................................................................................................... 200
7.6.6 Labour Payment .......................................................................................................... 201
7.6.7 Invoice ......................................................................................................................... 204
7.6.8 Advance ....................................................................................................................... 207
7.6.9 Receipt ........................................................................................................................ 209
7.6.10 Credit Note .................................................................................................................. 211
7.7 Approvals ............................................................................................................................ 212
7.7.1 Contractor ................................................................................................................... 212
7.7.2 Consultant ................................................................................................................... 212
7.7.3 Contracting Client ....................................................................................................... 213
7.7.4 Contractor WO ............................................................................................................ 213
7.7.5 Consultant WO ............................................................................................................ 214
7.7.6 Internal WO ................................................................................................................. 214
7.7.7 Labour WO .................................................................................................................. 215
7.7.8 BOQ ............................................................................................................................. 216
7.7.9 Abstract ....................................................................................................................... 216
7.7.10 MBook ......................................................................................................................... 217
7.7.11 Indent .......................................................................................................................... 218
7.7.12 Service Indent ............................................................................................................. 218
7.7.13 GRN ............................................................................................................................. 219
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
7.7.14 Issue ............................................................................................................................ 220
7.7.15 Return ......................................................................................................................... 220
7.7.16 Transfer Order ............................................................................................................. 221
7.7.17 Gate Pass ..................................................................................................................... 221
7.7.18 Work Order ................................................................................................................. 222
7.7.19 Misc. Expenses ............................................................................................................ 223
7.7.20 Advance ....................................................................................................................... 223
7.7.21 Debit Note ................................................................................................................... 224
7.7.22 Debit Note Receipt ...................................................................................................... 224
7.7.23 Labour Payment .......................................................................................................... 225
7.7.24 Work Category ............................................................................................................ 226
7.7.25 Material ....................................................................................................................... 226
7.7.26 Contracting Order ....................................................................................................... 227
7.7.27 Invoice ......................................................................................................................... 227
7.7.28 Invoice (Advance) ........................................................................................................ 228
7.7.29 Receipt ........................................................................................................................ 229
7.7.30 Credit Note .................................................................................................................. 229
7.7.31 CO Abstract ................................................................................................................. 230
7.7.32 Contractor WO ............................................................................................................ 230
7.7.33 Consultant WO ............................................................................................................ 231
7.7.34 Internal WO ................................................................................................................. 232
7.7.35 Labour WO .................................................................................................................. 233
7.7.36 Purchase Order ........................................................................................................... 233
7.7.37 Rental Modification..................................................................................................... 234
7.7.38 Tender Document ....................................................................................................... 235
7.7.39 Pre-Tender Estimate ................................................................................................... 235
7.7.40 Tender Receipt ............................................................................................................ 236
7.7.41 Float Tender ................................................................................................................ 236
7.7.42 Rate Comparison ......................................................................................................... 237
7.8 Modification ........................................................................................................................ 237
7.9 Checklist .............................................................................................................................. 239
7.10 Templates ............................................................................................................................ 239
7.10.1 Document Template ................................................................................................... 239
7.11 Portal ................................................................................................................................... 240
7.11.1 About Portal ................................................................................................................ 240
7.11.2 Menu Configuration .................................................................................................... 240
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
7.11.3 Template Configuration .............................................................................................. 241
7.11.4 Login Configuration ..................................................................................................... 242
7.11.5 Send Password ............................................................................................................ 243
7.11.6 Feedback Master ......................................................................................................... 244
7.11.7 Contacts Master .......................................................................................................... 244
7.11.8 Contacts Category ....................................................................................................... 245
7.11.9 Home Page Images ...................................................................................................... 245
7.11.10 News ........................................................................................................................ 246
7.11.11 Partners ................................................................................................................... 246
7.11.12 Poll........................................................................................................................... 247
7.11.13 Poll Results .............................................................................................................. 248
7.11.14 FAQ Category .......................................................................................................... 249
7.11.15 FAQs ........................................................................................................................ 249
7.11.16 Help Desk ................................................................................................................ 250
7.11.17 Usage Statistics ....................................................................................................... 250
7.11.18 Frequently Used Pages ............................................................................................ 251
7.11.19 User Login/Logout ................................................................................................... 252
7.11.20 Summary of Polls .................................................................................................... 253
7.12 Masters ............................................................................................................................... 254
7.12.1 Master Tables .............................................................................................................. 254
7.12.1.1 Activity/Sub-Activity Master ............................................................................... 255
Creating Activity/Sub-Activity Master................................................................................. 255
Edit Activity/Sub-Activity Master ........................................................................................ 255
Changing the Status ............................................................................................................ 256
Deleting the record ............................................................................................................. 256
7.12.1.2 Bidbond Charge ................................................................................................... 257
Creating Bidbond Charge Master ........................................................................................ 257
Edit Bidbond Charge Master ............................................................................................... 258
Changing the Status ............................................................................................................ 258
Deleting the record ............................................................................................................. 259
7.12.1.3 Bond Type ........................................................................................................... 259
Creating Bond Type Master ................................................................................................ 259
Edit Bond Type Master ........................................................................................................ 260
Changing the Status ............................................................................................................ 260
Deleting the record ............................................................................................................. 261
7.12.1.4 Condition Category ............................................................................................. 261
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Creating Condition Category Master .................................................................................. 261
Edit Condition Category Master .......................................................................................... 262
Changing the Status ............................................................................................................ 262
Deleting the record ............................................................................................................. 263
7.12.1.5 Condition Master ................................................................................................ 263
Creating Condition Master .................................................................................................. 263
Edit Condition Master ......................................................................................................... 264
Changing the Status ............................................................................................................ 264
Deleting the record ............................................................................................................. 265
7.12.1.6 Constitutions Type Master .................................................................................. 265
Creating Condition Type Master ......................................................................................... 265
Edit Condition Type Master ................................................................................................ 266
Changing the Status ............................................................................................................ 266
Deleting the record ............................................................................................................. 267
7.12.1.7 Contract Credit Note Reason Master .................................................................. 267
Creating Contract Credit Note Reason Master ................................................................... 267
Edit Contract Credit Note Reason Master .......................................................................... 268
Changing the Status ............................................................................................................ 268
Deleting the record ............................................................................................................. 269
7.12.1.8 Contracting Competitor ...................................................................................... 269
Creating CONTRACTING COMPETITOR Master ................................................................... 269
Edit Contracting Competitor Master .................................................................................. 270
Changing the Status ............................................................................................................ 270
Deleting the record ............................................................................................................. 271
7.12.1.9 Contracting Contact Method .............................................................................. 271
Creating Contracting Contact Method Master ................................................................... 271
Edit Contracting Contact Method Master........................................................................... 272
Changing the Status ............................................................................................................ 272
Deleting the record ............................................................................................................. 272
7.12.1.10 Contracting Contact Type ................................................................................... 273
Creating Contracting Contact Type Master ........................................................................ 273
Edit Contracting Contact Type Master ................................................................................ 273
Changing the Status ............................................................................................................ 274
Deleting the record ............................................................................................................. 274
7.12.1.11 Contracting Industry ........................................................................................... 274
Creating Contracting Industry Master ................................................................................ 274
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Edit Contracting Industry Master ........................................................................................ 275
Changing the Status ............................................................................................................ 275
Deleting the record ............................................................................................................. 276
7.12.1.12 Contracting Industry Type ................................................................................... 276
Creating Contracting Industry Type Master ........................................................................ 276
Edit Contracting Industry Type Master ............................................................................... 277
Changing the Status ............................................................................................................ 277
Deleting the record ............................................................................................................. 278
7.12.1.13 Contracting Job Stage.......................................................................................... 278
Creating Contracting Job Stage Master .............................................................................. 278
Edit Contracting Job Stage Master ...................................................................................... 279
Changing the Status ............................................................................................................ 279
Deleting the record ............................................................................................................. 279
7.12.1.14 Contracting Job Status ........................................................................................ 280
Creating Contracting Job Status Master ............................................................................. 280
Edit Contracting Job Status Master ..................................................................................... 280
Changing the Status ............................................................................................................ 281
Deleting the record ............................................................................................................. 281
7.12.1.15 Contracting Job Type ........................................................................................... 281
Creating Contracting Job Type Master................................................................................ 282
Edit Contracting Job Type Master ....................................................................................... 282
Changing the Status ............................................................................................................ 282
Deleting the record ............................................................................................................. 283
7.12.1.16 Contracting Lead/Client Stage ............................................................................ 283
Creating Contracting Lead/Client Stage Master ................................................................. 283
Edit Contracting Lead/Client Stage Master ......................................................................... 284
Changing the Status ............................................................................................................ 284
Deleting the record ............................................................................................................. 285
7.12.1.17 Contracting Reason Type .................................................................................... 285
Creating Contracting Reason Type Master ......................................................................... 285
Edit Contracting Reason Type Master................................................................................. 286
Changing the Status ............................................................................................................ 286
Deleting the record ............................................................................................................. 286
7.12.1.18 Contracting Source .............................................................................................. 287
Creating Contracting Source Master ................................................................................... 287
Edit Contracting Source Master .......................................................................................... 287
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Changing the Status ............................................................................................................ 288
Deleting the record ............................................................................................................. 288
7.12.1.19 Contractor Ranks ................................................................................................. 288
Creating Contracting Ranks Master .................................................................................... 289
Edit Contracting Ranks Master............................................................................................ 289
Changing the Status ............................................................................................................ 289
Deleting the record ............................................................................................................. 290
7.12.1.20 Debit Note Reason Type Master ......................................................................... 290
Creating Debit Note Reason Type Master .......................................................................... 290
Edit Debit Note Reason Type Master .................................................................................. 291
Changing the Status ............................................................................................................ 291
Deleting the record ............................................................................................................. 291
7.12.1.21 Engg. Floor Type Master ..................................................................................... 292
Creating Engg. Floor Type Master ....................................................................................... 292
Edit Engg. Floor Type Master .............................................................................................. 292
Changing the Status ............................................................................................................ 293
Deleting the record ............................................................................................................. 293
7.12.1.22 Material Reconciliation Reason Master. ............................................................. 293
Creating Material Reconciliation Reason Master ............................................................... 294
Edit Material Reconciliation Reason Master ....................................................................... 294
Changing the Status ............................................................................................................ 294
Deleting the record ............................................................................................................. 295
7.12.1.23 Payment Schedule Manual Event Master ........................................................... 295
Creating Payment Schedule Manual Event Master ............................................................ 295
Edit Payment Schedule Manual Event Master .................................................................... 296
Changing the Status ............................................................................................................ 296
Deleting the record ............................................................................................................. 297
7.12.1.24 Policy Periodicity Master..................................................................................... 297
Creating Policy Periodicity Master Master ......................................................................... 297
Edit Policy Periodicity Master Master ................................................................................. 298
Changing the Status ............................................................................................................ 298
Deleting the record ............................................................................................................. 298
7.12.1.25 Project Staffing Roles .......................................................................................... 299
Creating Project Staffing Roles Master ............................................................................... 299
Edit Project Staffing Roles Master ...................................................................................... 299
Changing the Status ............................................................................................................ 299
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Deleting the record ............................................................................................................. 299
7.12.1.26 SAC Master .......................................................................................................... 300
Creating SAC Master ........................................................................................................... 300
Edit SAC Master................................................................................................................... 300
Changing the Status ............................................................................................................ 301
Deleting the record ............................................................................................................. 301
7.12.1.27 Service Indent TAT Type Master ......................................................................... 301
Creating Service Indent TAT Type Master ........................................................................... 302
Edit Service Indent TAT Type Master .................................................................................. 302
Changing the Status ............................................................................................................ 302
Deleting the record ............................................................................................................. 303
7.12.1.28 Tender Contract Master ...................................................................................... 303
Creating Tender Contract Master ....................................................................................... 303
Edit Tender Contract Master .............................................................................................. 304
Changing the Status ............................................................................................................ 304
Deleting the record ............................................................................................................. 305
7.12.1.29 Tender Document Checklist Master ................................................................... 305
Creating Tender Document Checklist Master ..................................................................... 305
Edit Tender Document Checklist Master ............................................................................ 306
Changing the Status ............................................................................................................ 306
Deleting the record ............................................................................................................. 306
7.12.1.30 Tender Qualification Master ............................................................................... 307
Creating Tender Qualification Master ................................................................................ 307
Edit Tender Qualification Master ........................................................................................ 307
Changing the Status ............................................................................................................ 308
Deleting the record ............................................................................................................. 308
7.12.1.31 Tender Type Master ............................................................................................ 309
Creating Tender Type Master ............................................................................................. 309
Edit Tender Type Master ..................................................................................................... 309
Changing the Status ............................................................................................................ 309
Deleting the record ............................................................................................................. 310
7.12.1.32 Unit Type Master ................................................................................................ 310
Creating Unit Type Master .................................................................................................. 310
Edit Unit Type Master ......................................................................................................... 311
Changing the Status ............................................................................................................ 311
Deleting the record ............................................................................................................. 312
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
7.12.1.33 Work Category Type Master ............................................................................... 312
Creating Work Category Type Master ................................................................................ 312
Edit Work Category Type Master ........................................................................................ 313
Changing the Status ............................................................................................................ 313
Deleting the record ............................................................................................................. 314
7.12.1.34 Work Order Retention Type ................................................................................ 314
Creating Work Order Retention Type Master ..................................................................... 314
Edit Work Order Retention Type Master ............................................................................ 315
Changing the Status ............................................................................................................ 315
Deleting the record ............................................................................................................. 316
7.12.2 Store Master ............................................................................................................... 316
7.12.3 Consultant ................................................................................................................... 318
7.12.4 Contractor ................................................................................................................... 322
7.12.5 Contracting Client ....................................................................................................... 327
7.12.6 BOQ ............................................................................................................................. 331
7.12.7 Labour ......................................................................................................................... 337
7.12.8 Rate Master ................................................................................................................. 341
7.12.9 Labour Mapping .......................................................................................................... 341
7.12.10 Estimation Charge Type .......................................................................................... 342
7.12.11 Asset Type ............................................................................................................... 343
7.12.12 Asset SubType ......................................................................................................... 344
7.12.13 Asset ........................................................................................................................ 344
7.12.14 Define Activity ......................................................................................................... 347
7.12.15 Map Activity ............................................................................................................ 348
7.12.16 BOQ Estimation ....................................................................................................... 349
7.13 Utilities ................................................................................................................................ 350
7.13.1 Work Order Tax Utility ................................................................................................ 350
7.13.2 BOQ Rate Change ........................................................................................................ 353
7.13.3 Budget ......................................................................................................................... 354
7.13.4 BOQ ............................................................................................................................. 354
7.13.5 Sales Stock ................................................................................................................... 356
7.13.6 Bulk Assign PLC ............................................................................................................ 357
7.13.7 Contractor Work Order Copying ................................................................................. 358
7.14 Search .................................................................................................................................. 359
7.15 Reports ................................................................................................................................ 359
7.15.1 Abstract ....................................................................................................................... 359
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
7.15.2 BOQ ............................................................................................................................. 359
7.15.3 Budget ......................................................................................................................... 359
7.15.4 Cash Flow .................................................................................................................... 359
7.15.5 Consultant ................................................................................................................... 359
7.15.6 Contractor ................................................................................................................... 359
7.15.7 Contractor Payment .................................................................................................... 359
7.15.8 DPR .............................................................................................................................. 359
7.15.9 Inventory ..................................................................................................................... 359
7.15.10 MBook ..................................................................................................................... 359
7.15.11 Project ..................................................................................................................... 359
7 Engg
Under the Projects section, the Projects & Sub-Projects List is the first view users will
have upon clicking the Engg menu button. This list includes a filter and displays all projects
and sub-projects. Any project or sub project created within the Project module will be listed
here.
You will decide on this page whether you want to work at a project or sub project level.
Choose accordingly.
7.1 Projects
7.1.1 Projects Engineering
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
7.1.1.1 Details
This page showcases details relating to project(s). Users can view project name, property
name, project start and end date, alongside specific features such as carpet area, saleable
area and more. The page includes modifiable details like FSI Consumed and Estimated
Carpet Area, accessible via the Modify button. Users can update these parameters directly
on the page.
7.1.1.2 Staffing
The Staffing tab allows users to manage project personnel effectively. Under Project
Staffing, users can assign a Project Manager to oversee the entire project. Additionally,
under Work Order Staffing, users can allocate Engineers and technical staff to specific work
orders. This feature ensures proper delegation of responsibilities and resources, optimizing
project performance and coordination. By centralizing staffing information within the tab,
users can easily track personnel assignments and ensure that each work order is adequately
staffed for successful execution.
Personal Staffing
1. Navigate to Engg > Projects > Choose a Project from Projects & Sub Projects List >
Staffing > Project Staffing > Click Modify
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
2. Fill in and select the necessary details such as Project Name, Employee Name,
Role, From Date, To Date, and Utilization.
3. Click Update
Work Order Staffing
1. Navigate to Engg > Projects > Choose a Project from Projects & Sub Projects List >
Staffing > Work Order Staffing > Click Modify
2. Select the necessary details such as Work Category, Sub Category, Work Order and
Engineers.
3. Once you have selected the necessary details, slick Add Staff.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
7.1.1.3 Work Order
A work order is a legal agreement between a developer and a contractor which serves as the
foundation for their collaboration. This agreement outlines the terms and conditions governing
their professional relationship, including project scope, timelines, responsibilities, and financial
arrangements. Within this agreement, provisions are made for the creation of work orders,
which serve as formal requests for specific tasks or services to be completed.
Workflow
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
On the Work Order List page, you can create new work orders at the project level, or access
the existing work orders using the filter.
To create a new work order, follow the below steps:
Prerequisite
1. Set up Display Number configuration for the work order, including both project level
and subproject level work orders.
2. Define the workflow for managing work orders
3. Create Work Category/Sub Work Category in Masters. To do so, go to the Engg
menu >> Masters >> Master tables >> Work category masters. The procedure to
create the Work category and subcategory is as follows
a. Navigate to Engg.
b. Select Master Tables.
c. Choose Work Category Type Master from the list and click Go.
d. Position the cursor to the top right corner and click Create.
Steps
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Projects > Choose a Project from Projects & Sub Projects List >
Work Order > Work Order List > Click Create Work Order
Step 2: Basic Details
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Fields
Explanation
Project
Select the Project name from the drop-down list
WO Currency Type
Select the type of currency to be used in the project
transaction: Domestic or International
Work Order Scope
Choose the Work Order scope: Single Category or
Multiple Categories. In Single Category, you will
consolidate multiple BOQs into one work order with a
single payment, ideal for contractors with multiple
subprojects. For Multiple Categories, you will create
separate work orders at project or subproject levels.
Work Order Type
Select the Work Order Type from the drop-down list:
Contractor, Consultant, Internal or Labour.
Work Category *
Select the Work Category from the drop-down list.
The work categories from BOQ will reflect here.
Work Sub Category
Select this if you want to create a work order at the
sub category level. Else, leave it blank.
Contractor Name *
Enter the name of the contractor, who the work
order is to be assigned to.
GSTIN No
Enter the GSTIN No. of the contractor
Contact Person
Enter the name of the contact person.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Discount Type
Mobilization Advance Percentage
Mobilization refers to the activities that are carried out
by a contractor in order to prepare for a construction
work before the actual work begins.
Enter the percentage of the work order value that you
want to process as Mobilization Advance
Percentage.
Mobilization Advance Amount
Enter the Mobilization Advance Amount
Mobilization Guarantee Expiry Date
This refers to the guarantee of the date by which the
setup to begin the construction work is ready
Performance Guarantee Expiry Date
This refers to the guarantee of the date by which the
contractor has committed to complete the project
undertaken
EMD/BG Amount
Enter the bank guarantee amount that a contractor
has to deposit with a bank
From (Tentative) *
Select a date from the calendar when EMD/BG
becomes effective from
To (Tentative) *
Select a date from the calendar when EMD/BG will
be effective to
Work Order Printing Date
Select a date from the calendar when the work
order will be printed
Work Order Payment From
The application will allow payments to contractors in
the following ways:
1. Abstracts: Payments can be made with
reference to abstracts (based on work done).
2. Work order value payments: Payments can
be made based on the value specified in the
work order.
3. Payment schedule: Payments can be made
by defining the payment schedule (based on
conditions).
Remarks
Add remarks or comments, if any
Scope Of Work *
Summarize tasks and objectives that will become
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
part of the agreement between a developer and
another party
Work Description
Describe a detailed breakdown of actions,
specifications, and quantities of work that is
expected to be performed by a party
Tax Details
Notes on calculation of taxes:
The Percentage of work order value column in the Work Order screen is made free
text to handle defaulting of the taxable amount in the payment certificate and to
calculate new taxes on the residual work order value.
Changes in the percentage of work order value in the work order edit page will not
recalculate taxable and tax amounts.
An alert is provided to the user when attempting to change the percentage of the
work order value, which reads, "Work Order tax amount will not be calculated based
on % of Work order value. Please change the taxable/tax amount."
The application will not allow the user to create a work order without entering the %
of work order value to facilitate the general practice of entering taxable amounts
using a percentage of the work order.
This Percentage of work order value is considered for the defaulting of the certified
amount in the payment certificate as usual, and the calculation of tax amount and
taxable amount remains the same.
When the user changes tax amount and taxable amount, the % of work order value
will recalculate.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
During the amendment of the work order, the system will calculate the taxable
amount directly based on % of work order value using the following formula:
Taxable amount = ((Total work order value - Total payment certified amount) * (% of
work order value)) + (sum of taxable amount for a tax in payment certificates).
According to the above formula, if any new taxes are to be added to the work order
and if the work order is amended, the taxable amount for the tax will be calculated
based on the residual work order value.
If the work order is terminated, the system will calculate the taxable amount based on
the formula below: Taxable amount = ((Total work order terminated value - Total
payment certified amount) * (% of work order value of a tax)) + (Sum of taxable
amount for a tax in payment certificates).
Since the % of work order is user-editable for the purpose of defaulting taxable
amounts in work order payment certificates, the taxable amount and % of work order
may not match if the user manually calculates the tax amount based on % of work
order value in the work order.
During the amendment, the application calculates the taxable amount based on the
present % of work order value for a tax and remaining balance of work order value.
The logic to calculate tax amount remains the same, based on the taxable amount.
Existing taxes may change if the work order is amended, as the taxable amount
calculation is changed to get the value based on the remaining balance of work
order.
A Note is provided in the work order create, edit, and view pages as follows:
o Work Order tax amount will not change if % of work order Value is changed.
o % of Work Order value will be used to calculate taxable amounts in Work
Order payments.
If a new tax is added manually, the user will have to calculate the residual taxable
amount manually and enter it in the taxable amount column, and the application will
calculate the % of work order value and tax amounts accordingly.
In the above case, the user can change the % of work order value to 100% if the new
tax has to be on the residual/remaining unpaid work order value.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Tax amount for exclusive taxes in work order create, edit, and view pages will be:
Tax amount = Taxable amount * Tax percentage.
Tax amount for Inclusive taxes in work order create, edit, and view pages will be
based on two steps:
1. Calculate base amount as BASE AMOUNT = (100/ (100+Tax percentage))
*Taxable amount.
2. Calculate tax amount as TAX AMOUNT = Base amount * Tax percentage.
Retention Details
This feature allows construction developers to retain a percentage of the work order value
and defer payment to a later date. This enables better cash flow management and ensures
completion of work before full payment.
Follow the below steps to add Retention Details:
1. Click on Add Row
2. Choose the type of retention under Type
3. Enter a percentage value of the work order under Percentage
4. Choose an expiry date under Expiry Date
Service Indent Details
Service Indent is a feature designed to streamline service scheduling with defined start and
finish dates. It provides a structured framework for organizing service tasks within specific
timeframes. Users can input the start date, marking the initiation of the service, and the finish
date, signifying its completion. This feature aids in planning and tracking service activities
efficiently, while ensuring timely execution and resource optimization. Overall, it serves as a
crucial tool for managing service operations with precision and effectiveness.
To add a service indent to a work order, follow the below steps:
1. On the Create Work Order page, navigate to the Service Indent Details tab
2. Then, click Add row
3. Select an indent and click Accept Selected.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Note: Service Indent data comes from Engg > Inventory > Service Indent
Other Details
This tab provides a structured presentation of various fields related to policies, licenses, and
their respective expiration and renewal dates. It includes information such as the expiry date,
periodicity (frequency of review or renewal), and next due date for each category.
To enter details related to policies and licences, follow the below steps:
1. On the Create Work Order page, navigate to the Other Details tab
2. Fill in and select the details for the following fields.
Fields
Explanation
Work Category (WC) Policy Expiry Date
Select a date when the policy covering a
specific work category ends. It indicates the
need for renewal or adjustment.
Work Category (WC) Policy Periodicity
This field refers to the frequency at which
the policy for a particular work category is
reviewed or renewed. It determines the
intervals between policy updates.
Work Category (WC) Policy Next Due Date
Select an upcoming date when the policy
for a specific work category is due for
renewal or reassessment.
Labour License No.
Enter the labor license number. A labour
license number indicates that the contractor
has legal authorization for employment
within specified parameters.
Labour License Expiry Date
Select a date when the labor license
expires. It necessitates renewal to ensure
continued compliance with employment
regulations.
Contractors All Risk Policy (CAR) Expiry
Date
Select an expiry date of the insurance
policy covering all risks for contractors. It
prompts reevaluation or renewal.
Contractors All Risk Policy (CAR)
Periodicity
This field refers to the frequency at which
the contractors' all-risk policy undergoes
review or renewal and determines the
intervals between policy updates.
Contractors All Risk Policy (CAR) Next Due
Date
Select an upcoming date when the
contractors' all-risk policy requires renewal
or reassessment to maintain coverage.
Contractor/Consultant Details
The details of contractors / consultants automatically flow to this category from Masters.
EMD Cheque/BG Details
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Given the substantial financial involvement, developers often require contractors to provide a
bank guarantee by depositing a specified sum with a bank.
Follow the below steps to update bank guarantee details:
1. Click Add New
2. Choose the Bank Name
3. Select the Cheque Date from the calendar
4. Enter the Cheque/BG No
5. Input the Cheque Amount
6. Choose BG Handover Date from the calendar
7. Specify the BG Expiry Date
8. Select the Claim Date
Documents
Upload any document related to the work order under Documents.
Follow the below steps to upload a document:
1. Click Add New
2. Choose a file and click Update
Once you have created a work order at the project level, you can add BOQs, materials,
labours, assets, advance details, terms and conditions, and more.
BOQ
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
The quantity and cost are loaded from a Bill of Quantities (BOQ) onto a work order. It's
mandatory to link at least one BOQ to a work order.
To add a BOQ to work order, follow the below steps:
1. After creating a work order, navigate to the Work Order tab and select the desired
work order
2. Click on the BOQ option
3. Click on Add New BOQ
4. Choose the Sub Project and Work Category to list the available BOQs
Note:
Users can modify the quantity and rate of the BOQ
Once an Abstract or Indent is created for the BOQ, the application will restrict
changes to the BOQ’s rate
Once Payment/Advance is created for the BOQ, application will prevent deleting the
BOQ
Step 5: Click Create.
Step 6: Navigate to the Status section, select Submitted, input any remarks, and then
proceed to update the status by clicking on Update Status.
Materials
This tab allows users to specify the materials required for the work order. It includes details
such as the type of material, quantity needed, cost per unit, supplier information, and any
other relevant specifications.
1. Navigate to Engg > Projects > Choose a Project from Projects & Sub Projects List >
Work Order > Choose a Work Order from Work Order List Labours > Click Materials
2. Click Add Free Supply, and this action opens a new page called Add Material.
Proceed to fill in the required information or make selections as needed on this page.
Fields
Explanation
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Project
This field is automatically populated from
the work order
Sub Project
This field is automatically populated from
the work order
Work Order No.
This field is automatically populated from
the work order
Material Type *
Click Select located beside the material
type field. This action will prompt a new
window to open where you can search for a
material(s) using the filter provided at the
top. Once you have selected the
material(s), click Accept Selected.
Note: The material type data comes from
Purchase > Masters > Materials.
Material Sub Type *
This field is a further subdivision of material
type. This field is populated automatically
when you select material(s) under Material
Type.
Note: The sub material data under Sub
Material Type field comes from Purchase >
Masters > Materials.
Material *
The items that are listed against Material
Type and Material are automatically
populated.
Note: The material data under Sub Material
Type field comes from Purchase >
Masters > Materials.
UOM
The Unit of Measure (UOM) is automatically
populated.
Note: The UOM data comes from
Purchase > Masters > Materials.
Inclusive
Star Rate
Star rate refers to a fixed rate that is used
to price materials
Estimated Quantity
This field refers to an approximate amount
of material required for a work order.
Recommended Quantity *
This field refers to an optimal or suggested
quantity based on project requirements or
industry standards.
Mark Up Percentage
Mark up percentage is a percentage that is
added to the cost price to determine profit
margin.
Debitable
Checkmark Debitable if an expense or cost
is chargeable or billable to an account.
Debitable At
Choose whether it is debitable at Star Rate
or Actual Rate.
Labours
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
This tab enables users to specify labour requirements, including labour category, labour
quantity and hourly rate. This feature set facilitates efficient labour resource management,
ensuring the right personnel are assigned to appropriate tasks and optimizing project
timelines.
To add labour details, follow the below steps:
1. Navigate to Engg > Projects > Choose a Project from Projects & Sub Projects List >
Work Order > Choose a Work Order from Work Order List Labours
2. On the Work Order page, go to the Labours tab and click Add Labour. This action
opens a new page. Proceed to fill in the required information or make selections as
needed on this page.
Fields
Explanation
Project
This field is automatically populated from
the project
Sub Project
Work Order No.
This field is automatically populated from
the work order
Labour Category *
Click Select located beside the Labour
Category field. This action will prompt a
new window to open where you can search
for labour details using the filter provided at
the top. Once you have selected the labour
details, click Accept Selected.
Note: The labour category data comes from
Engg > Masters > Labour.
Labour Sub Category *
This field is a further subdivision of Labour
Type. This field is populated automatically
when you select Labour Category under the
Labours tab.
Note: The labour sub category data comes
from Engg > Masters > Labour.
Labour Type *
This field is populated automatically when
you select labour category under the
Labours tab.
Note: The Labour Type category data
comes from Engg > Masters > Labour.
UOM
The Unit of Measure (UOM) is automatically
populated.
Note: The UOM data comes from Engg >
Masters > Labour.
Star Rate (INR) *
Star rate refers to a fixed rate that is used
to price labour
Recommended Quantity *
This field refers to an optimal or suggested
quantity of labour based on project
requirements.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Assets
This tab enables users to specify asset requirements, including asset, asset type and rate.
This feature set facilitates efficient asset management, ensuring the right assets are
assigned to appropriate tasks and optimizing project timelines.
To add an asset, follow the below steps:
1. Navigate to Engg > Projects > Choose a Project from Projects & Sub Projects List >
Work Order > Choose a Work Order from Work Order List Labours
2. On the Work Order page, go to the Assets tab and click Add Labour. This action
opens a new page. Proceed to fill in the required information or make selections as
needed on this page.
Fields
Explanation
Project
This field is automatically populated from
the project
Sub Project
Work Order No.
This field is automatically populated from
the work order
Asset Type *
Click Select located beside the Asset Type
field. This action will prompt a new window
to open where you can search for asset
details using the filter provided at the top.
Once you have selected the asset details,
click Accept Selected.
Note: The Asset Type data comes from
Engg > Masters > Asset.
Asset Sub Type *
This field is a further subdivision of Asset
Type. This field is populated automatically
when you select Asset Type.
Note: The Asset Sub Type data comes
from Engg > Masters > Asset Sub Type.
Asset *
The Assets that are listed against Asset
Type and Asset Sub Type are automatically
populated.
Note: The Asset data comes from Engg >
Masters > Asset.
UOM
The Unit of Measure (UOM) is automatically
populated.
Note: The UOM data comes from Engg >
Masters > Asset.
Star Rate (INR) *
Star rate refers to a fixed hourly / daily rate
that is used to rent an asset
Recommended Quantity *
This field refers to an optimal or suggested
quantity of assets based on project
requirements.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Advance Details
The advances created against a Work Order with Processed and onwards status will be
listed on this Advance Details page.
Documents
Terms and Conditions
This tab enables users to add specific terms and conditions to a work order. This feature
allows for the inclusion of project-specific terms, ensuring clarity and compliance throughout
the project lifecycle. Users can easily view, edit, and manage the terms and conditions
associated with each work order.
To add Terms and Conditions, follow the below steps:
1. Navigate to Engg > Projects > Choose a Project from Projects & Sub Projects List >
Work Order > Choose a Work Order from Work Order List Labours
2. On the Work Order page, go to the Terms and Conditions tab, click Modify, and
then click Add. This action opens a new page. Choose a condition and click Accept
Selected.
Note:
Condition Category column data comes from Purchase > Masters > Master Tables >
Condition Category Master.
Condition column data comes from Purchase > Masters > Master Tables > Condition
Master
Amendments
This tab provides an overview of amendments and versions associated with work orders.
Users can easily track and review changes made to work orders over time, including
modifications to scope, schedule, budget, and other project parameters.
7.1.2 Projects - Contracting
7.1.2.1 CO
A contracting order refers to the formal arrangement that outline the sequence of
agreements on roles, responsibilities, timelines, deliverables, and financial terms between a
client and a contractor.
To create a contracting order, follow the below steps:
Step 1: Engg > Projects > Search for a contracting project using the filter > CO > Click
Contracting Order.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Step 2: Once you click Contracting Order, you will be prompted to fill in and select
necessary details.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Fields
Explanation
Project
Automatically displayed when a contracting
project is selected.
Certifying Company
Automatically displayed when a contracting
project is selected.
Client
Automatically displayed when a contracting
project is selected. This field identifies the
client for whom the project or sub project is
being executed.
State
Select the state where the project will be
located
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
GSTIN No
Enter the GSTIN No. of the contractor
CO Currency Type
Choose the currency type to be used in the
contracting sub project: Domestic or
International.
Scope Of Work *
A mandatory field that outlines the specific
tasks, activities, and deliverables expected
to be completed as part of the project.
From Date *
A mandatory field that indicates the start
date for the project. It marks the beginning
of the period during which the contracted
work is to be performed.
To Date *
A mandatory field that specifies the end
date for the project. It marks the deadline
for completing the contracted work.
Work Description *
A mandatory field that provides a detailed
description of the work to be performed
under the project. This includes the
objectives, methodologies, and any specific
requirements.
Work Order Reference No.
Add a reference number for the work order
associated with the project. This helps in
tracking and managing the work order.
Retention
Specify the percentage of the total contract
value that will be retained by the client until
the completion of the project. This is usually
held as a guarantee against any defects or
incomplete work.
Retention Guarantee Expiry Date
Select a date when the retention guarantee
expires. After this date, the retained amount
is typically released to the contractor if all
conditions are met.
Mobilization Advance Percentage
Indicates the percentage of the contract
value that will be provided as an advance to
the contractor to help with the initial setup
and mobilization of resources.
Mobilization Advance Amount
The actual amount of money given as a
mobilization advance, calculated based on
the mobilization advance percentage.
Mobilization Guarantee Expiry Date
Select a date when the mobilization
guarantee expires.
Performance Guarantee Expiry Date
Select a date when the performance
guarantee expires. This guarantee ensures
that the contractor will complete the project
according to the agreed standards and
timelines.
EMD/BG Amount
The amount for Earnest Money Deposit
(EMD) or Bank Guarantee (BG) provided by
the contractor. This is a security deposit to
show the contractor’s commitment to the
project.
Terms & Conditions
This field contains the detailed terms and
conditions applicable to the project.
Revenue Details
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Revenue Value: Represents the total value of the revenue expected from the project. It is
the gross amount before any deductions or discounts are applied.
Discount Type: This field specifies the type of discount applied to the revenue. It can be:
Not Applicable: No discount is applied.
Fixed Amount: A specific monetary value is deducted from the revenue.
Percentage: A percentage of the revenue is deducted as a discount.
Discount Amount: Enter the actual amount of discount applied to the revenue.
Revenue Amount: The amount of revenue after deducting the discount from the revenue
value. It is the net revenue before adding any taxes or other additions.
Base Amount: The initial amount on which taxes and other additions are calculated. It is
usually the same as the revenue amount unless other adjustments are made.
Tax Additions: This field lists all the individual tax amounts that are added to the base
amount. It can include various taxes like sales tax, service tax, etc.
Total Tax Additions: The sum of all individual tax additions. This represents the total
amount of tax that is added to the base amount.
Revenue Gross Amount: The total revenue amount after adding the total tax additions to
the base amount. It represents the gross revenue including all taxes.
Tax Deductions: This field lists any tax amounts that are deducted from the revenue. These
could be withholding taxes or other types of tax deductions applicable to the project.
Documents: Add any documents related to the contracting project.
To add a document, click Add New, choose a file and click Update.
EMD Cheque/BG Details: The amount for Earnest Money Deposit (EMD) or Bank Guarantee
(BG) provided by the contractor. This is a security deposit to show the contractor’s
commitment to the project.
To add BG Details, click Add New and enter the details.
Step 3: Click Create.
Step 4: Once you create a contracting order, come back to the Contracting Order List and
click the contract under Contracting Order No., which is the first column
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Step 5: Create a BOQ under BOQ sub tab. To create a BOQ, click Create BOQ and a new
window opens, prompting you to create a BOQ.
Once you click Create BOQ, you will be prompted to fill in and select necessary details.
Fields
Explanation
Project *
Select a project from the drop-down list
Sub Project *
Select a sub project from the drop-down list
Contracting Order No.
This field is automatically displayed
Floor / Street No.
Select the floor or street number from the
drop-down list
Unit
Choose a unit from the drop-down list
Work Category *
Select a work category from the drop-down
list
Work Sub Category
If you are creating a BOQ at sub category
level, select a work sub category from the
drop-down list
BOQ Item Name *
Give a name to the BOQ
BOQ Description *
Describe the BOQ
UOM *
Select the unit of measurement from the
drop-down list
BOQ Quantity (Revenue)
Input the quantity of material
BOQ Rate (Revenue)
Input the rate of quantity of material
BOQ Amount (Revenue)
BOQ amount gets calculated based on the
formula: BOQ Quantity X BOQ Rate
Notes
Add any additional notes or comments
Remarks
Add remarks, if any
(Main) BOQ Items
(Main) BOQ Items level is ideal for standardized projects where quantities and rates remain
consistent across multiple instances. Users can input basic details like BOQ Item Name and
BOQ Description, followed by filling the BOQ Quantity and BOQ Rate. They can then specify
the requirements for Materials, Labour, Assets, and Output Material under (Main) BOQ
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Items.
Materials
Materials are listed along with material types, quantities and cost.
Labour
Labour represents the human effort required to complete tasks within the project. This
includes skilled and unskilled workers, contractors, supervisors, and other personnel
involved in construction or project execution. Labour is listed in the BOQ along with the types
of work to be performed, the number of workers required, and the cost.
Assets
Assets refer to the equipment, machinery, tools, and other tangible resources needed to
carry out project activities. This can include construction vehicles, cranes, excavators,
scaffolding, and specialized tools. Assets are included in the BOQ to account for the
resources required for construction or project execution beyond just materials and labour.
Output Material
Output materials are the products or materials produced or extracted as a result of project
activities. This can include by-products, waste materials, or any materials reclaimed or
recycled during the project. Output materials are listed in the BOQ to account for their
generation or disposal during project execution.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
BOQ Sub Item
Alternatively, users can opt for the BOQ Sub Item level for a more detailed breakdown of the
BOQ. Here, users create lists for each specific requirement, and this allows for granular
specification and individualized costing. When BOQs are created at this level, the main BOQ
Quantity and BOQ Rate become zero, as quantities and costs are calculated from the
detailed lists provided. This level is beneficial for projects with varying requirements,
enabling users to tailor specifications to each unique instance, such as different
requirements for each floor of a building.
Step 5: Once you complete the BOQ, submit it for approval. It will get forwarded to
individuals who are authorized to perform the approval action.
Import / Export BOQ
Alternatively, a BOQ can be imported / exported from / to a local drive. Follow the below
steps to perform BOQ import / export action:
Import
Step 1: First, download samples template from utilities category. You will find this on the
same new window that opens upon clicking Import / Export BOQ. Ensure the BOQs you
prepare offline are in the same format as in the template.
Step 2: Once the BOQ data is ready, select the necessary details.
Fields
Explanation
Import / Export
Import: Choose this when you need to
bring data from an external source into the
system. It involves uploading an
spreadsheet in a Excel or CSV format that
contains the data in the same format as in
the template.
Create / Update BOQ *
Create BOQ: This option is used when you
need to generate a new BOQ.
Update BOQ: This option allows you to
modify an existing BOQ, updating it with
new information, quantities, prices, or any
other relevant details.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Contracting Order No.
This field automatically shows the unique
number associated with the contracting
order
Project
Choose a project from the drop-down list
Sub Project
Choose a sub project from the drop-down
list
Floor / Street No.
Choose a floor or street number from the
drop-down list
Unit
Choose a unit within a project, such as an
apartment, office space, or any individual
entity that is part of the larger project.
Work Category *
Choose a work category, for example,
electrical, plumbing, structural, etc.
File to import *
select the file that contains the data you
want to import into the system.
Excel Sheet Name *
When importing data from an Excel file, this
field specifies the name of the sheet within
the Excel file that contains the data to be
imported. Excel files can contain multiple
sheets, so it's important to specify the
correct one.
Step 3: Click Validate.
Export
Step 1: Once you select Export radio button, you will see a filter prompting you to fill in
and/or select the necessary details.
Fields
Explanation
Import / Export
Export: Choose this to extract data from
the system to be used externally. This
involve downloading data into a file format
(like Excel or CSV)
Contracting Order No.
This field automatically shows the unique
contracting order number associated with
the contracting order
Project
Choose a project from the drop-down list
Sub Project
Choose a sub project from the drop-down
list
Floor / Street No.
Choose a floor or street number from the
drop-down list
Unit
Choose a unit within a project, such as an
apartment, office space, or any individual
entity that is part of the larger project.
Work Category *
Choose a work category, for example,
electrical, plumbing, structural, etc.
Work Sub Category
This field provides further classification
within a work category. For example, within
electrical work, subcategories could include
wiring, lighting, and outlets.
BOQ Name
Specify the name of the BOQ
BOQ Description
This field provides a detailed description of
the BOQ, outlining the scope, specifics of
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
the work, materials required, and any other
relevant details.
BOQ ID
Enter Unique ID of the BOQ
Include Resources (checkmark)
This field indicates whether to include
details about resources (such as labor,
materials, equipment) in the BOQ.
Step 2: Once you fill in and select necessary details on the filter, click Show. The BOQ(s)
will list below the filter. Select a BOQ(s) and click Download.
Attach / Copy BOQ
You may use Attach / Copy BOQ option when there is already a similar BOQ in the system.
The existing BOQ can be copied and a new BOQ created against a contracting order.
Access the filter on the left to search for an identical existing BOQ. Once you fill in and / or
select the necessary details on the filter, click Show. Select the BOQ, and then click Copy
bottom on the right side of the screen.
7.1.2.2 CO BOQ Map
Consider this scenario where a developer acts as a client and decides to assign a project to
a contractor to construct an apartment. The developer provides the contractor with a
revenue BOQ totalling 20 crores. The contractor then prepares a cost BOQ, which might
amount to 15 crores, leaving a margin of 5 crores for the contractor's profit. The contractor
can create either a single cost BOQ or multiple cost BOQs. In any case, the relevant cost
BOQs will be mapped to the appropriate revenue BOQ. In the In4Suite system, the CO BOQ
represents the revenue BOQ, while the cost BOQ is referred to as the Sub Project BOQ.
CO BOQ Mapping:
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Eligibility:
CO BOQ mapping is applicable only for approved contracting orders.
Filtering Options:
CO BOQ can be filtered by Work Category/Sub Work Category and its BOQ Name/ID.
Mapping Features:
Link to Map/View/Reset:
Mapping: Map CO BOQ to Subproject BOQs.
Viewing: View mapped Subproject BOQs for a CO BOQ.
Reset: Un-map the Subproject BOQs from a CO BOQ.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Mapping Sequence:
One-to-one
One-to-many
Many-to-many
Color Legends:
Green: Mapped and Work Order (WO) issued.
Brown: Mapped but Work Order (WO) not issued.
No Color: Not mapped.
Blue: Subcategory.
7.1.2.3 Details
This tab displays the basic details such as project name, code, estimated start date, end
date, etc., about the project.
7.1.2.4 Staffing
The Staffing tab allows users to manage project personnel effectively. Under Project
Staffing, users can assign a Project Manager to oversee the entire project. Additionally,
under Work Order Staffing, users can allocate Engineers and technical staff to specific work
orders. This feature ensures proper delegation of responsibilities and resources, optimizing
project performance and coordination. By centralizing staffing information within the tab,
users can easily track personnel assignments and ensure that each work order is adequately
staffed for successful execution.
Project Staffing
Project Staffing involves assigning personnel to oversee and manage the entire project,
which may consist of multiple work orders. Typically, a Project Manager or Chief Engineer is
assigned to supervise the overall progress and coordination of various work orders within the
project.
1. Navigate to Engg > Projects > Choose a Project from Projects & Sub Projects List >
Staffing > Project Staffing > Click Add Staff
2. Fill in and select the necessary details such as Project Name, Sub Project Name,
Project Manager/Chief Engineer, Employee Name, Role, From Date, To Date,
and Utilization.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
3. Click Update
Work Order Staffing
Work Order Staffing focuses on assigning personnel specifically to individual work orders
within the project. Typically, engineers, technical staff, or workers with specialized skills are
assigned to execute tasks within each work order.
1. Navigate to Engg > Projects > Choose a Project from Projects & Sub Projects List >
Staffing > Work Order Staffing > Click Add Staff
2. Select the necessary details such as Work Category, Sub Category, Work Order and
Engineers.
3. Once you have selected the necessary details, click Add Staff.
7.1.2.5 Work Order
A work order is a legal agreement between a developer and a contractor which serves as the
foundation for their collaboration. This agreement outlines the terms and conditions governing
their professional relationship, including project scope, timelines, responsibilities, and financial
arrangements. Within this agreement, provisions are made for the creation of work orders,
which serve as formal requests for specific tasks or services to be completed.
Workflow
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
To create a new work order, follow the below steps:
Prerequisite
4. Set up Display Number configuration for the work order, including both project level
and subproject level work orders.
5. Define the workflow for managing work orders
6. Create Work Category/Sub Work Category in Masters. To do so, go to the Engg
menu >> Masters >> Master tables >> Work category masters. The procedure to
create the Work category and subcategory is as follows
a. Navigate to Engg.
b. Select Master Tables.
c. Choose Work Category Type Master from the list and click Go.
d. Position the cursor to the top right corner and click Create.
Steps
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Projects > Choose a Project from Projects & Sub Projects List >
Work Order > Work Order List > Create Order List
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Step 2: Basic Details
Fields
Explanation
Project
Select the Project name from the drop-down list
WO Currency Type
Select the type of currency to be used in the project
transaction: Domestic or International
Work Order Scope
Choose the Work Order scope: Single Category or
Multiple Categories. In Single Category, you will
consolidate multiple BOQs into one work order with a
single payment, ideal for contractors with multiple
subprojects. For Multiple Categories, you will create
separate work orders at project or subproject levels.
Work Order Type
Select the Work Order Type from the drop-down list:
Contractor, Consultant, Internal or Labour.
Work Category *
Select the Work Category from the drop-down list.
The work categories from BOQ will reflect here.
Work Sub Category
Select this if you want to create a work order at the
sub category level. Else, leave it blank.
Contractor Name *
Enter the name of the contractor, who the work
order is to be assigned to.
GSTIN No
Enter the GSTIN No. of the contractor
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Contact Person
Enter the name of the contact person.
Discount Type
Mobilization Advance Percentage
Mobilization refers to the activities that are carried out
by a contractor in order to prepare for a construction
work before the actual work begins.
Enter the percentage of the work order value that you
want to process as Mobilization Advance
Percentage.
Mobilization Advance Amount
Enter the Mobilization Advance Amount
Mobilization Guarantee Expiry Date
This refers to the guarantee of the date by which the
setup to begin the construction work is ready
Performance Guarantee Expiry Date
This refers to the guarantee of the date by which the
contractor has committed to complete the project
undertaken
EMD/BG Amount
Enter the bank guarantee amount that a contractor
has to deposit with a bank
From (Tentative) *
Select a date from the calendar when EMD/BG
becomes effective from
To (Tentative) *
Select a date from the calendar when EMD/BG will
be effective to
Work Order Printing Date
Select a date from the calendar when the work
order will be printed
Work Order Payment From
The application will allow payments to contractors in
the following ways:
4. Abstracts: Payments can be made with
reference to abstracts (based on work done).
5. Work order value payments: Payments can
be made based on the value specified in the
work order.
6. Payment schedule: Payments can be made
by defining the payment schedule (based on
conditions).
Remarks
Add remarks or comments, if any
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Scope Of Work *
Summarize tasks and objectives that will become
part of the agreement between a developer and
another party
Work Description
Describe a detailed breakdown of actions,
specifications, and quantities of work that is
expected to be performed by a party
Tax Details
Notes on calculation of taxes:
The Percentage of work order value column in the Work Order screen is made free
text to handle defaulting of the taxable amount in the payment certificate and to
calculate new taxes on the residual work order value.
Changes in the percentage of work order value in the work order edit page will not
recalculate taxable and tax amounts.
An alert is provided to the user when attempting to change the percentage of the
work order value, which reads, "Work Order tax amount will not be calculated based
on % of Work order value. Please change the taxable/tax amount."
The application will not allow the user to create a work order without entering the %
of work order value to facilitate the general practice of entering taxable amounts
using a percentage of the work order.
This Percentage of work order value is considered for the defaulting of the certified
amount in the payment certificate as usual, and the calculation of tax amount and
taxable amount remains the same.
When the user changes tax amount and taxable amount, the % of work order value
will recalculate.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
During the amendment of the work order, the system will calculate the taxable
amount directly based on % of work order value using the following formula:
Taxable amount = ((Total work order value - Total payment certified amount) * (% of
work order value)) + (sum of taxable amount for a tax in payment certificates).
According to the above formula, if any new taxes are to be added to the work order
and if the work order is amended, the taxable amount for the tax will be calculated
based on the residual work order value.
If the work order is terminated, the system will calculate the taxable amount based on
the formula below: Taxable amount = ((Total work order terminated value - Total
payment certified amount) * (% of work order value of a tax)) + (Sum of taxable
amount for a tax in payment certificates).
Since the % of work order is user-editable for the purpose of defaulting taxable
amounts in work order payment certificates, the taxable amount and % of work order
may not match if the user manually calculates the tax amount based on % of work
order value in the work order.
During the amendment, the application calculates the taxable amount based on the
present % of work order value for a tax and remaining balance of work order value.
The logic to calculate tax amount remains the same, based on the taxable amount.
Existing taxes may change if the work order is amended, as the taxable amount
calculation is changed to get the value based on the remaining balance of work
order.
A Note is provided in the work order create, edit, and view pages as follows:
o Work Order tax amount will not change if % of work order Value is changed.
o % of Work Order value will be used to calculate taxable amounts in Work
Order payments.
If a new tax is added manually, the user will have to calculate the residual taxable
amount manually and enter it in the taxable amount column, and the application will
calculate the % of work order value and tax amounts accordingly.
In the above case, the user can change the % of work order value to 100% if the new
tax has to be on the residual/remaining unpaid work order value.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Tax amount for exclusive taxes in work order create, edit, and view pages will be:
Tax amount = Taxable amount * Tax percentage.
Tax amount for Inclusive taxes in work order create, edit, and view pages will be
based on two steps:
3. Calculate base amount as BASE AMOUNT = (100/ (100+Tax percentage))
*Taxable amount.
4. Calculate tax amount as TAX AMOUNT = Base amount * Tax percentage.
Retention Details
This feature allows construction developers to retain a percentage of the work order value
and defer payment to a later date. This enables better cash flow management and ensures
completion of work before full payment.
Follow the below steps to add Retention Details:
1. Click on Add Row
2. Choose the type of retention under Type
3. Enter a percentage value of the work order under Percentage
4. Choose an expiry date under Expiry Date
Service Indent Details
Service Indent is a feature designed to streamline service scheduling with defined start and
finish dates. It provides a structured framework for organizing service tasks within specific
timeframes. Users can input the start date, marking the initiation of the service, and the finish
date, signifying its completion. This feature aids in planning and tracking service activities
efficiently, while ensuring timely execution and resource optimization. Overall, it serves as a
crucial tool for managing service operations with precision and effectiveness.
To add a service indent to a work order, follow the below steps:
1. On the Create Work Order page, navigate to the Service Indent Details tab
2. Then, click Add row
3. Select an indent and click Accept Selected.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Note: Service Indent data comes from Engg > Inventory > Service Indent
Other Details
This tab provides a structured presentation of various fields related to policies, licenses, and
their respective expiration and renewal dates. It includes information such as the expiry date,
periodicity (frequency of review or renewal), and next due date for each category.
To enter details related to policies and licences, follow the below steps:
1. On the Create Work Order page, navigate to the Other Details tab
2. Fill in and select the details for the following fields.
Fields
Explanation
Work Category (WC) Policy Expiry Date
Select a date when the policy covering a
specific work category ends. It indicates the
need for renewal or adjustment.
Work Category (WC) Policy Periodicity
This field refers to the frequency at which
the policy for a particular work category is
reviewed or renewed. It determines the
intervals between policy updates.
Work Category (WC) Policy Next Due Date
Select an upcoming date when the policy
for a specific work category is due for
renewal or reassessment.
Labour License No.
Enter the labor license number. A labour
license number indicates that the contractor
has legal authorization for employment
within specified parameters.
Labour License Expiry Date
Select a date when the labor license
expires. It necessitates renewal to ensure
continued compliance with employment
regulations.
Contractors All Risk Policy (CAR) Expiry
Date
Select an expiry date of the insurance
policy covering all risks for contractors. It
prompts reevaluation or renewal.
Contractors All Risk Policy (CAR)
Periodicity
This field refers to the frequency at which
the contractors' all-risk policy undergoes
review or renewal and determines the
intervals between policy updates.
Contractors All Risk Policy (CAR) Next Due
Date
Select an upcoming date when the
contractors' all-risk policy requires renewal
or reassessment to maintain coverage.
Contractor/Consultant Details
The details of contractors / consultants automatically flow to this category from Masters.
EMD Cheque/BG Details
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Given the substantial financial involvement, developers often require contractors to provide a
bank guarantee by depositing a specified sum with a bank.
Follow the below steps to update bank guarantee details:
1. Click Add New
2. Choose the Bank Name
3. Select the Cheque Date from the calendar
4. Enter the Cheque/BG No
5. Input the Cheque Amount
6. Choose BG Handover Date from the calendar
7. Specify the BG Expiry Date
8. Select the Claim Date
Documents
Upload any document related to the work order under Documents.
Follow the below steps to upload a document:
1. Click Add New
2. Choose a file and click Update
Important
Once you have created a work order at the project level, you can add BOQs, materials,
labours, assets, advance details, terms and conditions, and more.
BOQ
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
The quantity and cost are loaded from a Bill of Quantities (BOQ) onto a work order. It's
mandatory to link at least one BOQ to a work order.
To add a BOQ to work order, follow the below steps:
1. After creating a work order, navigate to the Work Order tab and select the desired
work order
2. Click on the BOQ option
3. Click on Add New BOQ
4. Choose the Sub Project and Work Category to list the available BOQs
Note:
Users can modify the quantity and rate of the BOQ
Once an Abstract or Indent is created for the BOQ, the application will restrict
changes to the BOQ’s rate
Once Payment/Advance is created for the BOQ, application will prevent deleting the
BOQ
Step 5: Click Create.
Step 6: Navigate to the Status section, select Submitted, input any remarks, and then
proceed to update the status by clicking on Update Status.
Materials
This tab allows users to specify the materials required for the work order. It includes details
such as the type of material, quantity needed, cost per unit, supplier information, and any
other relevant specifications.
1. Navigate to Engg > Projects > Choose a Project from Projects & Sub Projects List >
Work Order > Choose a Work Order from Work Order List Labours > Click Materials
2. Click Add Free Supply, and this action opens a new page called Add Material.
Proceed to fill in the required information or make selections as needed on this page.
Fields
Explanation
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Project
This field is automatically populated from
the work order
Sub Project
This field is automatically populated from
the work order
Work Order No.
This field is automatically populated from
the work order
Material Type *
Click Select located beside the material
type field. This action will prompt a new
window to open where you can search for a
material(s) using the filter provided at the
top. Once you have selected the
material(s), click Accept Selected.
Note: The material type data comes from
Purchase > Masters > Materials.
Material Sub Type *
This field is a further subdivision of material
type. This field is populated automatically
when you select material(s) under Material
Type.
Note: The sub material data under Sub
Material Type field comes from Purchase >
Masters > Materials.
Material *
The items that are listed against Material
Type and Material are automatically
populated.
Note: The material data under Sub Material
Type field comes from Purchase >
Masters > Materials.
UOM
The Unit of Measure (UOM) is automatically
populated.
Note: The UOM data comes from
Purchase > Masters > Materials.
Inclusive
Star Rate
Star rate refers to a fixed rate that is used
to price materials
Estimated Quantity
This field refers to an approximate amount
of material required for a work order.
Recommended Quantity *
This field refers to an optimal or suggested
quantity based on project requirements or
industry standards.
Mark Up Percentage
Mark up percentage is a percentage that is
added to the cost price to determine profit
margin.
Debitable
Checkmark Debitable if an expense or cost
is chargeable or billable to an account.
Debitable At
Choose whether it is debitable at Star Rate
or Actual Rate.
Labours
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
This tab enables users to specify labour requirements, including labour category, labour
quantity and hourly rate. This feature set facilitates efficient labour resource management,
ensuring the right personnel are assigned to appropriate tasks and optimizing project
timelines.
To add labour details, follow the below steps:
1. Navigate to Engg > Projects > Choose a Project from Projects & Sub Projects List >
Work Order > Choose a Work Order from Work Order List Labours
2. On the Work Order page, go to the Labours tab and click Add Labour. This action
opens a new page. Proceed to fill in the required information or make selections as
needed on this page.
Fields
Explanation
Project
This field is automatically populated from
the project
Sub Project
Work Order No.
This field is automatically populated from
the work order
Labour Category *
Click Select located beside the Labour
Category field. This action will prompt a
new window to open where you can search
for labour details using the filter provided at
the top. Once you have selected the labour
details, click Accept Selected.
Note: The labour category data comes from
Engg > Masters > Labour.
Labour Sub Category *
This field is a further subdivision of Labour
Type. This field is populated automatically
when you select Labour Category under the
Labours tab.
Note: The labour sub category data comes
from Engg > Masters > Labour.
Labour Type *
This field is populated automatically when
you select labour category under the
Labours tab.
Note: The Labour Type category data
comes from Engg > Masters > Labour.
UOM
The Unit of Measure (UOM) is automatically
populated.
Note: The UOM data comes from Engg >
Masters > Labour.
Star Rate (INR) *
Star rate refers to a fixed rate that is used
to price labour
Recommended Quantity *
This field refers to an optimal or suggested
quantity of labour based on project
requirements.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Assets
This tab enables users to specify asset requirements, including asset, asset type and rate.
This feature set facilitates efficient asset management, ensuring the right assets are
assigned to appropriate tasks and optimizing project timelines.
To add an asset, follow the below steps:
1. Navigate to Engg > Projects > Choose a Project from Projects & Sub Projects List >
Work Order > Choose a Work Order from Work Order List Labours
2. On the Work Order page, go to the Assets tab and click Add Labour. This action
opens a new page. Proceed to fill in the required information or make selections as
needed on this page.
Fields
Explanation
Project
This field is automatically populated from
the project
Sub Project
Work Order No.
This field is automatically populated from
the work order
Asset Type *
Click Select located beside the Asset Type
field. This action will prompt a new window
to open where you can search for asset
details using the filter provided at the top.
Once you have selected the asset details,
click Accept Selected.
Note: The Asset Type data comes from
Engg > Masters > Asset.
Asset Sub Type *
This field is a further subdivision of Asset
Type. This field is populated automatically
when you select Asset Type.
Note: The Asset Sub Type data comes
from Engg > Masters > Asset Sub Type.
Asset *
The Assets that are listed against Asset
Type and Asset Sub Type are automatically
populated.
Note: The Asset data comes from Engg >
Masters > Asset.
UOM
The Unit of Measure (UOM) is automatically
populated.
Note: The UOM data comes from Engg >
Masters > Asset.
Star Rate (INR) *
Star rate refers to a fixed hourly / daily rate
that is used to rent an asset
Recommended Quantity *
This field refers to an optimal or suggested
quantity of assets based on project
requirements.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Advance Details
The advances created against a Work Order with Processed and onwards status will be
listed on this Advance Details page.
Documents
Terms and Conditions
This tab enables users to add specific terms and conditions to a work order. This feature
allows for the inclusion of project-specific terms, ensuring clarity and compliance throughout
the project lifecycle. Users can easily view, edit, and manage the terms and conditions
associated with each work order.
To add Terms and Conditions, follow the below steps:
1. Navigate to Engg > Projects > Choose a Project from Projects & Sub Projects List >
Work Order > Choose a Work Order from Work Order List Labours
2. On the Work Order page, go to the Terms and Conditions tab, click Modify, and
then click Add. This action opens a new page. Choose a condition and click Accept
Selected.
Note:
Condition Category column data comes from Purchase > Masters > Master Tables >
Condition Category Master.
Condition column data comes from Purchase > Masters > Master Tables > Condition
Master
Amendments
This tab provides an overview of amendments and versions associated with work orders.
Users can easily track and review changes made to work orders over time, including
modifications to scope, schedule, budget, and other project parameters.
7.1.3 Sub Project Engineering
7.1.3.1 Budget
In the real estate business, a budget is broadly categorized into work category budget and
material budget.
Details
Work Category Budget
Work category budget serves as a comprehensive allocation of funds specifically earmarked
for different types of tasks within the project. This budgeting feature enables users to
manage and track expenses associated with various work categories such as construction,
electrical and plumbing, interior and exterior, and painting efficiently.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
When creating work orders, the Bill of Quantities (BOQs) associated with them automatically
display the work categories within the Work Category Budget section. If you wish to modify a
BOQ or include additional work category budgets, you can easily manage these tasks within
the Work Category Budget interface.
To load a work category from a BOQ, follow the below steps:
1. Navigate to Engg >> Projects >> Choose a Sub Project
2. Under the Budget menu, go to Work Category Budget
3. Scroll to the bottom and click Modify
4. Add any documents related to the work category budget. To add a document, click
Add Documents under Documents on Work Category Budget page
5. On the top left of the work category table, click Load from BOQ
Alternatively,
1. On the Work Category Budget page, scroll to the bottom and click Modify
2. Click Add Work Category and a new blank category gets added
3. Select Work Category/ Sub Category and enter details including Rate/Sq. Mt., Tax,
Amount Allocated and Work Order Payments.
4. Add any documents related to the work category budget. To add a document, click
Add Documents under Documents on Work Category Budget page
5. Click Update
Material Budget
Material budget facilitates the precise allocation and monitoring of financial resources
dedicated to acquiring materials for construction purposes. Through this feature, users can
define budgets for specific materials, monitor expenditures, and ensure optimal resource
utilization.
When creating work orders, the Bill of Quantities (BOQs) associated with them automatically
display the material budget within the Material Budget section. If you wish to modify a BOQ
or add a new line under Material Budget, you can easily manage these tasks within the
Material Budget interface.
To load a material budget category from a BOQ, follow the below steps:
1. Navigate to Engg >> Projects >> Choose a Sub Project
2. Under the Budget menu, go to Material Budget category
3. Scroll to the bottom and click Modify
4. Add any documents related to the material budget category. To add a document,
click Choose File under File to Import on Material Budget page.
Note: You can also upload material budget from an Excel sheet but before you do
so, ensure the material budget is in the right format that In4Suite application will
support.
To download Excel Template, click Download Excel Template, prepare the material
budget in the given template and upload the sheet.
5. On the top left of the Material Budget table, click Load from BOQ
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Alternatively,
1. On the Material Budget page, scroll to the bottom and click Modify
2. Click Add Material Budget and a new blank category gets added
3. Select Material Type and enter details including quantity, rate, purchase order, supplier
payments and service provider payments.
4. Add any documents related to the material budget category. To add a document, click
Choose File under File to Import on Material Budget page.
Work Category Budget Comparison
The Work Category Budget Comparison feature allows users to compare two work order
categories. It enables users to analyze budget allocations and expenses associated with
different types of tasks within the project, helping in making actionable decisions. Users can
easily assess differences and similarities between work categories, in order to manage
budget effectively.
To compare two work order categories, follow the below steps:
1. Navigate to Engg >> Projects >> Choose a Sub Project
2. Under the Budget menu, go to Work Category Budget Comparison
3. Select the two versions that you wish to compare and click Show
Material Budget Comparison
The Material Budget Comparison feature allows users to do a complete analysis of material
costs, such as bricks, steel, cement, and more. They can effortlessly compare budgets
across different materials. By providing detailed insights into pricing and quantity variations,
this functionality empowers project managers to optimize resource allocation, mitigate
financial risks, and enhance overall project profitability.
To compare two material categories, follow the below steps:
1. Navigate to Engg >> Projects >> Choose a Sub Project
2. Under the Budget menu, go to Material Budget Comparison
3. Select the two versions that you wish to compare and click Show
Activity Schedule
This tab enables users to input start and end dates for various work categories and
subcategories. This feature allows for detailed planning and scheduling of project activities,
ensuring timely completion of tasks. By centralizing activity scheduling within the tab,
stakeholders can easily monitor progress and make adjustments as needed to maintain
project timelines and meet objectives.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
7.1.3.2 Staffing
The Staffing tab allows users to manage project personnel effectively. Under Sub Project
Staffing, users can assign a Project Manager to oversee the entire project. Additionally,
under Work Order Staffing, users can allocate Engineers and technical staff to specific work
orders. This feature ensures proper delegation of responsibilities and resources, optimizing
project performance and coordination. By centralizing staffing information within the tab,
users can easily track personnel assignments and ensure that each work order is adequately
staffed for successful execution.
Sub Project Staffing
Sub Project Staffing involves assigning personnel to oversee and manage the entire sub
project, which may consist of multiple work orders. Typically, a Project Manager or Chief
Engineer is assigned to supervise the overall progress and coordination of various work
orders within the sub project.
4. Navigate to Engg > Projects > Choose a Sub Project from Projects & Sub Projects
List > Staffing > Sub Project Staffing > Click Add Staff
5. Fill in and select the necessary details such as Project Name, Sub Project Name,
Project Manager/Chief Engineer, Employee Name, Role, From Date, To Date,
and Utilization.
6. Click Update
Work Order Staffing
Work Order Staffing focuses on assigning personnel specifically to individual work orders
within the sub project. Typically, engineers, technical staff, or workers with specialized skills
are assigned to execute tasks within each work order.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
4. Navigate to Engg > Projects > Choose a Sub Project from Projects & Sub Projects
List > Staffing > Work Order Staffing > Click Add Staff
5. Select the necessary details such as Work Category, Sub Category, Work Order and
Engineers.
6. Once you have selected the necessary details, click Add Staff.
7.1.3.3 Work Order
A work order is a legal agreement between a developer and a contractor which serves as the
foundation for their collaboration. This agreement outlines the terms and conditions governing
their professional relationship, including project scope, timelines, responsibilities, and financial
arrangements. Within this agreement, provisions are made for the creation of work orders,
which serve as formal requests for specific tasks or services to be completed.
Workflow
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
To create a new work order, follow the below steps:
Prerequisite
7. Set up Display Number configuration for the work order, including both project level
and subproject level work orders.
8. Define the workflow for managing work orders
9. Create Work Category/Sub Work Category in Masters. To do so, go to the Engg
menu >> Masters >> Master tables >> Work category masters. The procedure to
create the Work category and subcategory is as follows
a. Navigate to Engg.
b. Select Master Tables.
c. Choose Work Category Type Master from the list and click Go.
d. Position the cursor to the top right corner and click Create.
Steps
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Projects > Choose a Sub Project from Projects & Sub Projects List
> Work Order > Work Order List > Create Order List
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Step 2: Basic Details
Fields
Explanation
Project
Select the Project name from the drop-down list
WO Currency Type
Select the type of currency to be used in the project
transaction: Domestic or International
Work Order Scope
Choose the Work Order scope: Single Category or
Multiple Categories. In Single Category, you will
consolidate multiple BOQs into one work order with a
single payment, ideal for contractors with multiple
subprojects. For Multiple Categories, you will create
separate work orders at project or subproject levels.
Work Order Type
Select the Work Order Type from the drop-down list:
Contractor, Consultant, Internal or Labour.
Work Category *
Select the Work Category from the drop-down list.
The work categories from BOQ will reflect here.
Work Sub Category
Select this if you want to create a work order at the
sub category level. Else, leave it blank.
Contractor Name *
Enter the name of the contractor, who the work
order is to be assigned to.
GSTIN No
Enter the GSTIN No. of the contractor
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Contact Person
Enter the name of the contact person.
Discount Type
Mobilization Advance Percentage
Mobilization refers to the activities that are carried out
by a contractor in order to prepare for a construction
work before the actual work begins.
Enter the percentage of the work order value that you
want to process as Mobilization Advance
Percentage.
Mobilization Advance Amount
Enter the Mobilization Advance Amount
Mobilization Guarantee Expiry Date
This refers to the guarantee of the date by which the
setup to begin the construction work is ready
Performance Guarantee Expiry Date
This refers to the guarantee of the date by which the
contractor has committed to complete the project
undertaken
EMD/BG Amount
Enter the bank guarantee amount that a contractor
has to deposit with a bank
From (Tentative) *
Select a date from the calendar when EMD/BG
becomes effective from
To (Tentative) *
Select a date from the calendar when EMD/BG will
be effective to
Work Order Printing Date
Select a date from the calendar when the work
order will be printed
Work Order Payment From
The application will allow payments to contractors in
the following ways:
7. Abstracts: Payments can be made with
reference to abstracts (based on work done).
8. Work order value payments: Payments can
be made based on the value specified in the
work order.
9. Payment schedule: Payments can be made
by defining the payment schedule (based on
conditions).
Remarks
Add remarks or comments, if any
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Scope Of Work *
Summarize tasks and objectives that will become
part of the agreement between a developer and
another party
Work Description
Describe a detailed breakdown of actions,
specifications, and quantities of work that is
expected to be performed by a party
Tax Details
Notes on calculation of taxes:
The Percentage of work order value column in the Work Order screen is made free
text to handle defaulting of the taxable amount in the payment certificate and to
calculate new taxes on the residual work order value.
Changes in the percentage of work order value in the work order edit page will not
recalculate taxable and tax amounts.
An alert is provided to the user when attempting to change the percentage of the
work order value, which reads, "Work Order tax amount will not be calculated based
on % of Work order value. Please change the taxable/tax amount."
The application will not allow the user to create a work order without entering the %
of work order value to facilitate the general practice of entering taxable amounts
using a percentage of the work order.
This Percentage of work order value is considered for the defaulting of the certified
amount in the payment certificate as usual, and the calculation of tax amount and
taxable amount remains the same.
When the user changes tax amount and taxable amount, the % of work order value
will recalculate.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
During the amendment of the work order, the system will calculate the taxable
amount directly based on % of work order value using the following formula:
Taxable amount = ((Total work order value - Total payment certified amount) * (% of
work order value)) + (sum of taxable amount for a tax in payment certificates).
According to the above formula, if any new taxes are to be added to the work order
and if the work order is amended, the taxable amount for the tax will be calculated
based on the residual work order value.
If the work order is terminated, the system will calculate the taxable amount based on
the formula below: Taxable amount = ((Total work order terminated value - Total
payment certified amount) * (% of work order value of a tax)) + (Sum of taxable
amount for a tax in payment certificates).
Since the % of work order is user-editable for the purpose of defaulting taxable
amounts in work order payment certificates, the taxable amount and % of work order
may not match if the user manually calculates the tax amount based on % of work
order value in the work order.
During the amendment, the application calculates the taxable amount based on the
present % of work order value for a tax and remaining balance of work order value.
The logic to calculate tax amount remains the same, based on the taxable amount.
Existing taxes may change if the work order is amended, as the taxable amount
calculation is changed to get the value based on the remaining balance of work
order.
A Note is provided in the work order create, edit, and view pages as follows:
o Work Order tax amount will not change if % of work order Value is changed.
o % of Work Order value will be used to calculate taxable amounts in Work
Order payments.
If a new tax is added manually, the user will have to calculate the residual taxable
amount manually and enter it in the taxable amount column, and the application will
calculate the % of work order value and tax amounts accordingly.
In the above case, the user can change the % of work order value to 100% if the new
tax has to be on the residual/remaining unpaid work order value.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Tax amount for exclusive taxes in work order create, edit, and view pages will be:
Tax amount = Taxable amount * Tax percentage.
Tax amount for Inclusive taxes in work order create, edit, and view pages will be
based on two steps:
5. Calculate base amount as BASE AMOUNT = (100/ (100+Tax percentage))
*Taxable amount.
6. Calculate tax amount as TAX AMOUNT = Base amount * Tax percentage.
Retention Details
This feature allows construction developers to retain a percentage of the work order value
and defer payment to a later date. This enables better cash flow management and ensures
completion of work before full payment.
Follow the below steps to add Retention Details:
5. Click on Add Row
6. Choose the type of retention under Type
7. Enter a percentage value of the work order under Percentage
8. Choose an expiry date under Expiry Date
Service Indent Details
Service Indent is a feature designed to streamline service scheduling with defined start and
finish dates. It provides a structured framework for organizing service tasks within specific
timeframes. Users can input the start date, marking the initiation of the service, and the finish
date, signifying its completion. This feature aids in planning and tracking service activities
efficiently, while ensuring timely execution and resource optimization. Overall, it serves as a
crucial tool for managing service operations with precision and effectiveness.
To add a service indent to a work order, follow the below steps:
4. On the Create Work Order page, navigate to the Service Indent Details tab
5. Then, click Add row
6. Select an indent and click Accept Selected.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Note: Service Indent data comes from Engg > Inventory > Service Indent
Other Details
This tab provides a structured presentation of various fields related to policies, licenses, and
their respective expiration and renewal dates. It includes information such as the expiry date,
periodicity (frequency of review or renewal), and next due date for each category.
To enter details related to policies and licences, follow the below steps:
3. On the Create Work Order page, navigate to the Other Details tab
4. Fill in and select the details for the following fields.
Fields
Explanation
Work Category (WC) Policy Expiry Date
Select a date when the policy covering a
specific work category ends. It indicates the
need for renewal or adjustment.
Work Category (WC) Policy Periodicity
This field refers to the frequency at which
the policy for a particular work category is
reviewed or renewed. It determines the
intervals between policy updates.
Work Category (WC) Policy Next Due Date
Select an upcoming date when the policy
for a specific work category is due for
renewal or reassessment.
Labour License No.
Enter the labor license number. A labour
license number indicates that the contractor
has legal authorization for employment
within specified parameters.
Labour License Expiry Date
Select a date when the labor license
expires. It necessitates renewal to ensure
continued compliance with employment
regulations.
Contractors All Risk Policy (CAR) Expiry
Date
Select an expiry date of the insurance
policy covering all risks for contractors. It
prompts reevaluation or renewal.
Contractors All Risk Policy (CAR)
Periodicity
This field refers to the frequency at which
the contractors' all-risk policy undergoes
review or renewal and determines the
intervals between policy updates.
Contractors All Risk Policy (CAR) Next Due
Date
Select an upcoming date when the
contractors' all-risk policy requires renewal
or reassessment to maintain coverage.
Contractor/Consultant Details
The details of contractors / consultants automatically flow to this category from Masters.
EMD Cheque/BG Details
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Given the substantial financial involvement, developers often require contractors to provide a
bank guarantee by depositing a specified sum with a bank.
Follow the below steps to update bank guarantee details:
9. Click Add New
10. Choose the Bank Name
11. Select the Cheque Date from the calendar
12. Enter the Cheque/BG No
13. Input the Cheque Amount
14. Choose BG Handover Date from the calendar
15. Specify the BG Expiry Date
16. Select the Claim Date
Documents
Upload any document related to the work order under Documents.
Follow the below steps to upload a document:
3. Click Add New
4. Choose a file and click Update
Important
Once you have created a work order at the sub project level, you can add BOQs, materials,
labours, assets, advance details, terms and conditions, and more.
BOQ
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
The quantity and cost are loaded from a Bill of Quantities (BOQ) onto a work order. It's
mandatory to link at least one BOQ to a work order.
To add a BOQ to work order, follow the below steps:
5. After creating a work order, navigate to the Work Order tab and select the desired
work order
6. Click on the BOQ option
7. Click on Add New BOQ
8. Choose the Sub Project and Work Category to list the available BOQs
Note:
Users can modify the quantity and rate of the BOQ
Once an Abstract or Indent is created for the BOQ, the application will restrict
changes to the BOQ’s rate
Once Payment/Advance is created for the BOQ, application will prevent deleting the
BOQ
Step 5: Click Create.
Step 6: Navigate to the Status section, select Submitted, input any remarks, and then
proceed to update the status by clicking on Update Status.
Materials
This tab allows users to specify the materials required for the work order. It includes details
such as the type of material, quantity needed, cost per unit, supplier information, and any
other relevant specifications.
3. Navigate to Engg > Projects > Choose a Sub Project from Projects & Sub Projects
List > Work Order > Choose a Work Order from Work Order List Labours > Click
Materials
4. Click Add Free Supply, and this action opens a new page called Add Material.
Proceed to fill in the required information or make selections as needed on this page.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Fields
Explanation
Project
This field is automatically populated from
the work order
Sub Project
This field is automatically populated from
the work order
Work Order No.
This field is automatically populated from
the work order
Material Type *
Click Select located beside the material
type field. This action will prompt a new
window to open where you can search for a
material(s) using the filter provided at the
top. Once you have selected the
material(s), click Accept Selected.
Note: The material type data comes from
Purchase > Masters > Materials.
Material Sub Type *
This field is a further subdivision of material
type. This field is populated automatically
when you select material(s) under Material
Type.
Note: The sub material data under Sub
Material Type field comes from Purchase >
Masters > Materials.
Material *
The items that are listed against Material
Type and Material are automatically
populated.
Note: The material data under Sub Material
Type field comes from Purchase >
Masters > Materials.
UOM
The Unit of Measure (UOM) is automatically
populated.
Note: The UOM data comes from
Purchase > Masters > Materials.
Inclusive
Star Rate
Star rate refers to a fixed rate that is used
to price materials
Estimated Quantity
This field refers to an approximate amount
of material required for a work order.
Recommended Quantity *
This field refers to an optimal or suggested
quantity based on project requirements or
industry standards.
Mark Up Percentage
Mark up percentage is a percentage that is
added to the cost price to determine profit
margin.
Debitable
Checkmark Debitable if an expense or cost
is chargeable or billable to an account.
Debitable At
Choose whether it is debitable at Star Rate
or Actual Rate.
Labours
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
This tab enables users to specify labour requirements, including labour category, labour
quantity and hourly rate. This feature set facilitates efficient labour resource management,
ensuring the right personnel are assigned to appropriate tasks and optimizing project
timelines.
To add labour details, follow the below steps:
3. Navigate to Engg > Projects > Choose a Sub Project from Projects & Sub Projects
List > Work Order > Choose a Work Order from Work Order List Labours
4. On the Work Order page, go to the Labours tab and click Add Labour. This action
opens a new page. Proceed to fill in the required information or make selections as
needed on this page.
Fields
Explanation
Project
This field is automatically populated from
the project
Sub Project
Work Order No.
This field is automatically populated from
the work order
Labour Category *
Click Select located beside the Labour
Category field. This action will prompt a
new window to open where you can search
for labour details using the filter provided at
the top. Once you have selected the labour
details, click Accept Selected.
Note: The labour category data comes from
Engg > Masters > Labour.
Labour Sub Category *
This field is a further subdivision of Labour
Type. This field is populated automatically
when you select Labour Category under the
Labours tab.
Note: The labour sub category data comes
from Engg > Masters > Labour.
Labour Type *
This field is populated automatically when
you select labour category under the
Labours tab.
Note: The Labour Type category data
comes from Engg > Masters > Labour.
UOM
The Unit of Measure (UOM) is automatically
populated.
Note: The UOM data comes from Engg >
Masters > Labour.
Star Rate (INR) *
Star rate refers to a fixed rate that is used
to price labour
Recommended Quantity *
This field refers to an optimal or suggested
quantity of labour based on project
requirements.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Assets
This tab enables users to specify asset requirements, including asset, asset type and rate.
This feature set facilitates efficient asset management, ensuring the right assets are
assigned to appropriate tasks and optimizing project timelines.
To add an asset, follow the below steps:
3. Navigate to Engg > Projects > Choose a Sub Project from Projects & Sub Projects
List > Work Order > Choose a Work Order from Work Order List Labours
4. On the Work Order page, go to the Assets tab and click Add Labour. This action
opens a new page. Proceed to fill in the required information or make selections as
needed on this page.
Fields
Explanation
Project
This field is automatically populated from
the project
Sub Project
Work Order No.
This field is automatically populated from
the work order
Asset Type *
Click Select located beside the Asset Type
field. This action will prompt a new window
to open where you can search for asset
details using the filter provided at the top.
Once you have selected the asset details,
click Accept Selected.
Note: The Asset Type data comes from
Engg > Masters > Asset.
Asset Sub Type *
This field is a further subdivision of Asset
Type. This field is populated automatically
when you select Asset Type.
Note: The Asset Sub Type data comes
from Engg > Masters > Asset Sub Type.
Asset *
The Assets that are listed against Asset
Type and Asset Sub Type are automatically
populated.
Note: The Asset data comes from Engg >
Masters > Asset.
UOM
The Unit of Measure (UOM) is automatically
populated.
Note: The UOM data comes from Engg >
Masters > Asset.
Star Rate (INR) *
Star rate refers to a fixed hourly / daily rate
that is used to rent an asset
Recommended Quantity *
This field refers to an optimal or suggested
quantity of assets based on project
requirements.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Advance Details
The advances created against a Work Order with Processed and onwards status will be
listed on this Advance Details page.
Documents
Terms and Conditions
This tab enables users to add specific terms and conditions to a work order. This feature
allows for the inclusion of project-specific terms, ensuring clarity and compliance throughout
the project lifecycle. Users can easily view, edit, and manage the terms and conditions
associated with each work order.
To add Terms and Conditions, follow the below steps:
3. Navigate to Engg > Projects > Choose a Sub Project from Projects & Sub Projects
List > Work Order > Choose a Work Order from Work Order List Labours
4. On the Work Order page, go to the Terms and Conditions tab, click Modify, and
then click Add. This action opens a new page. Choose a condition and click Accept
Selected.
Note:
Condition Category column data comes from Purchase > Masters > Master Tables >
Condition Category Master.
Condition column data comes from Purchase > Masters > Master Tables > Condition
Master
Amendments
This tab provides an overview of amendments and versions associated with work orders.
Users can easily track and review changes made to work orders over time, including
modifications to scope, schedule, budget, and other project parameters.
7.1.3.4 Abstracts
The Abstract feature enables site engineers and managers to meticulously track work
progress. By inputting the quantity of completed tasks, users ensure precise payment
calculations. This feature streamlines the payment verification process by automatically
fetching rates from associated work orders, eliminating manual entry errors.
To create an abstract, follow the below steps:
1. Navigate to Engg > Projects > Choose a Sub Project from Projects & Sub Projects
List > Work Order > Choose Abstracts
2. After clicking on the Create Abstract button, you will be prompted to fill in and select
the necessary details for the abstract.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Field
Explanation
Project
Choose a project from the drop-down
menu.
Sub Project
Choose a sub project from the drop-down
menu.
Abstract Date
Choose a date from the calendar when
work progress is summarized for reporting
purposes.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Ref/Bill No.
Enter a unique reference or billing number
to be associated with financial transactions.
Work Category
Choose a work category from the drop-
down list.
Work Sub Category
Choose a sub category from the drop-down
list.
Work Order *
Choose a work order from the list. A work
order is a formal agreement between a
contractor and a developer specifying the
scope of work, rates, and terms of payment
for construction activities.
3. Upload any document related to the abstract under Documents.
Follow the below steps to upload a document:
I. Click Add New
II. Choose a file and click Update
4. Choose a BOQ using the BOQ Filter. To do so, select a work category, sub work
category, and abstract from the drop-down menus and click Go. Choose and
checkmark a BOQ(s) and click Next.
1. In the BOQ grid, you will enter either quantity of work completed under This Bill Qty,
or enter a percentage. For either way, the system calculates the bill amount by taking
rate automatically from the work order. You may also enter a work completed date
and add remarks, if any.
2. Click Finish once you are done.
7.1.3.5 Stock
The Stock serves as a hub for managing units and accessories that are important for sales
operations. Divided into two primary sections, Units and Accessories, it offers a range of
functionalities to streamline stock management. Users can seamlessly add new units to the
inventory, merge existing ones (virtually and / or physically) to optimize stock levels, and
review different versions of units to track changes over time. Additionally, users can add and
manage accessories from both Units and Accessories interfaces.
7.1.3.5.1 Units
To add a new Unit, follow the below steps:
1. Navigate to Engg > Projects > Choose a Sub Project from Projects & Sub Projects
List > Stock > Add Unit
2. Once you have clicked Add Unit, proceed to fill in the required details or make
selections.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Basic Information
Fields
Explanation
Project
This field is automatically populated from
the project
Sub Project
This field is automatically populated from
the project
Fl.No / St.No*
Select a floor or storey Number from the
list. It indicates the level within a building
where a particular unit or area is located.
Floor Type*
Select the type or category of the floor
within a building, block or sub project, such
as basement, ground floor, mezzanine, etc.
UDI
Enter a UDI number. UDI stands for User
Defined Identifier unique identifier or
code assigned to each unit or area within
the project.
Unit / Apartment No.*
Assign a number to a unit or apartment
within the project in this field.
Unit Type*
Select a type or category of the unit, such
as studio, one-bedroom, two-bedroom, etc.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Land Area
Enter the total area of land on which the
project is built, typically measured in square
meters or square feet.
Saleable Area*
Enter the area within a unit that is available
for sale, excluding common areas or shared
spaces.
Garden Area
Enter the area of any gardens or green
spaces associated with the unit or project.
Porch Area
Enter the porch area the covered
entrance area or porch space outside the
main entrance of a unit or building.
Built-up Area
Enter the built-up area the total area
covered by a building, including all floors,
walls, and other structural elements.
Common Area
Enter the common area spaces within a
building or complex that are shared by
multiple residents. This could include
corridors, lobbies, stairwells, elevators, etc.
Terrace Area
Enter the terrace area the open, flat area
on the rooftop of a building, often used for
recreational purposes or as a gathering
space.
Carpet Area
Enter the carpet area where carpet or other
floor coverings can be laid.
Land/Plot Area
Similar to land area, this refers to the total
area of land on which the project is located,
but it might specifically emphasize the plot
or parcel boundaries
RERA Area
Enter the RERA area RERA or Real
Estate Regulatory Authority regulates the
real estate sector and ensures
transparency and accountability.
Dimensions
Enter the measurements (length, width,
height) of various components within the
project, such as rooms, corridors, common
areas, etc.
Remarks
Add remarks, if any.
Site Measurement
Fields
Explanation
Direction
Select the orientation or facing direction
from the drop-down menu. This could be
directions like North, South, East, West, or
more specific angles.
Measurement
Records the dimensions of various aspects
of the site, such as length, width, height,
area, or volume. Measurements could be in
standard units like meters or feet.
Remarks
Add remarks, if any
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Site Survey Details
Fields
Explanation
Certifying Company
Select a certifying company from the drop-
down menu. A certifying company is a
business entity that owns one or more
projects and their respective sub-projects
Survey No
Assigns a unique identifier to the survey
conducted on the site. This number helps in
tracking and referencing survey data.
Remarks
Add remarks, if any
Document
Follow the below steps to upload a document:
I. Click Add New
II. Choose a file and click Update
PLC (Or Preferential Location) Details
This field stores details about the preferential location associated with the site. PLC details
typically include information about the location that is preferred by most customers. Because
many customers have preference for a PLC, they are sold at premium by developers.
Boundaries
Fields
Explanation
Direction
Select the orientation or facing direction
from the drop-down menu. This could be
directions like North, South, East, West, or
more specific angles.
Details
Describe the physical demarcations or
markers that define the boundaries of the
site. This could include fences, walls,
landmarks, or natural features like rivers or
hills.
Gallery
This feature allows users to upload and store visual documentation of the site. This could
include photographs, videos, or scanned documents related to the site's condition,
development stages, or any relevant documents such as blueprints or permits.
3. Once you have filled in or selected details, click Create.
7.1.3.5.2 Accessories
Accessories are additional features, amenities, or enhancements that are not essential
components of the unit(s) but add value or attractiveness to them. These could include
things like fixtures, fittings, appliances, landscaping, recreational facilities, parking spaces, or
any other extras that are included to enhance the appeal, functionality, or convenience of the
property.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Accessories can be added either by clicking Accessories or View Accessory. Upon
clicking on either button will prompt Accessories List page to open.
To add an accessory(s), follow the below steps:
1. Click Add Accessory, and a new row gets added requiring you to enter details in the
fields.
2. Choose an accessory type from the dropdown menu labeled Accessory Type, input
the corresponding number in the Accessory No field, and then specify the area in
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
square feet under Area. Your entry will be automatically converted into square
meters as well.
3. Then, click Submit.
7.1.3.6 Documents
The Documents tab allows users to upload, view, and manage documents associated with a
project / sub project. Users can upload various types of documents, such as property deeds,
lease agreements, inspection reports, and more, directly into the ERP system. Users can
also subscribe to documents to receive notifications about updates or changes.
To upload a document(s), follow the below steps:
1. Navigate to Engg > Projects > Choose a Sub Project > Documents > Click Upload
2. Once you click Upload, you will be prompted to fill in the necessary details, including
an option to protect your document with a password.
3. Once you fill in the page with necessary details, click Submit.
7.1.3.7 WBS
The WBS tab allows users to define, manage, and plan project tasks. Within the WBS tab,
users can define specific work / task by clicking Add Category. Users can map BOQs by
clicking Modify button under Work Definition sub tab.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Budget
As the name says, Budget allows developers to budget each work / task. The work list
defined under Work Definition sub tab will automatically list under Budget. Alternatively, the
work categories can also be extracted from BOQ. To pull work categories from BOQ, click
Modify, Load from BOQ, and then click Save.
Planning
The work category added under Work Definition will list here automatically. Under this sub
tab, users can set a time limit by defining the start and end date for a project.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
To set a time limit, click Modify, select Start Date and End Date from the calendar, and
then click Save.
7.1.4 Sub Project Contracting
7.1.4.1 CO
A contracting order refers to the formal arrangement that outline the sequence of
agreements on roles, responsibilities, timelines, deliverables, and financial terms between a
client and a contractor.
To create a contracting order, follow the below steps:
Step 1: Engg > Projects > Search for a contracting sub project using the filter > CO > Click
Contracting Order.
Step 2: Once you click Contracting Order, you will be prompted to fill in and select
necessary details.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Fields
Explanation
Project
Automatically displayed when a contracting
sub project is selected. It represents the
main project to which the sub project
belongs.
Sub Project
Automatically displayed when a contracting
sub project is selected.
Certifying Company
Automatically displayed when a contracting
sub project is selected.
Client
Automatically displayed when a contracting
sub project is selected. This field identifies
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
the client for whom the project or sub
project is being executed.
CO Currency Type
Choose the currency type to be used in the
contracting sub project: Domestic or
International.
Scope Of Work *
A mandatory field that outlines the specific
tasks, activities, and deliverables expected
to be completed as part of the sub project.
From Date *
A mandatory field that indicates the start
date for the sub project. It marks the
beginning of the period during which the
contracted work is to be performed.
To Date *
A mandatory field that specifies the end
date for the sub project. It marks the
deadline for completing the contracted
work.
Work Description *
A mandatory field that provides a detailed
description of the work to be performed
under the sub project. This includes the
objectives, methodologies, and any specific
requirements.
Work Order Reference No.
Add a reference number for the work order
associated with the sub project. This helps
in tracking and managing the work order.
Retention
Specify the percentage of the total contract
value that will be retained by the client until
the completion of the project. This is usually
held as a guarantee against any defects or
incomplete work.
Retention Guarantee Expiry Date
Select a date when the retention guarantee
expires. After this date, the retained amount
is typically released to the contractor if all
conditions are met.
Mobilization Advance Percentage
Indicates the percentage of the contract
value that will be provided as an advance to
the contractor to help with the initial setup
and mobilization of resources.
Mobilization Advance Amount
The actual amount of money given as a
mobilization advance, calculated based on
the mobilization advance percentage.
Mobilization Guarantee Expiry Date
Select a date when the mobilization
guarantee expires.
Performance Guarantee Expiry Date
Select a date when the performance
guarantee expires. This guarantee ensures
that the contractor will complete the project
according to the agreed standards and
timelines.
EMD/BG Amount
The amount for Earnest Money Deposit
(EMD) or Bank Guarantee (BG) provided by
the contractor. This is a security deposit to
show the contractor’s commitment to the
project.
Terms & Conditions
This field contains the detailed terms and
conditions applicable to the sub project.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Revenue Details
Revenue Value: Represents the total value of the revenue expected from the sub project. It
is the gross amount before any deductions or discounts are applied.
Discount Type: This field specifies the type of discount applied to the revenue. It can be:
Not Applicable: No discount is applied.
Fixed Amount: A specific monetary value is deducted from the revenue.
Percentage: A percentage of the revenue is deducted as a discount.
Discount Amount: Enter the actual amount of discount applied to the revenue.
Revenue Amount: The amount of revenue after deducting the discount from the revenue
value. It is the net revenue before adding any taxes or other additions.
Base Amount: The initial amount on which taxes and other additions are calculated. It is
usually the same as the revenue amount unless other adjustments are made.
Tax Additions: This field lists all the individual tax amounts that are added to the base
amount. It can include various taxes like sales tax, service tax, etc.
Total Tax Additions: The sum of all individual tax additions. This represents the total
amount of tax that is added to the base amount.
Revenue Gross Amount: The total revenue amount after adding the total tax additions to
the base amount. It represents the gross revenue including all taxes.
Tax Deductions: This field lists any tax amounts that are deducted from the revenue. These
could be withholding taxes or other types of tax deductions applicable to the project.
Documents: Add any documents related to the contracting sub project.
To add a document, click Add New, choose a file and click Update.
EMD Cheque/BG Details: The amount for Earnest Money Deposit (EMD) or Bank Guarantee
(BG) provided by the contractor. This is a security deposit to show the contractor’s
commitment to the project.
To add BG Details, click Add New and enter the details.
Step 3: Click Create.
Step 4: Once you create a contracting order, come back to the Contracting Order List and
click the contract under Contracting Order No., which is the first column
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Step 5: Create a BOQ under BOQ sub tab. To create a BOQ, click Create BOQ and a new
window opens, prompting you to create a BOQ.
Once you click Create BOQ, you will be prompted to fill in and select necessary details.
Fields
Explanation
Project *
Select a project from the drop-down list
Sub Project *
Select a sub project from the drop-down list
Contracting Order No.
Floor / Street No.
Unit
Work Category *
Select a work category from the drop-down
list
Work Sub Category
If you are creating a BOQ at sub category
level, select a work sub category from the
drop-down list
BOQ Item Name *
Give a name to the BOQ
BOQ Description *
Describe the BOQ
UOM *
Select the unit of measurement from the
drop-down list
BOQ Quantity (Revenue)
Input the quantity of material
BOQ Rate (Revenue)
Input the rate of quantity of material
BOQ Amount (Revenue)
BOQ amount gets calculated based on the
formula: BOQ Quantity X BOQ Rate
Notes
Add any additional notes or comments
Remarks
Add remarks, if any
(Main) BOQ Items
(Main) BOQ Items level is ideal for standardized projects where quantities and rates remain
consistent across multiple instances. Users can input basic details like BOQ Item Name and
BOQ Description, followed by filling the BOQ Quantity and BOQ Rate. They can then specify
the requirements for Materials, Labour, Assets, and Output Material under (Main) BOQ
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Items.
Materials
Materials are listed along with material types, quantities and cost.
Labour
Labour represents the human effort required to complete tasks within the project. This
includes skilled and unskilled workers, contractors, supervisors, and other personnel
involved in construction or project execution. Labour is listed in the BOQ along with the types
of work to be performed, the number of workers required, and the cost.
Assets
Assets refer to the equipment, machinery, tools, and other tangible resources needed to
carry out project activities. This can include construction vehicles, cranes, excavators,
scaffolding, and specialized tools. Assets are included in the BOQ to account for the
resources required for construction or project execution beyond just materials and labour.
Output Material
Output materials are the products or materials produced or extracted as a result of project
activities. This can include by-products, waste materials, or any materials reclaimed or
recycled during the project. Output materials are listed in the BOQ to account for their
generation or disposal during project execution.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
BOQ Sub Item
Alternatively, users can opt for the BOQ Sub Item level for a more detailed breakdown of the
BOQ. Here, users create lists for each specific requirement, and this allows for granular
specification and individualized costing. When BOQs are created at this level, the main BOQ
Quantity and BOQ Rate become zero, as quantities and costs are calculated from the
detailed lists provided. This level is beneficial for projects with varying requirements,
enabling users to tailor specifications to each unique instance, such as different
requirements for each floor of a building.
Step 5: Once you complete the BOQ, submit it for approval. It will get forwarded to
individuals who are authorized to perform the approval action.
Import / Export BOQ
Alternatively, a BOQ can be imported / exported from / to a local drive. Follow the below
steps to perform BOQ import / export action:
Import
Step 1: First, download samples template from utilities category. You will find this on the
same new window that opens upon clicking Import / Export BOQ. Ensure the BOQs you
prepare offline are in the same format as in the template.
Step 2: Once the BOQ data is ready, select the necessary details.
Fields
Explanation
Import / Export
Import: Choose this when you need to
bring data from an external source into the
system. It involves uploading an
spreadsheet in a Excel or CSV format that
contains the data in the same format as in
the template.
Create / Update BOQ *
Create BOQ: This option is used when you
need to generate a new BOQ.
Update BOQ: This option allows you to
modify an existing BOQ, updating it with
new information, quantities, prices, or any
other relevant details.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Contracting Order No.
This field automatically shows the unique
number associated with the contracting
order
Project
Choose a project from the drop-down list
Sub Project
Choose a sub project from the drop-down
list
Floor / Street No.
Choose a floor or street number from the
drop-down list
Unit
Choose a unit within a project, such as an
apartment, office space, or any individual
entity that is part of the larger project.
Work Category *
Choose a work category, for example,
electrical, plumbing, structural, etc.
File to import *
select the file that contains the data you
want to import into the system.
Excel Sheet Name *
When importing data from an Excel file, this
field specifies the name of the sheet within
the Excel file that contains the data to be
imported. Excel files can contain multiple
sheets, so it's important to specify the
correct one.
Step 3: Click Validate.
Export
Step 1: Once you select Export radio button, you will see a filter prompting you to fill in
and/or select the necessary details.
Fields
Explanation
Import / Export
Export: Choose this to extract data from
the system to be used externally. This
involve downloading data into a file format
(like Excel or CSV)
Contracting Order No.
This field automatically shows the unique
contracting order number associated with
the contracting order
Project
Choose a project from the drop-down list
Sub Project
Choose a sub project from the drop-down
list
Floor / Street No.
Choose a floor or street number from the
drop-down list
Unit
Choose a unit within a project, such as an
apartment, office space, or any individual
entity that is part of the larger project.
Work Category *
Choose a work category, for example,
electrical, plumbing, structural, etc.
Work Sub Category
This field provides further classification
within a work category. For example, within
electrical work, subcategories could include
wiring, lighting, and outlets.
BOQ Name
Specify the name of the BOQ
BOQ Description
This field provides a detailed description of
the BOQ, outlining the scope, specifics of
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
the work, materials required, and any other
relevant details.
BOQ ID
Enter Unique ID of the BOQ
Include Resources (checkmark)
This field indicates whether to include
details about resources (such as labor,
materials, equipment) in the BOQ.
Step 2: Once you fill in and select necessary details on the filter, click Show. The BOQ(s)
will list below the filter. Select a BOQ(s) and click Download.
Attach / Copy BOQ
You may use Attach / Copy BOQ option when there is already a similar BOQ in the system.
The existing BOQ can be copied and a new BOQ created against a contracting order.
Access the filter on the left to search for an identical existing BOQ. Once you fill in and / or
select the necessary details on the filter, click Show. Select the BOQ, and then click Copy
bottom on the right side of the screen.
7.1.4.2 CO BOQ Map
Consider this scenario where a developer acts as a client and decides to assign a project to
a contractor to construct an apartment. The developer provides the contractor with a
revenue BOQ totalling 20 crores. The contractor then prepares a cost BOQ, which might
amount to 15 crores, leaving a margin of 5 crores for the contractor's profit. The contractor
can create either a single cost BOQ or multiple cost BOQs. In any case, the relevant cost
BOQs will be mapped to the appropriate revenue BOQ. In the In4Suite system, the CO BOQ
represents the revenue BOQ, while the cost BOQ is referred to as the Sub Project BOQ.
CO BOQ Mapping:
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Eligibility:
CO BOQ mapping is applicable only for approved contracting orders.
Filtering Options:
CO BOQ can be filtered by Work Category/Sub Work Category and its BOQ Name/ID.
Mapping Features:
Link to Map/View/Reset:
Mapping: Map CO BOQ to Subproject BOQs.
Viewing: View mapped Subproject BOQs for a CO BOQ.
Reset: Un-map the Subproject BOQs from a CO BOQ.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Mapping Sequence:
One-to-one
One-to-many
Many-to-many
Color Legends:
Green: Mapped and Work Order (WO) issued.
Brown: Mapped but Work Order (WO) not issued.
No Color: Not mapped.
Blue: Subcategory.
7.1.4.3 CO Abstracts
The Contracting Order Abstracts feature is designed to streamline the process of measuring
and recording the work completed by a contractor. This feature allows developers to
efficiently track progress, approve work abstracts, and facilitate invoicing and payment
processes.
To create a CO Abstracts, follow the below steps:
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Projects > Select a contracting project / sub project > CO
Abstracts > Choose a contracting order using filter > Click Create CO Abstract.
Step 2: Once you click CO Abstract, you will be prompted to fill in and select the necessary
details. When you are on the CO Abstract creation page:
Choose a Sub Project and Contracting Order
Under Abstract Details, choose an Abstract Date and enter Ref/Bill No.
Choose BOQ / BOQ Sub Items Under BOQ
Upload documents related to the CO Abstract under Documents
Step 3: After filling in or select the options as detailed in the previous step, click Next.
Step 4: Choose BOQ Items from the list for which CO Abstract will be created. Then, enter
the quantity of work completed against the chosen BOQ item(s).
Step 5: Click Finish.
7.1.4.4 Budget
A budget is broadly categorized into work category budget and material budget.
Details
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
This is a tab to display the basic details including project, sub project and status.
Work Category Budget
Work category budget serves as a comprehensive allocation of funds specifically earmarked
for different types of tasks within the contracting sub project. This budgeting feature enables
users to manage and track expenses associated with various work categories such as
construction, electrical and plumbing, interior and exterior, and painting efficiently.
When creating work orders, the Bill of Quantities (BOQs) associated with them automatically
display the work categories within the Work Category Budget section. If you wish to modify a
BOQ or include additional work category budgets, you can easily manage these tasks within
the Work Category Budget interface.
To load a work category from a BOQ, follow the below steps:
6. Navigate to Engg >> Projects >> Choose a Sub Project
7. Under the Budget menu, go to Work Category Budget
8. Scroll to the bottom and click Modify
9. Add any documents related to the work category budget. To add a document, click
Add Documents under Documents on Work Category Budget page
10. On the top left of the work category table, click Load from BOQ
Alternatively,
6. On the Work Category Budget page, scroll to the bottom and click Modify
7. Click Add Work Category and a new blank category gets added
8. Select Work Category/ Sub Category and enter details including Rate/Sq. Mt., Tax,
Amount Allocated and Work Order Payments.
9. Add any documents related to the work category budget. To add a document, click
Add Documents under Documents on Work Category Budget page
10. Click Update
Material Budget
Material budget facilitates the precise allocation and monitoring of financial resources
dedicated to acquiring materials for construction purposes. Through this feature, users can
define budgets for specific materials, monitor expenditures, and ensure optimal resource
utilization.
When creating work orders, the Bill of Quantities (BOQs) associated with them automatically
display the material budget within the Material Budget section. If you wish to modify a BOQ
or add a new line under Material Budget, you can easily manage these tasks within the
Material Budget interface.
To load a material budget category from a BOQ, follow the below steps:
3. Navigate to Engg >> Projects >> Choose a Sub Project
4. Under the Budget menu, go to Material Budget category
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
6. Scroll to the bottom and click Modify
7. Add any documents related to the material budget category. To add a document,
click Choose File under File to Import on Material Budget page.
Note: You can also upload material budget from an Excel sheet but before you do
so, ensure the material budget is in the right format that In4Suite application will
support.
To download Excel Template, click Download Excel Template, prepare the material
budget in the given template and upload the sheet.
8. On the top left of the Material Budget table, click Load from BOQ
Alternatively,
1. On the Material Budget page, scroll to the bottom and click Modify
2. Click Add Material Budget and a new blank category gets added
3. Select Material Type and enter details including quantity, rate, purchase order, supplier
payments and service provider payments.
4. Add any documents related to the material budget category. To add a document, click
Choose File under File to Import on Material Budget page.
Work Category Budget Comparison
The Work Category Budget Comparison feature allows users to compare two work order
categories. It enables users to analyze budget allocations and expenses associated with
different types of tasks within the project, helping in making actionable decisions. Users can
easily assess differences and similarities between work categories, in order to manage
budget effectively.
To compare two work order categories, follow the below steps:
4. Navigate to Engg >> Projects >> Choose a Sub Project
5. Under the Budget menu, go to Work Category Budget Comparison
6. Select the two versions that you wish to compare and click Show
Material Budget Comparison
The Material Budget Comparison feature allows users to do a complete analysis of material
costs, such as bricks, steel, cement, and more. They can effortlessly compare budgets
across different materials. By providing detailed insights into pricing and quantity variations,
this functionality empowers project managers to optimize resource allocation, mitigate
financial risks, and enhance overall project profitability.
To compare two material categories, follow the below steps:
4. Navigate to Engg >> Projects >> Choose a Sub Project
5. Under the Budget menu, go to Material Budget Comparison
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
6. Select the two versions that you wish to compare and click Show
Activity Schedule
This tab enables users to input start and end dates for various work categories and
subcategories. This feature allows for detailed planning and scheduling of project activities,
ensuring timely completion of tasks. By centralizing activity scheduling within the tab,
stakeholders can easily monitor progress and make adjustments as needed to maintain
project timelines and meet objectives.
7.1.4.5 Staffing
The Staffing tab allows users to manage project personnel effectively. Under Sub Project
Staffing, users can assign a Project Manager to oversee the entire project. Additionally,
under Work Order Staffing, users can allocate Engineers and technical staff to specific work
orders. This feature ensures proper delegation of responsibilities and resources, optimizing
project performance and coordination. By centralizing staffing information within the tab,
users can easily track personnel assignments and ensure that each work order is adequately
staffed for successful execution.
Sub Project Staffing
Sub Project Staffing involves assigning personnel to oversee and manage the entire sub
project, which may consist of multiple work orders. Typically, a Project Manager or Chief
Engineer is assigned to supervise the overall progress and coordination of various work
orders within the sub project.
7. Navigate to Engg > Projects > Choose a Sub Project from Projects & Sub Projects
List > Staffing > Sub Project Staffing > Click Add Staff
8. Fill in and select the necessary details such as Project Name, Sub Project Name,
Project Manager/Chief Engineer, Employee Name, Role, From Date, To Date,
and Utilization.
9. Click Update
Work Order Staffing
Work Order Staffing focuses on assigning personnel specifically to individual work orders
within the sub project. Typically, engineers, technical staff, or workers with specialized skills
are assigned to execute tasks within each work order.
7. Navigate to Engg > Projects > Choose a Sub Project from Projects & Sub Projects
List > Staffing > Work Order Staffing > Click Add Staff
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
8. Select the necessary details such as Work Category, Sub Category, Work Order and
Engineers.
9. Once you have selected the necessary details, click Add Staff.
7.1.4.6 Work Order
A work order is a legal agreement between a developer and a contractor which serves as the
foundation for their collaboration. This agreement outlines the terms and conditions governing
their professional relationship, including project scope, timelines, responsibilities, and financial
arrangements. Within this agreement, provisions are made for the creation of work orders,
which serve as formal requests for specific tasks or services to be completed.
Workflow
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
To create a new work order, follow the below steps:
Prerequisite
10. Set up Display Number configuration for the work order, including both project level
and subproject level work orders.
11. Define the workflow for managing work orders
12. Create Work Category/Sub Work Category in Masters. To do so, go to the Engg
menu >> Masters >> Master tables >> Work category masters. The procedure to
create the Work category and subcategory is as follows
a. Navigate to Engg.
b. Select Master Tables.
c. Choose Work Category Type Master from the list and click Go.
d. Position the cursor to the top right corner and click Create.
Steps
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Projects > Choose a Sub Project from Projects & Sub Projects List
> Work Order > Work Order List > Create Order List
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Step 2: Basic Details
Fields
Explanation
Project
Select the Project name from the drop-down list
WO Currency Type
Select the type of currency to be used in the project
transaction: Domestic or International
Work Order Scope
Choose the Work Order scope: Single Category or
Multiple Categories. In Single Category, you will
consolidate multiple BOQs into one work order with a
single payment, ideal for contractors with multiple
subprojects. For Multiple Categories, you will create
separate work orders at project or subproject levels.
Work Order Type
Select the Work Order Type from the drop-down list:
Contractor, Consultant, Internal or Labour.
Work Category *
Select the Work Category from the drop-down list.
The work categories from BOQ will reflect here.
Work Sub Category
Select this if you want to create a work order at the
sub category level. Else, leave it blank.
Contractor Name *
Enter the name of the contractor, who the work
order is to be assigned to.
GSTIN No
Enter the GSTIN No. of the contractor
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Contact Person
Enter the name of the contact person.
Discount Type
Mobilization Advance Percentage
Mobilization refers to the activities that are carried out
by a contractor in order to prepare for a construction
work before the actual work begins.
Enter the percentage of the work order value that you
want to process as Mobilization Advance
Percentage.
Mobilization Advance Amount
Enter the Mobilization Advance Amount
Mobilization Guarantee Expiry Date
This refers to the guarantee of the date by which the
setup to begin the construction work is ready
Performance Guarantee Expiry Date
This refers to the guarantee of the date by which the
contractor has committed to complete the project
undertaken
EMD/BG Amount
Enter the bank guarantee amount that a contractor
has to deposit with a bank
From (Tentative) *
Select a date from the calendar when EMD/BG
becomes effective from
To (Tentative) *
Select a date from the calendar when EMD/BG will
be effective to
Work Order Printing Date
Select a date from the calendar when the work
order will be printed
Work Order Payment From
The application will allow payments to contractors in
the following ways:
10. Abstracts: Payments can be made with
reference to abstracts (based on work done).
11. Work order value payments: Payments can
be made based on the value specified in the
work order.
12. Payment schedule: Payments can be made
by defining the payment schedule (based on
conditions).
Remarks
Add remarks or comments, if any
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Scope Of Work *
Summarize tasks and objectives that will become
part of the agreement between a developer and
another party
Work Description
Describe a detailed breakdown of actions,
specifications, and quantities of work that is
expected to be performed by a party
Tax Details
Notes on calculation of taxes:
The Percentage of work order value column in the Work Order screen is made free
text to handle defaulting of the taxable amount in the payment certificate and to
calculate new taxes on the residual work order value.
Changes in the percentage of work order value in the work order edit page will not
recalculate taxable and tax amounts.
An alert is provided to the user when attempting to change the percentage of the
work order value, which reads, "Work Order tax amount will not be calculated based
on % of Work order value. Please change the taxable/tax amount."
The application will not allow the user to create a work order without entering the %
of work order value to facilitate the general practice of entering taxable amounts
using a percentage of the work order.
This Percentage of work order value is considered for the defaulting of the certified
amount in the payment certificate as usual, and the calculation of tax amount and
taxable amount remains the same.
When the user changes tax amount and taxable amount, the % of work order value
will recalculate.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
During the amendment of the work order, the system will calculate the taxable
amount directly based on % of work order value using the following formula:
Taxable amount = ((Total work order value - Total payment certified amount) * (% of
work order value)) + (sum of taxable amount for a tax in payment certificates).
According to the above formula, if any new taxes are to be added to the work order
and if the work order is amended, the taxable amount for the tax will be calculated
based on the residual work order value.
If the work order is terminated, the system will calculate the taxable amount based on
the formula below: Taxable amount = ((Total work order terminated value - Total
payment certified amount) * (% of work order value of a tax)) + (Sum of taxable
amount for a tax in payment certificates).
Since the % of work order is user-editable for the purpose of defaulting taxable
amounts in work order payment certificates, the taxable amount and % of work order
may not match if the user manually calculates the tax amount based on % of work
order value in the work order.
During the amendment, the application calculates the taxable amount based on the
present % of work order value for a tax and remaining balance of work order value.
The logic to calculate tax amount remains the same, based on the taxable amount.
Existing taxes may change if the work order is amended, as the taxable amount
calculation is changed to get the value based on the remaining balance of work
order.
A Note is provided in the work order create, edit, and view pages as follows:
o Work Order tax amount will not change if % of work order Value is changed.
o % of Work Order value will be used to calculate taxable amounts in Work
Order payments.
If a new tax is added manually, the user will have to calculate the residual taxable
amount manually and enter it in the taxable amount column, and the application will
calculate the % of work order value and tax amounts accordingly.
In the above case, the user can change the % of work order value to 100% if the new
tax has to be on the residual/remaining unpaid work order value.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Tax amount for exclusive taxes in work order create, edit, and view pages will be:
Tax amount = Taxable amount * Tax percentage.
Tax amount for Inclusive taxes in work order create, edit, and view pages will be
based on two steps:
7. Calculate base amount as BASE AMOUNT = (100/ (100+Tax percentage))
*Taxable amount.
8. Calculate tax amount as TAX AMOUNT = Base amount * Tax percentage.
Retention Details
This feature allows construction developers to retain a percentage of the work order value
and defer payment to a later date. This enables better cash flow management and ensures
completion of work before full payment.
Follow the below steps to add Retention Details:
9. Click on Add Row
10. Choose the type of retention under Type
11. Enter a percentage value of the work order under Percentage
12. Choose an expiry date under Expiry Date
Service Indent Details
Service Indent is a feature designed to streamline service scheduling with defined start and
finish dates. It provides a structured framework for organizing service tasks within specific
timeframes. Users can input the start date, marking the initiation of the service, and the finish
date, signifying its completion. This feature aids in planning and tracking service activities
efficiently, while ensuring timely execution and resource optimization. Overall, it serves as a
crucial tool for managing service operations with precision and effectiveness.
To add a service indent to a work order, follow the below steps:
7. On the Create Work Order page, navigate to the Service Indent Details tab
8. Then, click Add row
9. Select an indent and click Accept Selected.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Note: Service Indent data comes from Engg > Inventory > Service Indent
Other Details
This tab provides a structured presentation of various fields related to policies, licenses, and
their respective expiration and renewal dates. It includes information such as the expiry date,
periodicity (frequency of review or renewal), and next due date for each category.
To enter details related to policies and licences, follow the below steps:
5. On the Create Work Order page, navigate to the Other Details tab
6. Fill in and select the details for the following fields.
Fields
Explanation
Work Category (WC) Policy Expiry Date
Select a date when the policy covering a
specific work category ends. It indicates the
need for renewal or adjustment.
Work Category (WC) Policy Periodicity
This field refers to the frequency at which
the policy for a particular work category is
reviewed or renewed. It determines the
intervals between policy updates.
Work Category (WC) Policy Next Due Date
Select an upcoming date when the policy
for a specific work category is due for
renewal or reassessment.
Labour License No.
Enter the labor license number. A labour
license number indicates that the contractor
has legal authorization for employment
within specified parameters.
Labour License Expiry Date
Select a date when the labor license
expires. It necessitates renewal to ensure
continued compliance with employment
regulations.
Contractors All Risk Policy (CAR) Expiry
Date
Select an expiry date of the insurance
policy covering all risks for contractors. It
prompts reevaluation or renewal.
Contractors All Risk Policy (CAR)
Periodicity
This field refers to the frequency at which
the contractors' all-risk policy undergoes
review or renewal and determines the
intervals between policy updates.
Contractors All Risk Policy (CAR) Next Due
Date
Select an upcoming date when the
contractors' all-risk policy requires renewal
or reassessment to maintain coverage.
Contractor/Consultant Details
The details of contractors / consultants automatically flow to this category from Masters.
EMD Cheque/BG Details
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Given the substantial financial involvement, developers often require contractors to provide a
bank guarantee by depositing a specified sum with a bank.
Follow the below steps to update bank guarantee details:
17. Click Add New
18. Choose the Bank Name
19. Select the Cheque Date from the calendar
20. Enter the Cheque/BG No
21. Input the Cheque Amount
22. Choose BG Handover Date from the calendar
23. Specify the BG Expiry Date
24. Select the Claim Date
Documents
Upload any document related to the work order under Documents.
Follow the below steps to upload a document:
5. Click Add New
6. Choose a file and click Update
Important
Once you have created a work order at the sub project level, you can add BOQs, materials,
labours, assets, advance details, terms and conditions, and more.
BOQ
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
The quantity and cost are loaded from a Bill of Quantities (BOQ) onto a work order. It's
mandatory to link at least one BOQ to a work order.
To add a BOQ to work order, follow the below steps:
9. After creating a work order, navigate to the Work Order tab and select the desired
work order
10. Click on the BOQ option
11. Click on Add New BOQ
12. Choose the Sub Project and Work Category to list the available BOQs
Note:
Users can modify the quantity and rate of the BOQ
Once an Abstract or Indent is created for the BOQ, the application will restrict
changes to the BOQ’s rate
Once Payment/Advance is created for the BOQ, application will prevent deleting the
BOQ
Step 5: Click Create.
Step 6: Navigate to the Status section, select Submitted, input any remarks, and then
proceed to update the status by clicking on Update Status.
Materials
This tab allows users to specify the materials required for the work order. It includes details
such as the type of material, quantity needed, cost per unit, supplier information, and any
other relevant specifications.
5. Navigate to Engg > Projects > Choose a Sub Project from Projects & Sub Projects
List > Work Order > Choose a Work Order from Work Order List Labours > Click
Materials
6. Click Add Free Supply, and this action opens a new page called Add Material.
Proceed to fill in the required information or make selections as needed on this page.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Fields
Explanation
Project
This field is automatically populated from
the work order
Sub Project
This field is automatically populated from
the work order
Work Order No.
This field is automatically populated from
the work order
Material Type *
Click Select located beside the material
type field. This action will prompt a new
window to open where you can search for a
material(s) using the filter provided at the
top. Once you have selected the
material(s), click Accept Selected.
Note: The material type data comes from
Purchase > Masters > Materials.
Material Sub Type *
This field is a further subdivision of material
type. This field is populated automatically
when you select material(s) under Material
Type.
Note: The sub material data under Sub
Material Type field comes from Purchase >
Masters > Materials.
Material *
The items that are listed against Material
Type and Material are automatically
populated.
Note: The material data under Sub Material
Type field comes from Purchase >
Masters > Materials.
UOM
The Unit of Measure (UOM) is automatically
populated.
Note: The UOM data comes from
Purchase > Masters > Materials.
Inclusive
Star Rate
Star rate refers to a fixed rate that is used
to price materials
Estimated Quantity
This field refers to an approximate amount
of material required for a work order.
Recommended Quantity *
This field refers to an optimal or suggested
quantity based on project requirements or
industry standards.
Mark Up Percentage
Mark up percentage is a percentage that is
added to the cost price to determine profit
margin.
Debitable
Checkmark Debitable if an expense or cost
is chargeable or billable to an account.
Debitable At
Choose whether it is debitable at Star Rate
or Actual Rate.
Labours
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
This tab enables users to specify labour requirements, including labour category, labour
quantity and hourly rate. This feature set facilitates efficient labour resource management,
ensuring the right personnel are assigned to appropriate tasks and optimizing project
timelines.
To add labour details, follow the below steps:
5. Navigate to Engg > Projects > Choose a Sub Project from Projects & Sub Projects
List > Work Order > Choose a Work Order from Work Order List Labours
6. On the Work Order page, go to the Labours tab and click Add Labour. This action
opens a new page. Proceed to fill in the required information or make selections as
needed on this page.
Fields
Explanation
Project
This field is automatically populated from
the project
Sub Project
Work Order No.
This field is automatically populated from
the work order
Labour Category *
Click Select located beside the Labour
Category field. This action will prompt a
new window to open where you can search
for labour details using the filter provided at
the top. Once you have selected the labour
details, click Accept Selected.
Note: The labour category data comes from
Engg > Masters > Labour.
Labour Sub Category *
This field is a further subdivision of Labour
Type. This field is populated automatically
when you select Labour Category under the
Labours tab.
Note: The labour sub category data comes
from Engg > Masters > Labour.
Labour Type *
This field is populated automatically when
you select labour category under the
Labours tab.
Note: The Labour Type category data
comes from Engg > Masters > Labour.
UOM
The Unit of Measure (UOM) is automatically
populated.
Note: The UOM data comes from Engg >
Masters > Labour.
Star Rate (INR) *
Star rate refers to a fixed rate that is used
to price labour
Recommended Quantity *
This field refers to an optimal or suggested
quantity of labour based on project
requirements.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Assets
This tab enables users to specify asset requirements, including asset, asset type and rate.
This feature set facilitates efficient asset management, ensuring the right assets are
assigned to appropriate tasks and optimizing project timelines.
To add an asset, follow the below steps:
5. Navigate to Engg > Projects > Choose a Sub Project from Projects & Sub Projects
List > Work Order > Choose a Work Order from Work Order List Labours
6. On the Work Order page, go to the Assets tab and click Add Labour. This action
opens a new page. Proceed to fill in the required information or make selections as
needed on this page.
Fields
Explanation
Project
This field is automatically populated from
the project
Sub Project
Work Order No.
This field is automatically populated from
the work order
Asset Type *
Click Select located beside the Asset Type
field. This action will prompt a new window
to open where you can search for asset
details using the filter provided at the top.
Once you have selected the asset details,
click Accept Selected.
Note: The Asset Type data comes from
Engg > Masters > Asset.
Asset Sub Type *
This field is a further subdivision of Asset
Type. This field is populated automatically
when you select Asset Type.
Note: The Asset Sub Type data comes
from Engg > Masters > Asset Sub Type.
Asset *
The Assets that are listed against Asset
Type and Asset Sub Type are automatically
populated.
Note: The Asset data comes from Engg >
Masters > Asset.
UOM
The Unit of Measure (UOM) is automatically
populated.
Note: The UOM data comes from Engg >
Masters > Asset.
Star Rate (INR) *
Star rate refers to a fixed hourly / daily rate
that is used to rent an asset
Recommended Quantity *
This field refers to an optimal or suggested
quantity of assets based on project
requirements.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Advance Details
The advances created against a Work Order with Processed and onwards status will be
listed on this Advance Details page.
Documents
Terms and Conditions
This tab enables users to add specific terms and conditions to a work order. This feature
allows for the inclusion of project-specific terms, ensuring clarity and compliance throughout
the project lifecycle. Users can easily view, edit, and manage the terms and conditions
associated with each work order.
To add Terms and Conditions, follow the below steps:
5. Navigate to Engg > Projects > Choose a Sub Project from Projects & Sub Projects
List > Work Order > Choose a Work Order from Work Order List Labours
6. On the Work Order page, go to the Terms and Conditions tab, click Modify, and
then click Add. This action opens a new page. Choose a condition and click Accept
Selected.
Note:
Condition Category column data comes from Purchase > Masters > Master Tables >
Condition Category Master.
Condition column data comes from Purchase > Masters > Master Tables > Condition
Master
Amendments
This tab provides an overview of amendments and versions associated with work orders.
Users can easily track and review changes made to work orders over time, including
modifications to scope, schedule, budget, and other project parameters.
7.1.4.7 Abstracts
Abstracts represent the documentation of work completed and billed by the sub-contractor to
the contractor within the contracting order framework. In other works, Abstracts is between a
sub-contractor and a contractor unlike CO Abstracts which is between a contractor and a
client.
To create an Abstract, follow the below steps:
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Projects > Project > Projects & Sub Projects List > Choose a
contracting sub project > Abstracts > Choose a work order > click Create Abstract.
Step 2: Once you click Abstract, you will be prompted to fill in and select the necessary
details:
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Choose a sub project and a work order, upload any documents related to the Abstracts and
then select BOQ / BOQ items using BOQ filter.
Once you have chosen BOQ / BOQ items and click Next, enter the quantity of the total BOQ
completed along with the rate and add remarks if any.
7.1.4.8 Documents
The Documents tab allows users to upload, view, and manage documents associated with a
project / sub project. Users can upload various types of documents, such as property deeds,
lease agreements, inspection reports, and more, directly into the ERP system. Users can
also subscribe to documents to receive notifications about updates or changes.
To upload a document(s), follow the below steps:
1. Navigate to Engg > Projects > Choose a Sub Project > Documents > Click Upload
2. Once you click Upload, you will be prompted to fill in the necessary details, including
an option to protect your document with a password.
3. Once you fill in the page with necessary details, click Submit.
7.1.4.9 WBS
The WBS tab allows users to define, manage, and plan project tasks. Within the WBS tab,
users can define specific work / task by clicking Add Category. Users can map BOQs by
clicking Modify button under Work Definition sub tab.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Budget
As the name says, Budget allows developers to budget each work / task. The work list
defined under Work Definition sub tab will automatically list under Budget. Alternatively, the
work categories can also be extracted from BOQ. To pull work categories from BOQ, click
Modify, Load from BOQ, and then click Save.
Planning
The work category added under Work Definition will list here automatically. Under this sub
tab, users can set a time limit by defining the start and end date for a project.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
To set a time limit, click Modify, select Start Date and End Date from the calendar, and
then click Save.
7.2 Inventory
In In4Velocity Suite, the Inventory feature helps manage the timely stock of the materials,
equipment, and assets crucial for construction and project execution. This feature ensures a
seamless workflow from procurement to usage, maintaining accurate records and optimizing
resource utilization.
(insert a flowchart here gives a high-level view of the inventory management)
Create Store >> Create Indent >> Create Purchase Orders >> Goods Received Note / Gate
Pass >> Receive Goods / Transfer Goods
Create Store >> Create Indent (create requirements) RFQ Advance >> Create
Purchase Orders >> Create GRN (Goods Received Note) PURCHASE > Create Supplier
Certificates for Approved GRN, Advances, and Service Payments Final payment for
supplier and service provider >> Issue Inventory >> >>Return Inventory Purchase >
Create Transfer Order >> Create Gate Pass (mandatory for goods go out of the store gate)
7.2.1 Indents
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
The Indent feature allows users to create requests for materials or assets during shortages,
typically initiated by site engineers.
To create an indent, follow the below steps:
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Inventory > Indents > Click Create Indent
Step 2: After clicking on the Create Indent button, you will be prompted to fill in and select
the necessary details for the indent.
Fields
Explanation
Indent*
Choose whether you want to create an
indent with a work order or without a work
order. You may also choose minor material
without work order.
With Work Order: In a project with multiple
sub-projects (or blocks or buildings) and
contractors, a work order details the specific
requirements of a sub-project to be fulfilled
by a contractor. All work orders collectively
specify the materials and assets needed.
Select the indent type and associated work
order. The contractor name is automatically
populated.
Without Work Order: In this scenario, the
default indent type is "PO Only," indicating
that goods can be ordered and stored in the
inventory for future use. The user does not
associate the indent with a specific work
order under this option.
Important: When you create an indent
without work order, it is mandatory to add a
BOQ. To add a BOQ, click Add New BOQs
under BOQs. This action will prompt a new
window to open where you can search for
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
BOQs using the Filter BOQs at the top.
Once you have selected a desired BOQ,
select it and then click Add BOQs.
Minor Material Without Work Order: This
option allows for the creation of indents for
minor materials without the need for a work
order.
Indent Category
Choose the category of indent: Material or
Asset
Type of indent
Choose the type of indent: PO ONLY, PO &
ISSUE, ISSUE ONLY, RATE ONLY PO
(ROBO), OR CLIENT MATERIAL.
Project
Choose a project from the drop-down list
Sub Project
Choose a sub-project from the drop-down
list
Work Order
Select a work order. To do so, click Select
located beside the Work Order field. This
action will prompt a new window to open
where you can search for a work order
using the filter provided at the top. Once
you have found the desired work order,
select it and then click Accept Selected.
Contractor Name
This field will be automatically filled once a
work order is selected in the Work Order
field.
Indent Date
Choose an indent date
Dubitable
Checkmark as Debitable in the following
scenario:
If the contractor is asked to procure
materials but fails to do so, the developer
provides the materials instead. These
materials supplied by the developer are
marked as Debitable. Subsequently, any
discrepancies are reconciled with the
contractor by creating debit notes, and
adjustments can be made within the work
order payments.
Remarks
Add any remarks, if applicable
This feature offers flexibility by providing five types of indents to accommodate various
procurement scenarios:
PO Only:
This type of indent is solely for generating purchase orders. Suitable for scenarios where
materials are purchased and stocked in the inventory for future use.
PO and Issue:
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
This type of indent involves creating purchase orders and directly issuing materials to
contractors on-site. Ideal for situations where materials are immediately required at the
project site without stocking them in inventory.
Issue Only:
Choose this option when materials or assets are already stocked in the inventory. It allows
for issuing materials directly to contractors on-site without involving purchase orders.
Rate Only PO (ROPO):
ROPO is designed for situations where material prices fluctuate. Users can establish a
contract with suppliers to procure materials at fixed rates over a specified period, irrespective
of price changes.
Client Material:
This option is suitable for a contracting model where you act as a consultant providing
services to a client. In this scenario, you may need to hire contractor(s) to execute the plan
for your client. With the Client Material option as a type of indent, you acquire materials
directly from the client and provide them to your contractor.
Alternatively, if you already have the materials in your inventory, you can provide them to the
contractor. Upon receiving the materials later from the contractor, you can restock your
inventory. Alternatively, based on the agreement between you and the contractor, you can
select the Debitable option. This allows reconciliation with the contractor by creating debit
notes, and adjustments can be made within the work order payments accordingly.
Since you obtain materials directly from the client rather than purchasing them, you only
need to create an Indent for the materials. There is no need to generate purchase orders or
process payments for client materials. Once the client material indent is created and
approved, you can directly receive the materials and generate a Goods Receipt Note (GRN)
upon receipt.
Note:
1. For Client Material type indent, only Contracting Projects and Contracting Sub-
Projects will be listed, and Contracting Orders will be displayed in a separate
Contract Order window. The rest of the workflow follows the same process as other
types of indents.
2. The Change Type link will not be enabled for statuses such as Locked, Verified,
Cancelled, Terminated, and Rejected.
7.2.2 Service Indent
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
In the Engineering Service Indent, the schedule start and end dates also will be displayed for
each of the categories if those are scheduled This is displayed for information purpose and
the user can create service indent accordingly The service indent will still be validated only
within the subproject start and end dates
To create a service indent, follow the below steps:
Step 1: Go to Engg > Inventory > Service Indent > Click Create Service Indent
Step 2: After clicking on the Create Service Indent, you will be prompted to fill in and select
the necessary details for the indent.
Step 3: Select Project, Sub Project, Service Indent Type, and Service Indent Date.
Step 4: Select a Work Category for which the indent is to be created.
To select a work category and add work category / sub work category(s), follow the below
steps:
Choose a work category from the drop-down list under Work Category*
Then, move the cursor slightly below and click Add New. Once you click Add New, a
new window will open. Select Work Category/Sub Work Category and click Accept
Selected.
Step 5: Type work description and upload a document(s).
To upload a document, follow the below steps:
1. Click Add New
2. Choose a file and click Update
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Step 5: Click Create. Once you have created a service indent, navigate to the Status
section and choose Submitted. The document will then be forwarded to the designated
authority responsible for approving requests, as per the approval hierarchy.
7.2.3 Purchase Orders
A purchase order (PO) is a commercial document issued by a buyer to a seller, indicating
types, quantities, and agreed prices for products or services. In real estate, it is a legally
binding contract between the contractor and the supplier.
To create a PO, follow the below steps:
Step 1: A PO can be created by following either of these paths.
1. Engg > Inventory > Purchase Orders > Click Create Purchase Order
2. Purchase > Inventory > Purchase Orders > Click Create Purchase Order
Step 2: After clicking on the Create Purchase Order button, you will be prompted to fill in
and select the necessary details for the PO.
Fields
Explanation
PO Category * (material OR asset)
Choose: Material or Asset
PO Type *
Choose one of these: Domestic, Import
OR Rate Only PO (ROPO)
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Domestic: Select this option when
materials or assets are to be procured from
suppliers within the same country as the
buyer.
Import: Select this option when materials or
assets are to be procured from suppliers
from another country(ies)
Rate Only PO (ROPO): In cases where the
user may not know the exact quantity
needed at the time of ordering, a Rate Only
Purchase Order (ROPO) is utilized. ROPO
orders are placed in bulk for a specified
amount without specifying individual
quantities.
Project *
Choose a project from the drop-down list
PO Date
Choose a date when you will place a
purchase order from the calendar
Supplier *
Choose a supplier or vendor from whom the
goods or services are being purchased.
Note: Supplier data comes from Purchase
> Masters > Supplier. To create a supplier,
click Create Supplier be navigating to the
above path.
Document Through
Branch
Add Material-Indent (button)
Click Add Material-Indent button once you
have filled in or selected the above
necessary details. It is mandatory to add a
material intent. Search for a material indent
using the filter, select and click Accept
Selected.
Add Material-RFQ (button)
Indent Material-Details
Step 3: Click Create. Once you click Create, you will be routed to the following page.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
7.2.3.1 PO-Indents
Fields
Explanation
PO Category
This is automatically populated from the
purchase order.
PO Type
This is automatically populated from the
purchase order: Domestic, Import, or ROPO
(Rate Only Purchase Order).
Debitable
If checked, Debitable indicates that a
specified amount will be debited from the
payments to be made in future
C Form Applicable
Indicates whether Form C is applicable for
CST (Central Sales Tax) purposes.
PO Date
By default, it shows today's date; the user
can select a date on or before today's date.
PO Reference No
A reference number entered by the
purchaser for tracking purposes.
Supplier*
Lists all suppliers from the Supplier Master
for selection.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Project*
Displays project names in a drop-down
menu for selection.
Serial No
Automatically increments by 1 after creation
of each PO-Indent.
PO Display No
A draft display number for the purchase
order; a permanent PO number is
generated once the PO is approved.
Click Amend, and you can add / delete indents despite having created the purchase order.
Search for a material indent using the filter, select an indent and click Accept Selected.
7.2.3.2 Rates and Taxes
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Fields
Explanation
PO Category
This is automatically populated from the
purchase order.
Project
This is the project name for which the PO is
generated. A certifying company may
oversee one or multiple projects
simultaneously.
Serial No
The serial number is auto-generated, and it
increments by 1 every time a PO indent is
created.
PO Display No
This is a draft display number assigned to a
PO. Once the PO is approved, a permanent
PO number is generated.
Status
By default, it shows Draft; You can update
the status according to the workflow.
Payable to Supplier
Shows the amount that you have to pay to
the supplier.
Payable to Service Provider
Shows the amount that you have to pay to
the service provider.
Total PO Value
Shows the total value of the purchase
order.
Total Discount
Total discount amount applied to all
materials.
Taxes
User can select tax calculation method:
Inclusive or Exclusive.
Freight
User can select freight calculation method:
Inclusive or Exclusive.
Quotation Details
Allows addition of quotation details to the
PO; selected quotations from Rate
Comparison appear if the same supplier is
chosen.
Rates and Taxes
Displays material details, brand, unit of
measure (UOM), PO quantity, taxes, and
charge details; tax and charge calculations
are shown upon addition.
Taxes And Charges Summary
Summary of all taxes and charges added
for all materials.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
7.2.3.3 Terms and Conditions
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Fields
Explanation
PO Category
This is automatically populated from the
purchase order.
Certifying company
The company's name associated with the
project for which the PO is created. It
signifies the entity overseeing the project's
operations and finances.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Project
This is the project name for which the PO is
generated. A certifying company may
oversee one or multiple projects
simultaneously.
Serial No.
The serial number is auto-generated, and it
increments by 1 every time a PO indent is
created.
PO Display Number
This is a draft display number assigned to a
PO. Once the PO is approved, a permanent
PO number is generated.
Supplier
Displays the name of the supplier. Click on
it and you will find all supplier details
including contact, materials and tax.
Credit Period (Days)
Enter credit period in terms of the number
of days, which is a financial arrangement
allowing a developer to purchase goods on
credit from a supplier or distributor. Instead
of paying upfront for the goods, the
developer receives the products and agrees
to pay the supplier at a later date, typically
within a specified period of time.
Advance Reminder Duration (Days)
Enter the number of days as an advance
reminder. Once the specified number of
days elapses from the day a PO is created,
a reminder is sent.
Payment Terms
Write the payment terms in the text box
P.O Validity Period (Days)
Enter the number of days within which the
PO needs to be fulfilled.
Remarks
Add any remarks, if applicable
Delivery Schedule
This feature allows users to schedule the delivery of materials.
To create a delivery schedule, follow the below steps:
1. Click on Add Delivery Schedule under Delivery Schedule
2. Select a delivery date from the calendar under Delivery Date
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
3. Choose the store name for delivery under Store
4. Add remarks and address under Remarks and Address fields respectively
5. Select the materials for delivery
6. Click Save
General Terms And Conditions
This feature allows users to set general terms and conditions.
To create general terms and conditions, follow the below steps:
1. Click on Add under General Terms And Conditions
2. Select a condition category(ies) and click Accept Selected
Note:
Condition Category column data comes from Purchase > Masters > Master Tables >
Condition Category Master.
Condition column data comes from Purchase > Masters > Master Tables > Condition
Master
Material Specific Terms And Conditions
This feature allows users to set specific terms and conditions. For example, setting terms
and conditions on quality standards, delivery schedules, installation requirements, and / or
warranty terms of a specific material.
To create material specific terms and conditions, follow the below steps:
1. Click on Add under Material Specific Terms And Conditions
2. Select a material condition category(ies) and click Accept Selected
Documents
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
This feature allows users to upload any documents related to the PO.
Follow the below steps to upload a document:
1. Click Add Row
2. Choose a file and click Update
7.2.4 ROPO Mapping
ROPO Mapping streamlines procurement for materials with uncertain quantities, like Ready-
to-Mix Concrete. Users negotiate rates with suppliers before project commencement. Upon
starting the project, they submit an indent specifying the required quantity. With both rate
and quantity known, users map them effortlessly within the system. This process ensures
accurate procurement by aligning negotiated rates with actual quantities.
Once mapped, the system will generate purchase orders. In essence, ROPO Mapping
optimizes the procurement process, allowing users to secure favorable rates upfront and
efficiently manage material procurement throughout the project lifecycle.
To create a ROPO Mapping, follow the below steps:
1. Navigate to Engg > ROPO Mapping > Click Create ROPO Mapping
2. Select a project under Project. Enter a reference number and add remarks under
Reference Number and Remarks, respectively.
3. In the Indent and PO Mapping grid, click Add Indents. A new window opens; search
for an indent using the filter, select it, and click Accept Selected.
4. In the Indent and PO Mapping grid, click Add POs. A new window opens, search for
a PO using the filter, select it, and click Accept Selected.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
5. Once created, it will be in the Draft status. To change the status, scroll above and
click Change Status, select Submitted and click Update Status. The ROPO
Mapping request will then be forwarded to the designated authority responsible for
approving requests, as per the approval hierarchy.
7.2.5 GRN
A goods received note (GRN) is a document used in the process of receiving goods from a
supplier or vendor. It serves as an acknowledgment or proof of receipt of goods by the
buyer. Our In4Suite application has a feature that allows developers / contractors to create a
proof of receipt of goods when they are delivered to the store.
To create a GRN, follow the below steps:
1. Navigate to Engg > Inventory > GRN > Create GRN
2. After clicking on the Create GRN button, you will be prompted to fill in and select the
necessary details for the GRN.
Note: The fields will vary based on the GRN Type. However, majority of them will be the
same.
GRN Type: Purchase Order
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Fields
Explanation
GRN Type
Select Purchase Order as GRN Type when
goods are received directly from a supplier
or vendor.
Supplier *
Choose a supplier from the drop-down list.
Supplier data list comes from Purchase >
Masters > Supplier.
Certifying Company
Select the company's name associated with
the project from the drop-down list.
Project
Select a project from the drop-down list
Sub Project
Select a sub project from the drop-down list
Purchase Order *
Click on Select located beside the field,
then choose a purchase order using the
search filter. Once you've found the right
one, select it and click Accept Selected.
To Store *
Select a store to which the goods are to be
transferred from the drop-down list. Store
data list comes from Assets > Masters >
Store Master.
Work Order No.
This field is automatically populated from
the related work order
Indent No.
This field is automatically populated from
the related indent
Delivery Challan/Invoice No. *
Enter a unique number that will be recorded
as delivery challan or invoice for the
received goods.
Delivery Challan/Invoice Date *
Select a date to be recorded against
delivery challan or invoice from the
calendar
GRN Date *
Select a date when the GRN is generated
from the calendar
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Vehicle No.
Record the number plate of the vehicle
transporting the goods.
Gate No.
Enter the gate number through which the
goods vehicle has entered
Remarks
Add any remarks, if applicable
GRN Type: Transfer Order
Fields
Explanation
GRN Type
Select Transfer Order as GRN Type when
goods are to be transferred from one store
to another either within the same project
stores or from one project store to another.
This GRN will update the quantity of goods
in .
To Store *
Select a store to which the goods are to be
transferred to from the drop-down list. Store
data list comes from Assets > Masters >
Store Master.
Transfer Order No. *
Select transfer order number from the drop-
down menu
From Store
The store name from which the goods are
to be brought is automatically displayed
when the transfer order number is selected
Delivery Challan/Invoice No *
Enter a unique number that will be recorded
as delivery challan or invoice for the
received goods.
Delivery Challan/Invoice Date *
Select a date to be recorded against
delivery challan or invoice from the
calendar
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
GRN Date *
Select a date when the GRN is generated
from the calendar
Vehicle No.
Record the number plate of the vehicle
transporting the goods.
Remarks
Add any remarks, if applicable
GRN Type: Client Material
Fields
Explanation
GRN Type
Select Client Material as GRN Type when
goods are received from a client.
Client
Select client who have shipped the goods
to your store
Project
Select a project from the drop-down list
Sub Project
Select a sub project from the drop-down list
Contract Order *
Click on Select located beside the field,
then choose a contract order. Once you've
selected it, click Accept Selected.
Indent *
Select an indent from the drop-down list
To Store *
Select a store from the drop-down list. Store
data list comes from Assets > Masters >
Store Master.
Indent No.
This field is automatically populated from
the related indent
Total Credit Note Amount
GRN Date *
Select a date when the GRN is generated
from the calendar
Vehicle No.
Record the number plate of the vehicle
transporting the goods.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Gate No.
Enter the gate number through which the
goods vehicle has entered
Remarks
Add any remarks, if applicable
7.2.6 Issue Inventory
When materials are dispatched from the store to the site, the user must create an Issue
Inventory to issue the materials.
To create an issue inventory, follow the below steps:
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Inventory > Issue Inventory
Step 2: Choosing the type of inventory as Multiple Material Issue or Single Material Issue.
Multiple Material Issue: Choose this option when dispensing multiple materials
simultaneously, for example, cement, steel and stone.
Single Material Issue: Choose this option when issuing a single material, for example, only
limestone.
Step 3: Choose an Issue Type
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
From the drop-down list, choose the issue type: Regular Issue, BOQ Issue or Tolerance
Issue.
Regular Issue: This option is typically selected when there is a routine or ongoing demand
for specific materials with the ongoing operational requirements of the business or project. In
other words, whenever the need arises for certain inventory items, this choice is employed to
facilitate a timely and regular supply.
BOQ Issue: A BOQ has details of all the materials needed along with an estimation of cost.
A BOQ is either mapped to a single contractor or multiple contractors. A contractor can
either get the material themselves or the company may issue the material to them based on
the clauses in the BOQ. Select this option when the inventory is to be supplied to a
contractor or contractors, as per the BOQ.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Tolerance Issue:
Some materials, when ordered, may not be received in the precise quantity specified in the
order. For example, if you order 1 ton of steel, the actual quantity received might be slightly
more than what is documented in the invoice. In cases where there is an excess of the
material in stock, this surplus needs to be issued under this category
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Step 4: Fill in and select the other necessary details.
Other Fields
Explanation
Certifying Company
Select the company's name associated with
the store from the drop-down list.
From Store *
Select a store from which the goods are to
be issued.
Project *
Select a project from the drop-down list
Material Type *
Select a material type from the drop-down
list. This field categorizes materials based
on their characteristics, composition, or
purpose. For example, Cement.
Material Sub Type *
Select a sub-material type from the drop-
down list. This field provides further
classification or refinement of the material
type. It allows for a more detailed
categorization of materials within broader
categories. For example, Ordinary Portland
Cement (OPC).
Material *
This field specifies the individual material or
item being referenced. For example, OPC
53 Grade Cement
Indent Details
The indent details are automatically
populated when you select certifying
company and project. All you have to do is
choose the UOM and enter current issue
quantity in the Indent details grid.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Step 5: Click Create.
7.2.7 Return Inventory
If there are any surplus materials, they can be returned by initiating the Return Inventory
process. Once the contractor has completed the assigned work, any remaining materials can
be returned to the store through the Return Inventory procedure.
To create a return inventory, follow the below steps
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Inventory > Return Inventory > Click Create Return Material
Step 2: Fill in and select the other necessary details.
Fields
Explanation
Date *
Choose a date when the excess material
needs to be returned to the store from the
calendar
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Return Category *
Choose the category: Material or Asset
Certifying Company
Select the company's name associated with
the store from the drop-down list.
To Store *
Select the store to which the material needs
to be returned from the drop-down list
Project *
Choose a project from the drop-down list
Sub Project
Choose a sub project from the drop-down
list
Work Order No. *
Click on Select located beside the field,
then choose a work order using the search
filter. Once you've found the right one,
select it and click Accept Selected.
Contractor
Contractor name is automatically populated
from the work order
Site Remarks
Add any site remarks, if applicable
Material Details
The material details are automatically
populated when you select project and work
order. All you have to do is choose the
UOM and enter current return quantity in
the Indent details grid.
Document
Add any document related to the return
inventory. To add a document, click Add
Row under Document, choose a file and
click Update.
Step 3: Click Submit. Once submitted, it will be in the Draft status. To change the status,
scroll above and click Change Status, select Submitted and click Update Status. The
return will then be forwarded to the designated authority responsible for approving requests,
as per the approval hierarchy.
7.2.8 Gate Pass
A gate pass is an official document authorizing the movement of goods into or out of a
controlled area, like a construction site or warehouse. It records details such as items
transported, purpose, duration, and authorizations, ensuring security and proper
documentation of all incoming and outgoing activities.
On the In4Suite applicable, a gate pass can be generated for three scenarios: Returnable,
Non-Returnable, and Transfer orders.
Returnable
After receiving goods from suppliers at the store, if they are found to need a repair, polishing,
or similar work, they can be returned to the supplier. Once the defects are rectified in the
returned materials / assets and they are returned to the store by supplier, a Returnable Gate
Pass is created.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
For example, the store receive scaffolding for project, but some components need repairs
due to wear and tear. Another example: a generator requires servicing due to a minor issue.
Non-Returnable
In cases where defective materials are identified upon receipt from the supplier and need to
be returned from the store, a Non-Returnable Gate pass is generated.
Example: Damaged electrical cables returned to the supplier due to manufacturing defects,
with no intention of receiving them back in the store.
Transfer
When there are excess materials available from a project/subproject, they can be transferred
to another project/subproject, and a Transfer Gate pass is created.
Example: Surplus bricks from one construction site transferred to another site where
additional materials are needed to complete the project.
Note
1. Materials cannot be transferred between projects/subprojects of different certifying
companies.
2. For the creation of a Returnable Gate Pass, it is necessary to have Indent, Purchase
Order, Goods Receipt Note (GRN), Issue Inventory, and Return Inventory created for
a work order.
3. Similarly, for the creation of a Non-Returnable Gate Pass, one should have Indent,
Purchase Order, and GRN (including defective materials) created and approved.
Lastly, for a Transfer Gate Pass, a Transfer Order must be created and approved.
To create a Gate Pass, Follow the below steps:
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Inventory > Gate Pass > Click Create Gate Pass
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Step 2: Fill in and select the other necessary details.
Gate Pass Type: Returnable
Fields
Explanation
Gate Pass Type*
Choose Returnable as Gate Pass Type.
Project*
Choose a project from the drop-down list
Sub-Project*
Choose a sub project from the drop-down
list
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Work Order*
Click on Select located beside the field,
then choose a work order using the search
filter. Once you've found the right one,
select it and click Accept Selected.
Contact Person
Enter the name of the person responsible
for overseeing the return process.
Mobile No
Enter the contact number of the person
overseeing the return process.
Vehicle No.
Enter the registration number of the vehicle
transporting the goods. This ensures
tracking and identification of the vahicle.
Driver Name
Enter name of the driver operating the
vehicle transporting the goods.
Gate Pass Date*
Date on which the gate pass is issued or
created. It provides a timestamp for the
transaction.
Issued By
The individual or department issuing the
gate pass, responsible for authorizing the
movement of goods.
Purpose*
Enter the reason for creating the gate pass,
such as repair, maintenance, or return of
goods to the supplier.
Material/Asset Outbound Details
Add outbound material/asset by clicking
Add Material/Asset under Material/Asset
Outbound Details. Next, use the filter to
search for the desired material, select it,
and then click Accept Selected.
Documents
Attach any accompanying documents or
references related to the returnable gate
pass transaction
Gate Pass Type: Non- Returnable
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Fields
Explanation
Gate Pass Type*
Choose Non- Returnable as Gate Pass
Type.
Supplier*
Select the supplier to whom the goods are
to be returned
Certifying Company
Select the company's name associated with
the store from the drop-down list.
Store*
Select GRN
Select the store from which the materials /
assets are to be returned.
Once you select the store, click Select GRN
just below the Store field. Search for a GRN
using the filter, select it and click Accept
Selected.
Contact Person
Enter the name of the person responsible
for overseeing the return process.
Mobile No
Enter the contact number of the person
overseeing the return process.
Vehicle No.
Enter the registration number of the vehicle
transporting the goods. This ensures
tracking and identification of the vahicle.
Driver Name
Enter name of the driver operating the
vehicle transporting the goods.
Gate Pass Date*
Date on which the gate pass is issued or
created. It provides a timestamp for the
transaction.
Issued By
The individual or department issuing the
gate pass, responsible for authorizing the
movement of goods.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Purpose*
Enter the reason for creating the gate pass,
such as repair, maintenance, or return of
goods to the supplier.
Material/Asset Outbound Details
Once you select the GRN, the
material/asset outbound details are
automatically populated.
Documents
Attach any accompanying documents or
references related to the non-returnable
gate pass transaction
Gate Pass Type: Transfer
Fields
Explanation
Gate Pass Type*
Choose Transfer as Gate Pass Type
Certifying Company
Select the company's name associated with
the store from the drop-down list.
From Store*
Select the originating store where the
excess goods are currently located and
being transferred from.
Transfer Order*
Click on Select located beside the field,
then choose a work order using the search
filter. Once you've found the right one,
select it and click Accept Selected.
Note: Transfer Order data comes from
Home > Admin > Configure Display
Number
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
To Store
The destination store where the excess
goods are intended to be transferred and
received.
Contact Person
Enter the name of the individual overseeing
the transfer process, typically from the
issuing or receiving store.
Mobile No
Enter the contact number of the person
overseeing the transfer process.
Vehicle No.
Enter the registration number of the vehicle
transporting the goods. This ensures
tracking and identification of the vahicle.
Driver Name
Enter name of the driver operating the
vehicle transporting the goods.
Gate Pass Date*
Date on which the gate pass is issued or
created. It provides a timestamp for the
transaction.
Issued By
The individual or department issuing the
gate pass, responsible for authorizing the
movement of goods.
Purpose*
Enter the reason for creating the gate pass,
such as repair, maintenance, or return of
goods to the supplier.
Material/Asset Outbound Details*
Add outbound material/asset by clicking
Add Material/Asset under Material/Asset
Outbound Details. Next, use the filter to
search for the desired material, select it,
and then click Accept Selected.
Documents
Attach any accompanying documents or
references related to the transfer gate pass
transaction.
Step 3: Click Create. Once you have created Gate Pass, navigate to the Status section and
choose Submitted. The document will then be forwarded to the designated authority
responsible for approving requests, as per your approval hierarchy.
7.2.9 Material Reconciliation
Material Reconciliation involves comparing standard data with actual data while accounting
for variances. Store quantities can be adjusted positively or negatively to increase or
decrease them. The updated quantity reflects the adjustments made in the store inventory.
To create a material reconciliation, follow the below steps:
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Inventory > Material Reconciliation > Click Create Material
Reconciliation
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Step 2: Fill in and select the other necessary details.
Fields
Explanation
Store
Select the store where the inventory is
located from the drop-down list
Certifying Company
Once the store is selected, the certifying
company is automatically populated.
Reconciliation Date
Choose a reconciliation date from the
calendar
Remarks
Add any remarks, if applicable
Material
Click Add New under Material. Search for
and add a material for which the
reconciliation is to be done using the filter.
Click Accept Selected.
Next, input the Adjustment Quantity and
Adjustment Rate. Optionally, add remarks
and select a reason for the adjustment.
Step 3: Click Create.
7.2.10 Transfer Order
The Transfer Order feature allows developers, who manage multiple stores across different
projects, to transfer material or asset from one store to another.
To create a transfer order, follow the below steps:
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Inventory > Transfer Order > Click Create Transfer Order
Step 2: Once you click Transfer Order, you will be prompted to fill in and select the
necessary details.
Step 3: Fill in and select the necessary details
Create Transfer Order For: Material or Asset: Select the category of transfer
Transfer Date: Select a date from the calendar when the transfer will be made.
Certifying Company: Choose a company that owns the project and the store that
belongs to the project.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
From Project: Select a project to which the store, from which the material or asset
will be transferred, belongs.
From Store: Select the store from which the material or asset will be transferred.
To Store: Select the store to which the material or asset will be transferred.
Delivery Site: Add the address of the site where the store is located.
Remarks: Add remarks, if any.
Grid
Material Details
To add material details, follow the below steps:
Add materials or assets by clicking Add Materials.
Once you click Add Material, a new window opens, prompting you to select materials
or assets. Search for a material(s) or asset(s) using the filter, checkmark and then
click Accept Selected.
After select the items, enter transfer quantity, UOM or Unit of Measurement, and rate.
Documents
Upload any document related to the transfer order.
To upload a document, click Add New, choose a file and then click Update
Step 4: After filling in or select the necessary details as shown above, click the Create
button.
7.3 Tendering
Tendering is the process of submitting bids for a project or accepting a formal offer to
undertake work. It typically involves competitive bidding for substantial projects, often with
specific deadlines and fixed prices.
7.3.1 Tender Document
This is the initial stage where project owner prepares a document outlining the project
details, specifications, terms, and conditions.
Pre-requisites
Configure the display number settings for the tender document in Home > Admin >
Configure display number > Tender document.
Define the workflow for the tender document entity in Home > Admin > Workflow >
Tender document.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
To create a tender document, go to Engg > Tendering > Tender Document, then click
Create Tender Document and fill in Project Details, Work Category Details and Tender
Details.
Project Details
Explanation
Select the project from the drop-down menu
Click on Add New and select the Sub Project against which you want to
float a tender
Type the scope of work: the list of work activities that contractors are
obliged to do
Work Category Details
Click on Add New. A new dialogue box, Work Category, opens. Select the work category
from the drop-down menu.
Note: The work categories that you see in the down-down list all come from the master list.
You will first create a work category by going to Engg > Masters > Master Tables, then
selecting Work Category Type Master and clicking Go.
On the top right, click Create and fill the following fields, accordingly.
Tender Details
Fields
Explanation
Tender
Document
Template
Choose the template from the drop-down menu
Tender Title
Enter the title given to the construction project for which bids or tenders
are being solicited
Tender
Document Date
Select the date on which the tender document is to be issued to
potential bidders or contractors
Tender Open
Date
Select the date when the submitted bids or tenders are officially opened
and publicly disclosed
Tender Type
Choose the tender type from the drop-down menu
Contract Type
Choose the contract type from the drop-down menu
Tender To Be
Forwarded By
Tender
Forwarded To
Entity or department to which the tender documents should be sent. It
provides the address or contact details for the submission of bids or
tender
Tender
Available At
Refers to the location where the tender documents can be obtained. It
might be a physical location, such as the office of the issuing
organization, or online where digital copies can be downloaded
On Behalf Of
Remarks
Any additional comments, clarifications, or important information that
bidders need to consider while preparing their bids.
Tender
Available From
Start date when the tender document will be made available to
prospective bidders.
Tender
Available To
Closing date or deadline for obtaining the tender documents.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
After filling out the tender document, carefully review the details, and then click on the
Create button. Upon clicking the Create button, you will see BOQ menu options enabled at
the top. Go to the BOQ menu and select at least one BOQ that will go along with the tender
document to potential bidders.
To add a BOQ, click Add BOQ. Now, select the project against which you have created the
BOQ from the drop-down menu. If you have multiple BOQs listed, you can refine your
search by filtering at the Work Category and Work Sub Category levels. You can also filter
BOQs using BOQ ID and BOQ Name.
Note: The BOQs that you see in the down-down list all come from the master list. You will
first create BOQs by going to Engg > Masters > BOQ, then clicking Create BOQ… Click
here to know how to create BOQ.
The menu bar at the top has the following menu items:
Tender Document Details: View tender document details such as project details, work
category details, tender details and audit trail.
BOQ: Add and view BOQ details
Material, Labour, Assets: Shows the material, labour, and assets data categorically from
the BOQ
Documents: Attach and upload all necessary files and paperwork related to the tender. To
do it, click the Add New button; choose the file from your local storage; add remarks; and
Click on 🖫 to save the document.
Checklist: Ensure the completeness and accuracy of the entire tendering journey by
creating a checklist. To do so, click Add New, select the checklists you want to follow, click
Accept Selected, and then click Update.
Note: Tender checklist comes from the master data that you can create by going to Engg >
Master > Master Tables. Select Tender Document Checklist Master, click Go, and then
click Create, which will prompt a new window to open. There, enter the checklist name and
click Create.
On the same Master Table, you can also edit or delete the checklists by navigating to
Actions on the right side of the window.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
View Amendments: Track changes and their statuses (Draft, Submitted, Approved,
Amended & Submitted, Amended and Approved) for change / amendment lifecycle in just a
click.
Once you have added the BOQ, navigate to the Status section and choose Submitted. The
document will then be forwarded to the designated authority responsible for approving
requests, as per the approval hierarchy.
7.3.2 Expression of Interest
Contractors interested in participating in the tender process submit an Expression of Interest.
This document typically includes information about the contractor's qualifications,
experience, and their intention to bid on the project.
Pre-requisites:
Configure the display number settings for the Expression of Interest entity under
Home > Admin > Configure display number > Expression of Interest.
Define the workflow for the Expression of Interest entity under Home > Admin >
Workflow > Expression of Interest.
Navigation:
Engineering > Tendering > Expression of Interest
To create an Expression of Interest, follow the below steps:
Step 1: Under Tender Document No, click Select and choose any desired tender
document from the list and clicks on Accept Selected.
Note: Under Tender Document No, only the approved records will be displayed.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Step 2: Under Contractors/Consultants, click Add New, select a contractor or consultant that
has expressed interested and click Accept Selected.
Note: Only those contractors whose expertise match with the work category selected
in the tender document will be visible under Contractors/Consultants.
Step 3: Under Document, add any related document. Click Add New, choose a file and click
Update.
Step 4: Click Create. Once created, it will be in the Draft status. To change the status, scroll
above and click Change Status, select Submitted and click Update Status. It goes to the
authority who has been authorized to decide whether to accept or reject.
Approval of EOI:
Users can approve the records only if the workflow is defined for the respective login user
(Application roles).
7.3.3 Contractor Response
After you invite contractors/consultants to express their interests in a project, the response
from them can be either positive or negative.
Navigation:
Engineering > Tendering > Contractor response
To record a contractor response, follow the below steps:
Step 1: Select a project using the filter. You may select using either project, EOI Display No,
or Tender Document No. Then, click Go.
Step 2: Select the contractor or consultant.
Note:
a. Only contractors providing positive responses will appear in the pop-up page,
and the selected contractor should be added to float tender upon clicking
Accept Selected.
b. Negative response contractors will also be listed when searching in the
"search all" option. Users should be able to add those specific contractors to
the float tender with an alert indicating "following contractors have responded
negatively."
After floating the tender to the contractor, modify the response as necessary.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
7.3.4 Float Tender
Floating a Tender involves officially inviting bids from contractors or suppliers for a project.
Pre-requisite:
Define the work flow for the Float tender entity under Home > Administration > Work flow >
Float Tender.
Navigation
Engg > Tendering > Float Tender > Float Tender List
To create a float tender, follow the below steps:
Step 1: Go to Engg > Tendering > Float Tender > Float Tender List > Click Create Float
Tender
Step 2: Fill in the page with basic details
Basic Details
Fields
Explanation
Tender Doc No.
Upload tender document. Click Select and
search for the document using the filter
(project, sub project, work category, tender
document date range, tender document
number, etc.). Click Go, choose a
document and click Accept Selected.
Project
Automatically populated from the Tender
Doc No.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Sub Projects
Automatically populated from the Tender
Doc No.
Float Tender Title
Give a descriptive title for the tender.
Float Tender Date
Pick a date to float the tender from the
calendar
Remarks
Add any remarks, if applicable.
No Of Contractors/Consultants
Automatically shown when you select
contractors/consultants under Add
Contractor/Consultant
Add Contractor / Consultant
Select contractors/consultants to be added
to the tender.
Step 3: Click Create.
Note:
1. User can approve the records only if work flow is defined for the respective login user
(Application roles)
2. Once tender is floated to the contractor, user can create tender receipt for the
contractor
7.3.5 Pre-Tender Estimate
The project owner may conduct a pre-tender estimate to have an idea of the anticipated cost
of the project. This estimate serves as a reference point during the evaluation of submitted
bids.
Pre-requisite:
Configure the display number settings for the Pre-Tender Estimate under Home >
Administration > Configure Display Number > Pre-Tender Estimate
Navigation:
Engg > Tendering > Pre-Tender Estimate > Pre-Tender Estimate(PTE) List
To crate a pre-tender estimate, follow the below steps:
Step 1: Go to Engg > Tendering > Pre-Tender Estimate > Pre-Tender Estimate(PTE)
List > Click Create PTE
Step 2: Upload a tender document by clicking Select under Tender Document No. Click Select
and search for the document using the filter (project, tender document number, etc.). Click
Go, choose a document and click Accept Selected.
Step 3: Add any remarks, if applicable
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Step 4: Once you have created Pre-Tender Estimate, navigate to the Status section and
choose Submitted. The document will then be forwarded to the designated authority
responsible for approving requests, as per the approval hierarchy.
Gross amount calculation in PTE:
i) Total BOQ amount = BOQ Qty * BOQ Rate (for individual BOQ's)
ii) Calculate Tax Factor (For inclusive taxes only) = 1 + (% Of Amount/100 * Tax %/100)
iii) PTE Base value = PTE BOQ amount / Tax factor
iv) Calculate Inclusive and exclusive taxes on Base value to obtain individual tax amounts.
v) PTE Gross Value = PTE Base Value + Total Tax amount
Or
PTE Gross Value = PTE Value + Total Tax exclusive amount
Users can add desired Tax Category, Tax Percentage, Tax Type (Inclusive/Exclusive), and
% Of Amount.
Inclusive tax calculation should occur as follows:
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
1. Finding the Tax Factor from the Inclusive Taxes:
Let Tax Factor = 1 (default)
Tax Factor = Tax Factor + (% of amount * tax percentage)
2. Finding the Base Value:
Let Base Value = Total BOQ amount / Tax Factor
3. Determining Tax Amount for all-inclusive and exclusive taxes:
Tax Amount = (Base Value * applied on %) * tax percentage
Note: User can approve the records only if work flow is defined for the respective login user
(Application roles)
7.3.6 Tender Opening Form
At the specified date and time, the project owner opens the submitted tenders in a formal
process. The tender opening form records details such as the names of contractor /
consultant, bid amounts, and any other relevant information.
Pre-requisite:
Configure the display number settings for the tender opening form entity under Home >
Admin > Configure Display Number > Tender Opening Form.
Navigation:
Engg > Tendering > Tender Opening Form
To create a tender opening form, follow the below steps:
Step 1: Go to Engg > Tendering > Tender Opening Form > Tender Opening Form List >
Click Create Tender Opening Form
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Step 2: Input the details
Fields / Details
Explanation
Tender Document No
Upload tender document. Click Select and
search for the document using the filter
(project, tender document number, etc.).
Click Go, choose a document and click
Accept Selected.
Project
Automatically populated from the Tender
Doc No.
Work Category
Automatically populated from the Tender
Doc No.
Tender Opening Date
Select tender opening date from the
calendar and set the time of tending
opening
Remarks
Add any remarks, if applicable
Employee Details:
Click on Add New and search for employee
using search bar. Select the employee and
click Add. Employee details are added to
assign responsibilities, communicate with
relevant personnel, and track tender
process.
Contact Details:
Click Add New. Select a contact and click
Add.
Tender Details:
enter the tender value of the respective
contractor under tender details
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
7.3.7 Tender Receipt
After opening the tenders, the project owner acknowledges receipt of each bid. This step
ensures that all bids are accounted for and entered into the evaluation process.
Pre-requisites:
1. Configure the display number settings for the Tender Receipt entity under Home >
Admin > Configure Display No > Tender Receipt.
2. Configure the display number settings for the Tender Receipt entity under Home >
Admin > Configure Workflow > Tender Receipt.
Navigation:
Engg > Tendering > Tender Receipt
To create a tender receipt, follow the below steps:
Step 1: Go to Engg > Tendering > Tender Receipt List > Click Create Tender Receipt
Step 2: Input the details
Fields / Details
Explanation
Tender Document No
Upload tender document. Click Select and
search for the document using the filter
(project, tender document number, etc.).
Click Go, choose a document and click
Accept Selected.
Project
Automatically populated from the Tender
Doc No.
Sub Project
Select a sub project from the drop-down list
Contractor/Consultant *
Select a contractor or consultant from the
drop-down list
Float Tender No.
Automatically populated from the Float
Tender phase
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Valid From Date *
Valid To Date *
Specify the date from and until which the
tender is valid from the calendars.
Remarks
Add any remarks, if applicable
Gross amount calculation in Tender receipt:
1. Calculate the Total BOQ amount by multiplying the BOQ Qty with the BOQ Rate for
individual BOQs.
2. Calculate the Tax Factor for inclusive taxes using the formula: 1 + (% Of Amount /
100 * Tax % / 100).
3. Determine the Tender receipt Base value by dividing the Tender receipt BOQ amount
by the Tax factor.
4. Calculate the inclusive and exclusive taxes on the Base value to obtain individual tax
amounts.
5. Compute the Tender receipt Gross Value by adding the Tender receipt Base Value to
the Total Tax amount.
Alternatively,
Tender receipt Gross Value can be calculated as either:
Tender receipt Base Value + Total Tax exclusive amount OR
Tender receipt Value + Total Tax exclusive amount.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Note:
1. All BOQs included in the tender document for the selected subproject will be listed on
the page, with only the rate column editable. When a user enters the rate, the
application will automatically calculate the BOQ amount as (BOQ amount = BOQ
QTY * BOQ Rate).
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
2. An Import link will be visible on the left side of the Tender Receipt View page,
allowing users to import rates from an Excel file.
3. The application will validate the imported Excel file against the version exported from
the tender document page. Values will only update in the application when the
versions match. For example, if the tender document is amended and approved, the
user must re-export the Excel file from the tender document page and import the
same Excel with the user-defined rates in the tender receipt.
4. The individual BOQ amounts will be summed up and displayed in the Total BOQ
amount field across all pages of the tender receipt.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Users can add their desired Tax Category, Tax Percentage, Tax Type (Inclusive/Exclusive),
and Percentage of Amount.
For Inclusive tax calculation:
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
1. Finding the Tax Factor from the Inclusive Taxes:
Begin with Tax Factor = 1 (default).
Update Tax Factor = Tax Factor + (% of amount * tax percentage).
2. Finding the Base Value:
Determine Base Value = Total BOQ amount / Tax Factor.
3. Calculating Tax Amount for all-inclusive and exclusive taxes:
Tax Amount = (Base Value * applied on %) * tax percentage.
1. Users can view all master-driven Commercial Qualifications and Technical
Qualifications, along with Modify and Cancel buttons.
2. Users have the capability to modify and input remarks beside each Technical &
Commercial Qualification. Additionally, they should be able to update the record
accordingly.
Note:
User can approve the records only if work flow is defined for the respective login user
(Application roles)
Once tender receipt is created, user can create the rate comparison
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
7.3.8 Rate Comparison
The submitted bids are thoroughly reviewed and compared based on various factors, such
as cost, timeline, and compliance with project specifications. The rate comparison helps in
selecting the most suitable contractor for the project.
Pre-requite:
Define the work flow for the rate comparison entity under Home > Admin > Configure
WorkFlow > Tender Rate Comparison
Navigation:
Engg > Tendering > Rate Comparison
To create a rate comparison, follow the below steps:
Step 1: Go to Engg > Tendering > Rate Comparison > Rate Comparison List > Click
Create Rate Comparison
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Step 2: Fill in the page with rate comparison details
Fields / Details
Explanation
Tender Document No
Upload tender document. Click Select and
search for the document using the filter
(project, tender document number, etc.).
Click Go, choose a document and click
Accept Selected.
Tender Date
Automatically populated from the Tender
Doc No.
Tender Type
Automatically populated from the Tender
Doc No.
Tender Available From
Tender Available To
Automatically populated from the Tender
Doc No.
Project
Automatically populated from the Tender
Doc No.
Sub Project
Automatically populated from the Tender
Doc No.
Remarks
Add any remarks, if applicable
Work Category Details
The specifics of the work category under
tender process are automatically populated
from the tender document.
Contractor/Consultant Details
This section displays the rate comparison of
contractors or consultants across rounds.
Step 3: Click Create.
Step 4: Scroll up and change the status to Submitted. But before you do it, you will have to
select a vendor first. To select a vendor, go to Vendor Selection tab on the same page,
click Modify, select a vendor and click Update.
Now, come back to the Logic Note Comparison tab, add remarks and change the status to
Submitted. It will then go to the authority who has been authorised to approve or reject the
request.
Note 1: You cannot select more than one vendor under Vendor Selection.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Note 2:
a) Users can access all tender documents and rate comparison details from the Rate
Comparison tab.
b) When a user selects the vendor selection link, the page should navigate to the
Comparisons page where users can compare the rates of contractors based on the
selected criteria.
c) Users can modify and select vendors for whom they wish to issue the Work Order
(WO).
7.3.9 Tender Link To WO
Once a contractor is selected, the project owner issues a work order to them. The work order
outlines the project scope, timelines, quantity, rate and any other relevant details. This step
formalizes the agreement between the builder (project owner) and the contractor who has
been awarded the tender.
To link a tender to Work Order (WO), follow the below steps:
Step 1: Search for a tender using the filter and click Go. Select tender and click Next. Upon
selection, the page will navigate to the next page displaying all Bill of Quantities (BOQ)
information related to that particular tender document. Scroll to the bottom of the page, you
will find Create Work Order button.
Note:
1. You can also create work orders from this page, and they will initially be in draft
status once created unless you go to the Status and change it to Submitted.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
2. Application will not allow to create the work order through tendering if the
category/sub work categories do not exist in the subproject budget (Navigation: Engg
> Projects > Budget > Sub Category Budget.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
7.4 Contracting
The Contracting, which is a pre-sales feature, streamlines the processes involved from the
initial lead generation to the pre-construction contractual agreements.
7.4.1 Leads
The Leads menu is essential for managing potential clients and opportunities. It has two
tabs:
Lead List
Leads
7.4.1.1 Lead List
This tab provides a comprehensive view of all the leads that have been created. Users can
see the status of each lead, follow up on progress, and manage the pipeline with ease. The
interface includes sorting and filtering options to easily find specific leads.
7.4.1.2 Leads
This tab allows users to create a new lead. When a potential client shows interest in the
company's construction services, details such as their contact information, project
requirements, and any other relevant information can be recorded here. This helps in
tracking and managing potential business opportunities.
To create a lead, follow the below steps:
Step 1: Engg > Contracting > Leads > Leads tab > Create Lead
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Step 2: Once you click on the Leads tab, you will be prompted to fill in and select the
necessary details as mentioned below.
Fields
Explanation
Lead*
This field captures the name of the lead
Company *
This field captures the name of the
company associated with the lead
Address *
This field captures the complete address of
the lead or company, including street name
and number.
Country *
This dropdown field allows users to select
the country where the lead or company is
located.
State *
This dropdown field allows users to select
the state or province within the country
where the lead or company is located.
City *
Select the city from the drop-down list
Pin Code *
Enter the pincode
Region*
This field captures the specific region within
the state or country, which can be useful for
regional sales strategies and market
analysis.
Location*
This field captures additional location
details, such as the specific area or locality,
providing more precise geographic
information.
Status
This dropdown field allows users to select
the current status of the lead: Active or
Inactive
Competitor
This field captures the name of any known
competitors vying for the same contract. It
helps in strategic planning and competitive
analysis.
Phone No.
Enter the primary contact phone number of
the lead
Web Site
Enter the website URL of the lead
Stage
This dropdown field allows users to select
the current stage of the lead in the sales
process, such as 'Prospect', 'Interested',
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
'Discussion Scheduled', etc. Once the stage
is selected from the dropdown, enter
percentage in the field beside it
Source
This dropdown field allows users to select
the source of the lead, such as 'Referral',
'Website', 'Trade Show', 'Cold Call', etc. It
helps in understanding how the lead was
generated.
Industry*
This dropdown field allows users to select
the industry in which the lead's company
operates.
Type*
This dropdown field allows users to specify
the type of lead, such as whether it's a new
business opportunity, an existing customer,
or a referral.
Owner
This field captures the name of the sales
representative or account manager
responsible for managing the lead. It helps
in accountability and tracking sales
activities.
Description
This field allows users to enter any
additional notes or details about the lead. It
can include specific requirements,
preferences, or relevant background
information.
Potential Revenue*
This field captures the estimated revenue
that could be generated from this lead if it
converts into a client. It is crucial for
forecasting and business planning.
Potential Closure
This field captures the estimated date or
timeframe when the lead is expected to
close, if successful. It helps in planning and
forecasting sales cycles.
Tax ID *
Enter the Tax ID of the lead
GSTIN No.
Enter the GSTIN No. of the lead
MSME No.
Enter the MSME No. of the lead
Logo
This field allows users to upload the
company's logo.
Step 3: Once the above fields are completed, click Create.
Contact History and Tasks
Interactions with leads can be created as and when they happen.
To create an interaction, follow the below steps:
Step 1: Go to the Leads List tab, use the filter to search for the lead, and click on it to open
the Edit page.
Step 2: Click on Contact History & Tasks in the top right corner of the Edit page. In the new
window, switch between the Contact History and Tasks tabs to record interactions and
create tasks.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Step 3: Fill in the necessary details in both tabs and click Create to save your entries.
Convert to Client
In case the prospect decides to award the contract, the lead must be converted into a client.
Alternatively, you can also create a client by navigating to Engg > Contracting > Client, but
that will become a task. So, instead, go to the Edit page of the lead and simply click Convert
to Client on the top right corner.
7.4.2 Clients
The Clients menu focuses on creating and managing clients. It also has two tabs:
Client List
Client Creation
7.4.2.1 Client List
This tab shows a list of all the clients that have been created in the system. Users can view,
edit, and manage client information. This is useful for maintaining a database of active and
past clients.
7.4.2.2 Client
Similar to the Leads tab, this allows users to create a new client profile. When a lead is
converted or a new client comes on board, their details, including contact information and
project specifics, can be recorded here. Alternatively, a lead can be converted to a client
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
simply by going to the Edit page of the lead under the Leads menu and clicking Convert to
Client on the top right corner.
To create a client, follow the below steps:
Step 1: Engg > Contracting > Clients > Client tab > Create Client
Step 2: Once you click on the Client tab, you will be prompted to fill in and select the
necessary details as mentioned below.
Fields
Explanation
Client*
This field captures the name of the client
Company *
This field captures the name of the
company associated with the lead
Address *
This field captures the complete address of
the lead or company, including street name
and number.
Country *
This dropdown field allows users to select
the country where the lead or company is
located.
State *
This dropdown field allows users to select
the state or province within the country
where the client or company is located.
City *
Select the city from the drop-down list
Pin Code *
Enter the pincode
Region*
This field captures the specific region within
the state or country, which can be useful for
regional sales strategies and market
analysis.
Location*
This field captures additional location
details, such as the specific area or locality,
providing more precise geographic
information.
Status
This dropdown field allows users to select
the current status of the lead: Active or
Inactive
Competitor
This field captures the name of any known
competitors vying for the same contract. It
helps in strategic planning and competitive
analysis.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Phone No.
Enter the primary contact phone number of
the lead
Web Site
Enter the website URL of the lead
Client Stage
This dropdown field allows users to select
the current stage of the client in the sales
process, such as 'Prospect', 'Interested',
'Discussion Scheduled', etc. Once the stage
is selected from the dropdown, enter
percentage in the field beside it
Source
This dropdown field allows users to select
the source of the client, such as 'Referral',
'Website', 'Trade Show', 'Cold Call', etc. It
helps in understanding how the lead was
generated.
Industry*
This dropdown field allows users to select
the industry in which the clients company
operates.
Type*
This dropdown field allows users to specify
the type of client, such as whether it's a
new business opportunity, an existing
customer, or a referral.
Owner
This field captures the name of the sales
representative or account manager
responsible for managing the client. It helps
in accountability and tracking sales
activities.
Description
This field allows users to enter any
additional notes or details about the client.
It can include specific requirements,
preferences, or relevant background
information.
Potential Revenue*
This field captures the estimated revenue
that could be generated from this client if it
converts into a client. It is crucial for
forecasting and business planning.
Potential Closure
This field captures the estimated date or
timeframe when the lead is expected to
close, if successful. It helps in planning and
forecasting sales cycles.
Tax ID *
Enter the Tax ID of the client
GSTIN No.
Enter the GSTIN No. of the client
MSME No.
Enter the MSME No. of the client
Logo
This field allows users to upload the
company's logo.
Step 3: Once the above fields are completed, click Create.
7.4.3 Jobs
The Jobs menu handles the specifics of project proposals and estimations. Here's the
process:
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
7.4.3.1 Job List
This tab provides a list of all the jobs that have been created. Users can view and manage
existing jobs, monitor their progress, and access detailed information about each job. This
tab is essential for keeping track of ongoing and completed projects.
7.4.3.2 Job Details
This tab allows users to create a new job. When a lead or client submits a BOQ, the
contractor can initiate a new job here by recording all relevant details.
Once a job is created, it appears in the Jobs List. From there, users can proceed with the
following steps:
To create a job, follow the below steps:
1. Navigate to Engg > Contracting > Jobs > Job Details
2. Once you are on the Job Detail interface, you will be prompted to enter and select
the necessary details
Fields
Explanation
Job Name*
Type*
Choose the type of job from the drop-down
menu
Stage*
Stage refers to the current phase of the job
proposal, like Initial Proposal, Revised
Proposal, or Final Proposal, tracking
proposal progression.
Status
Choose the current condition of the job,
such as Active, On Hold, or Completed, for
monitoring purposes.
Submit By Date
Select a date for submitting the job
proposal to the client
From Date*
Select a date for proposal activities,
marking the beginning of the proposal
process and setting timelines.
Closure On*
Choose a date which will be the actual
conclusion date of the job proposal process
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Probability %
Enter a number expressed as percentage
which will indicate the likelihood of the job
proposal being accepted
Amount*
Enter total value of the job and then select
the currency in which the value is to be
calculated
Bid Bond Value
Enter the security deposit value submitted
with the proposal
Description
Enter detailed information about the job
proposal
Reason Type
Reason
3. Click Submit.
4. Go back to Job List, search for the job using the filter and click on Name. You will be
directed to Job Details page that is bifurcated into Job Detail, Client BOQ, and
Proposal BOQ.
Client BOQ: Lead / Client submits a Bill of Quantities (BOQ) that only includes the quantities
of the required materials and services. This BOQ acts as a preliminary document outlining
what the client needs for their project.
Proposal BOQ Creation: Upon receiving the client's BOQ, the contractor prepares a
proposal BOQ to send back to the client. This involves creating an estimation that includes
detailed costs for materials, labor, and assets. The proposal BOQ provides a comprehensive
and professional response to the client's initial request, showcasing the contractor's ability to
meet their needs within a specified budget.
Note: Client BOQ will have only quantity of materials. This means the contractor will have to
prepare a proposal BOQ with an estimation now which will have both quantity and cost.
Estimation: During the creation of a proposal BOQ, the contractor will create an estimation
that covers the costs for materials, labour, and assets. This detailed estimation is crucial for
providing an accurate and competitive proposal to the client.
To create an estimation, follow the below steps:
On the Proposal BOQ page, scroll to the bottom of the page and click Create Estimation.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Once you are on the estimation creation page, enter an estimation name and select validity
dates from the calendars, the fill in BOQ details across Material, Labour and Asset
categories.
7.4.4 Contacts
Contacts provides a centralized location for managing all contact information related to
contracting pre-sales activities. This includes recording details of potential clients, existing
clients, and other key contacts necessary for smooth relationship management.
7.4.4.1 Contact List
All the contacts that are created in Contacts will appear in Contact List. Users can easily
search for a contact by selecting a contact type and entering name on the filter.
7.4.4.2 Contacts
To create contacts, follow the below steps
1. Navigate to Engg > Contracting > Contacts > Contacts > Create Contact
2. Once you are on the Create Contact page, you will be prompted to fill in and select
the necessary details such as name, contact details, address, etc.
3. Click Create
7.4.5 Bank Credit
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Bank Credit menu is used to manage financial transactions related to credit from banks.
Contractors can initiate applications for credit facilities needed to finance projects. This might
include loans or lines of credit.
To create Bank Credit in the In4Suite application, follow the below steps:
1. Navigate to Engg > Contracting > Bank Credit > Click Bank Credit
2. Once you click Bank Credit, you will be prompted to enter and select the necessary
details such as Company, Bank Name, Credit Amount, and validity dates.
7.4.6 Bond Request
The Bond Request menu is critical for managing performance and payment bonds, which
are common in construction projects to ensure contractual obligations are met.
There are 3 types of bonds that can be created in the In4Suite application:
1. Performance Bond
2. Bid Bond
3. Custom Bond
To create a bond request, follow the below steps:
1. Navigate to Engg > Contracting > Bond Request > Click Create Bond Request
2. Once you click on Bond Request, you will be prompted to enter and select the
necessary details.
Fields
Explanation
Client Name *
This field captures the name of the client
(owner or developer) for whom the bond is
being requested. It ensures that the bond is
correctly associated with the relevant client.
Bond Type *
This dropdown field allows users to select
the type of bond being requested. Bond
types include Performance Bond, Custom
Bond, and Bid Bond. Each type of bond
serves a specific purpose and provides
different assurances.
Valid From Date *
Select the starting date from which the
bond is valid
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Bond Value *
Enter the total value of the bond. It
represents the maximum amount that the
surety company is liable to pay in case of a
claim against the bond.
Conversion Rate
This field captures the conversion rate if the
bond value needs to be converted from one
currency to another.
Bond Number *
Enter a unique number for the bond
Job *
This field links the bond to a specific job or
project. It helps in associating the bond with
the correct project, ensuring that all bonds
are tracked and managed in relation to their
respective jobs.
Bank Name
Select the name of the bank involved in
issuing or underwriting the bond, from the
drop-down list
Valid To Date *
Enter the date until which the bond remains
valid
Base Value
The base amount of the bond (before any
additional costs or conversion rates are
applied) is automatically displayed
Secondary Bank
his field captures the name of an additional
or secondary bank involved in the bond
transaction, if applicable
Grid
Charges
This field captures any additional charges or fees associated with the bond. These may include
administrative fees, processing charges, or any other costs incurred during the issuance of the bond.
Payment Schedule
This field captures the schedule for making payments related to the bond. It includes details on
payment amounts, due dates, charges, etc.
3. Click Create
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
7.4.7 Bond Payment
Bond payment refers to the financial transaction where the contractor pays premiums to the
surety bank for issuing the bond. This payment is necessary for the bond to remain active
and valid throughout the project duration.
To create a Bond Payment, follow the below steps:
1. Navigate to Engg > Contracting > Bond Payment > Bond Payment List
2. Once you click Create Bond Payment, you will be prompted to enter and select the
necessary details such as Bank Name, Job Name, Bond No, Payment Schedule,
Amount, etc.
7.5 Site-Activity
7.5.1 Abstracts
The Abstract feature enables site engineers and managers to meticulously track work
progress. By inputting the quantity of completed tasks, users ensure precise payment
calculations. This feature streamlines the payment verification process by automatically
fetching rates from associated work orders, eliminating manual entry errors.
To create an abstract, follow the below steps:
3. Navigate to Engg > Site-Activity > Abstracts > Click Create Abstract
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
4. After clicking on the Create Abstract button, you will be prompted to fill in and select
the necessary details for the abstract.
Field
Explanation
Project
Choose a project from the drop-down
menu.
Sub Project
Choose a sub project from the drop-down
menu.
Abstract Date
Choose a date from the calendar when
work progress is summarized or abstracted
for reporting purposes.
Ref/Bill No.
Enter a unique reference or billing number
associated with financial transactions or
agreements.
Work Category
Choose a work category from the drop-
down list.
Work Sub Category
Choose a sub category from the drop-down
list.
Work Order *
Choose a work order from the list. A work
order is a formal agreement between a
contractor and a developer specifying the
scope of work, rates, and terms of payment
for construction activities.
5. Upload any document related to the abstract under Documents.
Follow the below steps to upload a document:
I. Click Add New
II. Choose a file and click Update
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
6. Choose a BOQ using the BOQ Filter.
To do so, select a work category, sub work category, and abstract from the drop-down
menus and click Go. Choose and checkmark a BOQ(s) and click Next.
7. In the BOQ grid, you will enter either quantity of work completed under This Bill Qty,
or enter a percentage. For either way, the system calculates the bill amount by taking
rate automatically from the work order. You may also enter a work completed date
and add remarks, if any.
8. Click Finish once you are done.
MBook
7.5.2 MBook
The Mbook, or Measurement Book, meticulously documents construction project progress
by recording measurements like length, breadth, and height. It provides a cumulative record
of work completed over time, fostering transparency and accountability.
Whether expressed as a percentage of completion or detailed dimensions, the Mbook
ensures accuracy in measurement recording, which is important for effective project
management and billing. Maintained by site engineers or project overseers, this document
serves as a detailed reference, which helps make informed decision and monitor
construction activities from start to completion.
Pre-requisite:
Display Number Format: Allow users to customize how the display format is shown.
To configure display number, follow the below steps:
1. Navigate to Home > Admin > Configure Display No. > Click Add New.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
2. Fill in and select the necessary details
Fields
Explanation
Module
Choose the module for which the display
number configuration is being set.
Entity Type
Choose the category of data for which the
display number configuration is being
applied.
Prefix *
By default, it takes the prefix MBo- but you
can set any prefix as desired.
Display Parameter
Set a parameter and parameter type. To set
a display parameter, follow the below steps:
1. Click Add Row under Display
Parameter
2. Choose a parameter from Parameter
3. Choose a type of parameter from
Parameter Type
Sequence Generates on *
Choose whether you want to generate the
sequence number on Company, Project or
Sub Project from the drop-down list
Sequence Starts From
By default, it begins from 1
2. Click Submit.
Configure Workflow: Enable administrators to define role-based workflows within the
Measurement Book. This ensures controlled access and transparency in the approval.
process.
To configure workflow, follow the below steps:
1. Navigate to Home > Admin > Configure Workflow > Select Engineering module
from the Module drop-down menu at the top > click Mbook
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
2. Click Add New
3. Select a Status, To Status and From Status
4. Click Update
Create MBook
To create an MBook, follow the below steps:
1. Navigate to Engg > Site-Activity > MBook > Click Create MBook
2. After clicking on the Create MBook button, you will be prompted to fill in and select
the necessary details for the indent.
Fields
Explanation
Project *
Choose a project from the drop-down list
Sub Project *
Choose a sub project from the drop-down
list
Work Category
Work Sub Category
Work Order *
Contractor firm
MBook Date
Current MBook Quantity
(Not Cumulative Quantity)
3. Upload any document related to the abstract under Documents.
Follow the below steps to upload a document:
Click Add New
Choose a file and click Update
4. Choose a BOQ and click Next
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
5. Once you click Next, the measurement fields get added to the BOQ grid, allowing
you to create a measurement book.
6. Measure the work completed using 3-dimention (Length, Breadth, and, Height) and
enter the details in the respective fields within the grid.
7. Click Finish once completed
8. Now, go to the MBook List and utilize the filter to locate the abstract. Select the
Abstract, proceed to its status, and update it to Submitted. The MBook document
will then be forwarded to the designated authority responsible for approving requests,
as per the approval hierarchy.
7.5.3 MBook Abstracts
9. Upon approval, navigate to Engg > Site-Activity > MBook Abstracts > MBook
Abstract List and use the filter to find the MBook. Click Go.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
10. Select a date from the calendar, choose the abstract, and click Create Abstract.
WO Certificate (Payment Certificate)
the
DPR
7.5.4 Labour
Labour details the number of workers on-site, their tasks, hours worked, and productivity
levels. This helps in tracking labour costs and efficiency.
To create DPR Labour, follow the below steps:
1. Navigate to Engg > Site-Activity > DPR > Labour > DPR Labour List > Click Create
DPR Labour
2. Once you click on Create DPR Labour, you will be prompted to choose project, sub
project and date.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
3. Click Add Labour, and fill in the details, including category, sub category, labour,
quantity and remarks.
4. Click Create.
7.5.5 Equipment
Equipment logs the equipment used on-site, including operating hours, maintenance
records, and performance metrics. This ensures optimal use and timely maintenance of
machinery.
To create a log for the equipment used on site, follow the below steps:
1. Navigate to Engg > Site-Activity > DPR > Equipment > Equipment List > Click Create
Equipment
2. Once you click on Create Equipment, you will be prompted to choose project, sub
project and date.
3. Click Add Assets, and fill in the details, including category, sub category, asset,
quantity and remarks.
4. Click Create.
7.5.6 Critical Point
This feature helps create and track critical points, compliance with safety protocols and
ensure that those safety standards are maintained.
1. Navigate to Engg > Site-Activity > DPR > Critical Point > Critical Point & Safety At
Site
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
2. Click Add New. A new window will open, then select from the Project and Type:
Critical Point OR Safety At Site, add a description and choose from the dates.
3. Click Create.
7.5.7 Work Execution
Work Execution is designed to document and track the daily execution of work on
construction projects. This feature helps ensure that project managers and team members
can efficiently monitor and report the progress of ongoing tasks.
To create work execution record, follow the below steps:
1. Navigate to Engg > Site-Activity > DPR > Work Execution
2. When you land on Work Execution Details, click Add Work Execution
3. Select a Project, Sub Project from the drop-down list, then choose a date from the
calendar and click Go.
4. Update the table with the quantity of work that is completed.
5. Finally click Create.
7.5.8 Cube Results
Cube Results refers to the results of concrete cube tests conducted on-site / in the lab.
These tests are crucial for quality control, ensuring that the concrete used meets the
required strength and durability standards.
To add Cube Results, follow the below steps:
1. Navigate to Engg > Site-Activity > DPR > Cube Results > Cube Results
2. Click Add Cube Result.
3. Once you click on Add Cube Result, a new window will open. Fill in and select the
details as given in the table below.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Field
Explanation
Project *
Choose a project from the drop-down list
Location
Enter the location within the project site
where the concrete sample was taken or
where the test is being conducted
ID Mark
Refers to the mark that will be assigned to
each concrete cube sample. It helps in
tracking and referencing specific samples
throughout the testing process.
Grade
This field specifies the grade of the
concrete being tested. Concrete grades are
determined by the mix design and are
indicative of the concrete's strength and
quality.
Date of Casting
This field records the date on which the
concrete sample was cast.
Date of Testing
This field records the date on which the
concrete cube test is performed.
C/s(N/mm2)
This field represents the compressive
strength of the concrete sample in Newtons
per square millimeter (N/mm²). It is the
primary measurement obtained from the
cube test, indicating how much load the
concrete can withstand before failing.
Average Nmm2
This field shows the average compressive
strength calculated from multiple samples
or tests. Averaging results helps in
obtaining a more reliable measure of the
concrete's overall strength.
Remarks *
Add remarks, if any
4. Click Create.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
7.6 Billing
7.6.1 Work Order
This menu enables users to generate bills / invoices against work orders. It streamlines the
process by allowing for bills/invoices creation based on various scenarios, such as
completed work orders. Additionally, it helps track the status of work orders from start to
finish, providing users with visibility into project progress and billing milestones.
To create a work order certificate or an invoice against a work order, follow the below steps:
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Billing > Work Order > Work Order Certificate List > Click Create
WO Certificate.
Step 2: After clicking on the Create WO Certificate button, you will be prompted to fill in and
select the necessary details for the certificate.
Fields
Explanation
Project *
Select a project from the list
Sub Project
Select a sub project from the list
Certifying Company
Certifying company is automatically shown
when project and sub project are selected
Work Order No. *
Click on Select located beside the field,
then choose a work order using the search
filter. Once you've found the right one,
select it and click Accept Selected.
Work Category
Classification of the type of work being
undertaken within the project. This field is
automatically shown when work order is
selected
SAC/HSN Codes
Enter SAC (Service Accounting Code) OR
HSN (Harmonized System of
Nomenclature) codes for services provided
Work Description
Write description of the work being billed
Contractor/Consultant Name
Name of the contractor or consultant
performing the work is automatically shown
from the work order
PAN No. / Tax ID
PAN No. / Tax ID is automatically shown
from the work order
GSTIN No.
GSTIN No. is automatically shown from the
work order
Type of Certificate *
Select the type of certificate issued: EMD,
Final, Interim, Retention, Running, OR
SalesTax
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
EMD: EMD, or Earnest Money Deposit,
represents a contractor's bank deposit
made as a security collateral
Final: To pay the balance payment due to
the contractor as a final payment
Interim: To make an on-demand payment
requested by contractors during the work
order
Retention: Any amount withheld from
payments as security against defects or
contractual non-compliance is retention.
Running: To make payment as work
progresses in accordance with the
contractual agreement.
SalesTax: To pay sales tax
Invoice Amount
Specify an invoice amount for the services
rendered by a contractor / consultant within
the project. It is the agreed-upon price to be
paid by the contractor / consultant.
Bill/Invoice No. *
Enter a unique number for the bill/invoice
Is E-Invoice
Select Yes or No depending on whether to
send an e-copy of the invoice
Bill/Invoice Date *
Select a date of the bill/invoice issuance
from the calendar
Abstract Date *
Select a date of abstract preparation from
the calendar
Work Order Cost
Total cost of the work order is automatically
shown from the work order
Work Order Discount
Any discount on the work order given by a
contractor / consultant is shown here
Net Work Order Value
Net Work Order Value = Work Order Cost -
Work Order Discount
Amount Certified Till Date (Pre Discount)
The total amount certified before any
discounts applied till date. This field is
automatically populated from the work
order.
Discount Amount Till Date
Total discount amount applied till date. This
field is automatically populated from the
work order.
Amount Certified Till Date (Post Discount)
Total amount certified after discounts
applied till date. This field is automatically
populated from the work order.
Approved Abstract Amount
Amount approved as per the abstract. This
field is automatically populated from the
work order.
Approved Work Order Amount
Amount approved as per the work order.
This field is automatically populated from
the work order.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Available Balance (As on Certificate date)
Available balance as of the certificate date.
This field is automatically populated from
the work order.
Actual Balance (As on Current date)
Actual balance as of the current date. This
field is automatically populated from the
work order.
Retention Payment Details
Retention payment involves withholding a
portion of the work order value by the
developer. On the In4Suite app, users can
track and calculate the retention amount,
apply it to invoices, and monitor release
conditions
EMD Amount Applicable
Whether a specified amount to be
deposited as a bank guarantee with a bank
is applicable.
EMD Paid
If applicable, the EMD amount paid by a
contractor/consultant is automatically
shown here. This field is automatically
populated from the work order.
EMD Pending
In case, part EMD amount is deposited with
a bank as a bank guarantee, the balance
amount will be automatically shown here.
Certified Amount (Pre discount)
Enter the total amount that you want to
certify before any discount
Less (Discount Type)
Select a discount type by clicking on one of
the three radio buttons: Not Applicable,
Fixed Amount or Percentage.
Less (Discount Percentage)
Enter the discount percentage in this field If
you choose percentage under Discount
Type
Less (Discount Amount)
The discount amount is automatically
calculated and shown here
Sub total (Post discount)
The sub total amount after the discount is
deducted from the work order cost is
automatically calculated and shown in this
field.
Base Value
Tax Additions
Tax additions generated during work order
creation will be automatically displayed in
this field.
Total Tax Additions
The application calculates the total tax
additions from the work order and displays
the sum total of tax additions in this field.
Total Net Tax Amount
The net amount of taxes payable after
accounting for any deductions, exemptions,
or adjustments.
Material Escalation
Any debitable materials in the work order
will be automatically shown in this field
Taxes on Escalation
Any taxes against material escalation are
shown in this field
Gross Bill Amount
Total amount specified in the invoice before
any adjustments or deductions. It
represents the initial financial liability for
services rendered.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Adjustments
Changes made to the gross bill amount to
account for discrepancies, errors, or
negotiated concessions.
Adjustment Amount
Total value of adjustments made to the
gross bill amount. It reflects corrections or
concessions granted to parties involved.
Net Certified Amount
Final certified amount after adjustments or
deductions. It is the actual liability for
completed work or services as validated
and approved for payment.
Tax Deduction
Amount deducted at source for tax
purposes.
Total Net Tax Deductions
Cumulative sum of all tax deductions made
from certified amounts.
Total Amount
Final aggregate sum payable after
accounting for all adjustments, deductions,
and taxes
Retention
Any amount withheld from payments as
security against defects or contractual non-
compliance is retention.
Retention Amount
Total sum withheld as retention from
payments, reflecting the financial security or
assurance required to address potential
issues or risks during project execution or
contractual performance.
Other Deductions
Additional deductions not accounted for
elsewhere. It reflects miscellaneous
adjustments or charges applicable to
financial transactions and contractual
agreements.
Amount Payable
Final sum payable after accounting for all
deductions, adjustments, and taxes. It
represents the total liability to be settled as
per contractual agreements and regulatory
requirements.
Round Off Difference Amount
Monetary discrepancy resulting from
rounding off calculations in financial
transactions. It reflects minor variations
between calculated and actual amounts,
and may require reconciliation for accuracy
and completeness.
Documents
Attach a list of documents supporting
financial transactions or contractual
agreements. To attach a document(s), click
Add New, choose a file and click Update.
Payment Mode
Select a method or channel for processing
payments, such as cheque, bank transfer,
or electronic funds transfer.
Payment Due Date *
Select a date from the calendar which will
be a deadline for settling payments as per
contractual terms or agreements.
Expected Payment Date
Select a date from the calendar which will
be an anticipated date for payment
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
processing or disbursement based on
contractual terms or agreements.
Favouring
Entity or recipient to whom payments are
directed or made.
Remarks
Additional comments, notes, or instructions
related to financial transactions or
contractual agreements.
Grid
Misc. Expenses
This grid records incidental costs not covered under specific categories. It tracks
miscellaneous expenditures like temporary labour, small equipment purchases, or minor
repairs.
Advances
The Advances grid displays details of the upfront payments made to a contractor / consultant
for materials, services, or mobilization.
Debit Note
This grid displays details about discrepancies in invoiced amounts that are corrected by
issuing debate notes.
Material Adjustment
This grid meticulously tracks the issuance and recovery of materials, particularly when
excess quantities are issued or when materials are returned. It ensures precise management
of material inventory by accounting for variations in usage, waste, or returns.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Debit to Workorder
This grid displays details of the total amount to be debited to a work order. To add a debit to
workorder, click Add Work Order, choose a work order using the filter, and click Accept
Selected.
Step 3: Click Create.
7.6.2 Misc. Expenses
The Misc. Expenses, or Miscellaneous Expenses, allows users to manage various incidental
costs associated with their projects. They can seamlessly create miscellaneous expenses by
adding miscellaneous contractors and allocating expenses to them. This helps streamline
the tracking and organization of diverse expenditures such as maintenance, repairs, or ad-
hoc services.
To create Misc. Expenses, follow the below steps:
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Billing > Misc. Expenses > Misc. Expenses List > Click Create
Misc. Expenses
Step 2: Once you have clicked Create Misc. Expenses, you will be prompted to fill in and
select the necessary details:
View Details
Fields
Explanation
Project*
Select a project from the drop-down menu
Sub Project*
Select a sub project from the drop-down
menu
Certifying Company
Misc. Contractor*
Select a Misc. Contractor from the drop-
down list. A miscellaneous contractor
provides specialized services or performs
specific tasks within the project that do not
fall under the primary contractor's scope,
often hired for niche expertise or
supplementary work.
Note: Misc. Contractor data comes from
Engg > Master > Contractor List
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
SAC/HSN Codes
Enter SAC (Service Accounting Code) OR
HSN (Harmonized System of
Nomenclature) codes for services provided
Expense Description*
Give a detailed explanation or breakdown
of costs, expenditures, or financial outlays
incurred within the project.
Bill/Invoice No. *
Enter a unique number for the bill/invoice
Is E-Invoice
Select Yes or No depending on whether to
send an e-copy of the invoice
Bill/Invoice Date*
Select a date of the bill/invoice issuance
from the calendar
Contractor Name
Contractor name is automatically shown
from Misc. Contractor
PAN No. / Tax ID
PAN No. / Tax ID is automatically shown
State
This field is automatically shown
GSTIN No.
GSTIN No. is automatically shown
Certified Amount*
Enter a certified amount. A certified amount
is an approved amount of payment certified
by relevant authorities or project managers
based on submitted documentation and
progress assessment.
Certificate Base Amount
This field which is shown automatically, is a
reference amount used as the basis for
calculating certified amounts, typically
reflecting contractual terms, progress
milestones, or agreed-upon valuation
methodologies for payments.
Work Order Debit Details
Detailed information regarding debit
transactions or adjustments made against
the work order.
You can also allocate debit amount for each
Work Category/Sub Work Category by
navigating to Work Category Budget Debit
on the same page.
Tax Addition
Tax added to project payments or
transactions as per tax regulations,
contractual agreements, or statutory
requirements.
To create a Tax Addition, click Add New,
then select the Tax Category, Tax, Tax
Type, and Tax Amount. Percentage is
automatically calculated.
Total Tax Addition
The aggregate sum of all tax additions is
automatically shown in this field.
Gross Value
Tax Deduction
Amount deducted or withheld from project
payments or transactions as per tax
regulations, contractual agreements, or
statutory requirements.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
To create a Tax Deduction, click Add New,
then select the Tax Category, Tax, and Tax
Amount.
Total Tax Deduction
The cumulative sum of all tax deductions is
shown in this field
Amount Payable
The total sum owed or payable to the
contractor is automatically shown in this
field
Round Off Difference Amount
The minor discrepancy or variance between
calculated amounts and rounded figures,
adjusted to reconcile discrepancies in
payment amounts. This field is
automatically shown.
Payment Mode
Select a method or channel for processing
payments, such as cheque, bank transfer,
or electronic funds transfer.
Favouring*
Entity or recipient to whom payments are
directed or made.
Payment Due Date*
Select a date from the calendar which will
be a deadline for settling payments as per
contractual terms or agreements.
Remarks
Add remarks, if any
Grid
Work Order Debit Details.
This field displays details of the total debit amount to a work order. To add work order debit
details, click Add Work Order under Work Order Debit Details, click Select, choose a work
order using the filter, and add a debit amount.
Work Category Budget Debit
You can allocate debit amount for each Work Category/Sub Work Category in the Work
Category Budget Debit grid.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Documents
Attach a document(s) supporting miscellaneous expenses. To attach a document(s), click
Add New, choose a file and click Update.
Step 3: Click Create.
7.6.3 Advance
A work order advance refers to a financial provision made to cover expenses before the
actual completion of work outlined in a work order within a construction project. It is a
prepayment or allocation of funds intended to ensure smooth project execution by providing
necessary resources, materials, or financial support to contractors, subcontractors, or
suppliers.
Pre-requisite to create an advance
Display Number Format: Allow users to customize how the display format is shown.
To configure display number, follow the below steps:
1. Navigate to Home > Admin > Configure Display No. > Click Add New.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
2. Once you click on Add New, you will be prompted to fill in and select the necessary
details.
Fields
Explanation
Module
Choose the module for which the display
number configuration is being set.
Entity Type
Choose the category of data for which the
display number configuration is being
applied.
Prefix *
By default, it takes the prefix MBo- but you
can set any prefix as desired.
Display Parameter
Set a parameter and parameter type. To set
a display parameter, follow the below steps:
1. Click Add Row under Display
Parameter
2. Choose a parameter from Parameter
3. Choose a type of parameter from
Parameter Type
Sequence Generates on *
Choose whether you want to generate the
sequence number on Company, Project or
Sub Project from the drop-down list
Sequence Starts From
By default, it begins from 1
3. Click Submit.
Create Advance
To create and process an advance to a contractor, follow the below steps
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Billing > Advance > Click Create Advance
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Step 2: Once you click on Create Advance, you will be prompted to fill in and select the
necessary details
Field
Explanation
Project *
Select the overarching project under which
the work order is issued.
Sub Project
Select a sub project from the drop-down
list.
Certifying Company
Select the company's name associated with
the work order from the drop-down list.
Work Order No.*
Click on Select located beside the field,
then choose a work order using the search
filter. Once you've found the right one,
select it and click Accept Selected.
Work Order Cost
This field is automatically populated from
the work order.
Work Order Discount
This field is automatically populated from
the work order.
Work Order Retention
This field is automatically populated from
the work order.
Net Work Order Value
This field is automatically populated from
the work order.
Initial Approved WO Gross Value
This field is automatically populated from
the work order.
SAC/HSN Codes
Enter SAC (Service Accounting Code) OR
HSN (Harmonized System of
Nomenclature) codes for services provided
Work Description
Enter a brief description of the work
specified in the work order.
Bill/Invoice No.
Enter a unique identifier for the bill to be
created for payment to contractor.
Type of Advance*
Choose the type of advance: Adhoc,
Material, Materials Bought, OR Mobilization
Adhoc: Choose this option when you need
to make unplanned or irregular advance
payment, not tied to specific materials or
mobilization.
Material: Choose this option when you
need to advance payment for a contractor
to purchase construction materials.
Materials Bought: Choose this option
when you need to make advance payment
after the materials have been procured. In
other words, it is a reimbursement for
already purchased materials.
Mobilization: Choose this option when you
need to make payment to a contractor for
covering initial setup and mobilization costs.
Bill/Invoice Date*
Select a bill/invoice date from the calendar
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Contractor Name
Contractor name is automatically displayed
from the work order
PAN No. / Tax Id
PAN No. / Tax ID is automatically shown
GSTIN
PAN No. / Tax ID is automatically shown
Total WO Certified Amount
This field, being the total amount certified
as completed in the work order, is
automatically shown
Advance Certified Amount Till Date
This field shows the total advance that has
been certified against a work order till date
Certified Amount*
Enter a certified amount. A certified amount
is an approved amount of payment certified
by relevant authorities or project managers
based on submitted documentation and
progress assessment.
Base Value
The basic cost of services provided, before
any taxes or deductions.
Tax Additions
Tax additions generated during work order
creation will be automatically displayed in
this field.
Total Tax Additions
The aggregate sum of all tax additions is
automatically shown in this field.
Gross Bill Amount
Total amount specified before any
adjustments or deductions. It represents the
initial financial liability for services rendered.
Tax Deduction
Amount deducted at source for tax
purposes.
Total Tax Deductions
The cumulative sum of all tax deductions is
shown in this field
Favouring*
Entity or recipient to whom payments are
directed or made.
Amount Payable
The total amount owed for the work
performed, after deductions and
adjustments. The amount payable is
automatically calculated.
Round Off Difference Amount
The minor discrepancy or variance between
calculated amounts and rounded figures,
adjusted to reconcile discrepancies in
payment amounts. This field is
automatically shown.
Payment Mode
Select a method or channel for processing
payments, such as cheque, bank transfer,
or electronic funds transfer.
Payment Due Date*
Select a date from the calendar as the
deadline by which the payment must be
made.
Remarks
Add remarks, if any
Submission Date
This is the date on which the advance
request will be submitted.
BG Details
Add Bank Guarantee details, if applicable,
by clicking Add New under BG Details.
Then, select the necessary details such as
bank name, BG date, BG number, BG
Amount, BG expiry date.
Documents
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Step 3: Click Create
7.6.4 Debit Note
Debit Note is issued to a contractor / consultant when goods are returned or services are
deemed unsatisfactory, necessitating a reduction in the amount payable. This note adjusts
the contractor / consultant’s account balance, reflecting the reduction in the total payable
amount.
To create a debit note, follow the below steps:
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Billing > Debit Note > Debit Note List > Click Create Debit Note
Step 2: Once you click Create Debit Note, you will be prompted to fill or select the
necessary details.
View Details
Fields
Explanation
Project*
Select a project from the drop-down menu
Sub Project
Select a sub project from the drop-down
menu
Certifying Company
Work Order*
Click Select located beside the Work Order
field. This action will prompt a new window
to open where you can search for a work
order using the filter provided at the top.
Once you have selected the work order,
click Accept Selected.
Firm
SAC/HSN Code
Enter SAC (Service Accounting Code) OR
HSN (Harmonized System of
Nomenclature) codes for services provided
GSTIN No.
GSTIN No. is automatically shown from the
work order
Debit Note Type*
Select the debit type: Direct OR Advance
Direct: refers to a debit made directly
against a specific transaction or invoice
Advance: refers to a debit made against
any advance payment that is to be made to
a contractor / consultant
Reason Type
Select a reason for the debit note from the
drop-down menu
Invoice No
Give a unique identifier to the invoice
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Debit Note Date*
Select a date of the debit note issuance
from the calendar
Debit Note Amount*
This field denotes the total amount being
debited through the debit note.
Reference No.
If there is any reference number associated
with the transaction, such as a previous
debit note number or any other document
reference, it is recorded here
Reference Date
The date of the reference document or
transaction is captured in this field.
Base Value
The base value refers to the initial value
before any tax or additional charges are
added.
Tax Additions
Tax additions generated during work order
creation will be automatically displayed in
this field.
Total Tax Additions
The aggregate sum of all tax additions is
automatically shown in this field.
Gross Bill Amount
Total amount specified before any
adjustments or deductions. It represents the
initial financial liability for services rendered.
Remarks
Add remarks, if any
Grid
Documents
Add any documents related to the debit note. To add a document, click Add New under
Documents, choose a file and click Update.
Step 3: Click Update.
7.6.5 Debit Note Receipt
Debit Note Receipt is used to acknowledge the receipt of a Debit Note by the contractor /
consultant. It serves as a record that the debit note has been received and accepted by the
contractor / consultant’s accounts department. Users can input essential details such as the
amount received, the date of receipt, and relevant contractor information. This ensures that
all pertinent information regarding the receipt is accurately captured and stored within the
system.
To create a Debit Note Receipt, follow the below steps:
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Billing > Debit Note Receipt
Step 2: On the upper right corner, click on Create Debit Note Receipt
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Field
Explanation
Certifying Company*
Select the company's name from the drop-
down list.
Project*
Select the project from the drop-down list
Sub Project
Select the sub project from the drop-down
list.
Contractor*
Select the contractor specified in the
project.
Note: Contractor master data comes from
Engg > Masters > Contractor > Contractor
List
Receipt Date*
Select the date on which the payment or
receipt of services occurred.
Receipt Amount*
Enter the total amount received for the
services provided.
Payment Mode*
The method of payment used for the
transaction, such as cash, cheque, bank
transfer, credit card, etc.
Remarks
Add remarks, if any
Grid
Debit Note Details
Step 3: Click Create
7.6.6 Labour Payment
The Labour Payment functionality enables users to manage payments to laborers. There are
two primary methods for calculating these payments: Daily Progress Report method and the
Abstract Labour Payment method.
To create a Labour Payment, follow the below steps:
Navigate to Engg > Billing > Labour Payment > Labour Payment List > Click Create Labour
Payment
Once you click on Create Labour Payment, you will be prompted to fill in and select
necessary details:
Fields
Explanation
Project *
Select a project from the drop-down menu
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Sub Project
Select a sub project from the drop-down
menu
Paying Company
Select the entity that will disburse labour
payments. A paying company typically is
the real estate developer or contracting firm
that oversees the project.
Type of Payment *
Select from the type of payment: DPR
Labour Payment OR Abstract Labour
Payment
DPR Labour Payment: In this method,
labour payments are calculated based on
the daily progress of construction work.
Abstract Labour Payment: In this method,
payments are calculated based on the
completion of specific milestones or stages
of the construction project.
Note: If you select Abstract Labour
Payment, you need to select a work order
and an abstract date because work
milestones are calculated from a work
order.
Work Order No. *
Click Select located beside the Work Order
No. field. This action will prompt a new
window to open where you can search for a
work order using the filter provided at the
top. Once you have selected the work
order, click Accept Selected.
Bill/Invoice No.
Enter a unique number for the bill to be
created for payment to labourers.
Bill/Invoice Date *
Select a date of the bill/invoice issuance
from the calendar
Abstract Date *
Select a date of abstract preparation from
the calendar
DPR Date *
Select a date of the daily progress report
submission from the calendar that indicates
the progress of construction work and
serving as a basis for calculating daily labor
payments.
Certified Amount
Enter a certified amount. A certified amount
is an approved amount of payment certified
by relevant authorities or project managers
based on submitted documentation and
progress assessment.
Base Value
The base value refers to the initial value
before any tax or additional charges are
added.
Tax Additions
This field is used to record taxes that will be
added to the base value of labor payment.
It reflects statutory obligations or regulatory
requirements to be met when it comes to
construction activities.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
To create Tax Additions, click on Add New
and select Tax Category, Tax, Tax Type,
and Tax Amount.
Total Tax Additions
This field is the cumulative sum of all tax
additions applied to the base value of labor
payment.
Gross Bill Amount
The total amount of the bill before any
deductions or adjustments. It consists of the
base value and tax additions.
Tax Deduction
The portion of payment withheld as taxes,
deducted from the gross bill amount in
compliance with tax regulations and
withholding requirements.
To create Tax Deductions, click Add New,
and then select Tax Category, Tax, and
add remarks, if any.
Total Net Tax Deductions
The aggregate sum of tax deductions
subtracted from the gross bill amount.
Other Deductions
Additional deductions beyond taxes, such
as penalties, fines, or contractual
obligations.
Advance Recovery
Advance Recovery is automatically
populated. This field displays details of
advances that were previously disbursed to
laborers.
Amount Payable
The final sum payable to laborers after
accounting for all deductions, adjustments,
and recoveries. It represents the net
payment for completed work.
Round Off Difference Amount
Any differences between the calculated
amount payable and the rounded-off value
that typically results from rounding
adjustments.
Documents
Add any documents related to Labour
Payments. To add documents, click on Add
New, choose a file and then click Update.
Payment Mode
The method of payment used for the
transaction, such as cash, cheque, bank
transfer, credit card, etc.
Payment Due Date *
Select a date from the calendar as the
deadline by which the payment must be
made.
Expected Payment Date
The anticipated date when labor payments
are expected to be disbursed, based on
project timelines, payment processing
procedures, and contractual agreements.
Favouring
Entity or recipient to whom payments are
directed or made.
Remarks
Add remarks, if any
Advance Recovery Details
Add details regarding the recovery of
advances disbursed to laborers, including
dates, amounts, and reasons for recovery.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Contracting
The Billing feature for contracting orders is designed to streamline the invoicing process for
contractors collecting payments from clients. This feature includes functionality for both
standard invoices and advance invoices.
7.6.7 Invoice
This section allows users to create and manage standard invoices with ease.
To create an invoice, follow the below steps:
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Billing > Contracting > Invoice > Click Create Invoice under
Invoice tab
Step 2: Once you click Create Invoice under the Invoice tab, you will be prompted to fill in
and select necessary details.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Fields
Explanation
Project*
Select a project from the drop-down list
Sub Project
Select a sub-project from the drop-down list
Certifying Company
Choose the company under whose
umbrella comes the project / sub project
Invoice To (Client Name)
The name of the client to whom the invoice
is being sent is shown automatically
Contracting Order*
Click Select beside the field and select the
contracting order
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Conversion Rate*
This required field specifies the conversion
rate if the billing involves multiple
currencies.
Type Of Invoice*
Select the type of invoice: Interim, Running,
Final or Retention
Interim: To make an on-demand payment
requested by contractors during the work
order
Running: To make payment as work
progresses in accordance with the
contractual agreement.
Final: To pay the balance payment due to
the contractor as a final payment
Retention: Any amount withheld from
payments as security against defects or
contractual non-compliance is retention.
Invoice Date*
Enter the date of the invoice
Invoice Ref. No.
Enter a reference number for the invoice
Client Details:
The client details such as address, mobile number, email, etc., are automatically fetched
from Engg > Masters > Contracting Client List.
Revenue Details:
Fields
Explanation
Revenue Value
This field displays the gross revenue
amount before any discounts or deductions.
It represents the total amount earned from
the project or contract before adjustments
are made.
Revenue Discount Amount
This field shows the total amount of
discounts applied to the revenue value. It
accounts for any agreed-upon reductions in
the billing amount, such as early payment
discounts or volume discounts.
Revenue Amount
This field indicates the revenue amount
after applying any discounts but before
other deductions like taxes. It reflects the
adjusted revenue that will be subjected to
further calculations.
Round Off Difference Amount
This field displays any rounding
adjustments made to the final billing
amount.
Tax Deduction
This field lists the specific tax amounts
deducted from the revenue. It includes
various types of taxes applicable to the
invoice.
Total Tax Deductions
This field shows the cumulative total of all
tax deductions applied to the revenue
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
amount. It represents the sum of individual
tax amounts listed under the Tax Deduction
field.
Net Amount Receivable
This field displays the final amount
receivable after all deductions (discounts,
tax deductions, and rounding differences)
have been applied to the revenue. It
represents the net amount that the
contractor expects to receive from the
client.
Due Date*
Select the date from the calendar by which
the invoice amount is due
Remarks
Add remarks, if any
Documents
Add any documents relevant to the invoice. These documents can include project contracts,
work completion certificates, tax forms, or any other supporting documentation necessary for
validation and record-keeping.
To add a document, click Add New, choose a file and click Update.
Step 3: Click Create.
7.6.8 Advance
This section enables users to create and manage advances to be paid to contractors or
received from clients. Contractors may require advances for various reasons, such as
mobilizationsetting up machinery, equipment, and purchasing materials on-site, among
other needs.
To create an advance, follow the below steps:
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Billing > Contracting > Invoice > Advance > Click Create
Advance under Advance tab
Step 2: Step 2: Once you click Create Advance under the Advance tab, you will be
prompted to fill in and select necessary details.
Fields
Explanation
Project*
Select a project from the drop-down list
Sub Project
Select a sub-project from the drop-down list
Certifying Company
Choose the company under whose
umbrella comes the project / sub project
Invoice To (Client Name)
The name of the client to whom the invoice
is being sent is shown automatically
Contracting Order*
Click Select beside the field and select the
contracting order
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Conversion Rate*
This required field specifies the conversion
rate if the billing involves multiple
currencies.
Type Of Advance*
Select the type of invoice: Interim, Running,
Final or Retention
Mobilization: To cover the initial costs of
setting up the project site. It includes
expenses for transporting and installing
machinery, equipment, and other necessary
infrastructure.
Adhoc: To make an on-demand payment
requested by contractors during the
construction
Material: For the purchase of materials
required for the project. It helps contractors
procure necessary supplies in advance to
avoid delays.
Invoice Date*
Enter the date of the invoice
Invoice Ref. No.
Enter a reference number for the invoice
Client Details:
The client details such as address, mobile number, email, etc., are automatically fetched
from Engg > Masters > Contracting Client List.
Revenue Details:
Fields
Explanation
Revenue Value
This field displays the gross revenue
amount before any discounts or deductions.
It represents the total amount earned from
the project or contract before adjustments
are made.
Revenue Discount Amount
This field shows the total amount of
discounts applied to the revenue value. It
accounts for any agreed-upon reductions in
the billing amount, such as early payment
discounts or volume discounts.
Revenue Amount
This field indicates the revenue amount
after applying any discounts but before
other deductions like taxes. It reflects the
adjusted revenue that will be subjected to
further calculations.
Invoice BOQ Amount*
Base Value
This field shows the initial contract value or
the value before any additions or
deductions. It is automatically calculated
based on the agreed terms of the contract.
Tax Additions
This field allows users to enter the amount
of taxes applicable to the revenue. It
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
includes any statutory taxes that need to be
added to the base value.
Total Tax Additions
This field displays the sum of all tax
additions applied to the revenue. It is
automatically calculated based on the
individual tax amounts entered.
Net Amount Receivable
This field indicates the final amount to be
received by the contractor after accounting
for all discounts, taxes, and other
adjustments. It is automatically calculated
as the Revenue Amount plus Total Tax
Additions.
Due Date*
Select the date from the calendar by which
the advance amount is due
Remarks
Add remarks, if any
Documents
Add any documents relevant to the invoice. These documents can include project contracts,
work completion certificates, tax forms, or any other supporting documentation necessary for
validation and record-keeping.
To add a document, click Add New, choose a file and click Update.
Step 3: Click Create.
7.6.9 Receipt
Once an invoice has been raised and payment made to the contractor by a client, it is time to
create a receipt.
To create a receipt, follow the below steps:
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Billing > Contracting > Receipt > Receipt List > Click Create
Receipt.
Step 2: Once you click Receipt, you will be prompted to fill in and select necessary details:
Fields
Explanation
Project
Select a project from the drop-down list
Sub Project
Select a sub project from the drop-down list
Certifying Company
This field is automatically shown
Client
The name of the client to whom the receipt
is being sent is shown automatically
Receipt Date *
Choose a receipt date from the calendar
Receipt Type
Choose the type of receipt: Domestic or
International
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Pending Invoices: This section lists all invoices that are still unpaid or partially paid.
To add pending invoices, click Add New, select the pending invoices using the filter, and
click Accept Selected.
Payment Details: This section captures the details of the payment made against the
invoice(s).
Fields
Explanation
Payment Mode *
Chose a method used for payment (e.g.,
Bank Transfer, Credit Card, Cash) from the
drop-down.
Receipt Amount *
The amount that the contractor received
from the client
Total Credit Note Adjustment Amount
This field displays the total amount adjusted
using credit notes.
Receipt Excess Amount
This field displays any amount received in
excess of the invoice amount.
Excess Amount Adjustment
This field is about any excess payment to
be adjusted against future invoices. To add
excess adjustments, click Select beside the
field, select and click Update.
Total Receipt Amount
This field displays the total amount
recorded in the receipt (Receipt Amount +
Total Credit Note Adjustment Amount -
Receipt Excess Amount).
Remarks
Any additional notes or comments
regarding the payment.
Instrument Details
This section is relevant if the payment was made using an instrument like a cheque, bank
transfer, or bank draft.
Credit Notes
This section lists any credit notes applied to the invoice.
Documents
Upload any relevant documents to keep a record of the payment and related transactions.
To add a document, click Add New, choose a file and click Update.
Step 3: Click Create.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
7.6.10 Credit Note
Credit Note is crucial for managing financial adjustments as it serves to rectify invoice errors,
handle cancellations, address overpayments, and resolve billing disputes. By issuing a
Credit Note, construction companies can correct mistakes such as incorrect quantities,
prices, or tax rates, and ensure clients are accurately billed for the services rendered.
To create a Credit Note, follow the below steps:
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Billing > Contracting > Credit Note > Click Create Credit Note
Step 2: Once you click on the Create Credit Note, you will be prompted to fill in and select
the necessary details
Fields
Explanation
Project*
Select a project from the drop-down list
Sub Project
Select a sub project from the drop-down list
Contract Order*
Choose a contracting order from the drop-
down list
Client
The client to whom the credit note will be
sent is automatically shown
Invoice No.
Choose an invoice number using search
bar
Credit Note Date*
Choose a date from the calendar on which
the credit note is issued.
Credit Note Amount*
Enter the total amount of credit being
issued to the client.
Base Value
The original value before tax and other
additions.
Tax Additions
This field will show the applicable taxes to
be added to the base value.
Total Tax Additions
This field will show the sum of all tax
additions
Round Off
The rounding adjustment made to the final
amount to ensure meets your currency
requirements.
Gross Bill Amount
This field displays the total amount of the
credit note, including base value, tax
additions, and rounding off.
Reason Type*
Choose the type of reason for issuing the
credit note (e.g., incorrect quantities, prices,
tax rates, etc.).
Remarks
Add remarks, if any
Step 3: Click Create.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
7.7 Approvals
7.7.1 Contractor
A Contractor, when created in the In4Suite application, requires approval to ensure the
selection of a qualified contractor capable of delivering the project according to
specifications.
To approve a contractor, follow the below steps:
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Approvals > Contractor > Contractor List
Step 2: Search for the contractor using filter parameters such as Name, PAN No. / Tax ID,
and/or Code. You can also search by Work Category / Work Sub Category. Alternatively,
you may select the current status of the contractor under the Status field, click Go, and then
choose the contractor from the list.
Step 3: Once you find the result, click on the contractor's name in the first column to land on
the View Contractor page. Then, hover over 'Status,' click 'Change Status,' and select a
status from the drop-down list. Add any remarks if necessary.
Step 4: Click Update Status.
7.7.2 Consultant
A Consultant who could be consulting firm or individual providing services related to
design, engineering, or project management would require approval when created on the
In4Suite application.
To approve a consultant, follow the below steps:
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Approvals > Consultant > Consultant List
Step 2: Search for the consultant using filter parameters such as Name, PAN No. / Tax ID,
and/or Code. You can also search by Work Category / Work Sub Category. Alternatively,
you may select the current status of the consultant under the Status field, click Go, and then
choose the consultant from the list.
Step 3: Once you find the result, click on the consultant's name in the first column to land on
the View Consultant page. Then, hover over 'Status,' click 'Change Status,' and select a
status from the drop-down list. Add any remarks if necessary.
Step 4: Click Update Status.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
7.7.3 Contracting Client
A contracting client, when created on the In4Suite application, requires approval to confirm
their commitment and readiness to proceed with the project.
To approve a contracting client, follow the below steps:
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Approvals > Contracting Client > Contracting Client List
Step 2: Search for the contracting client using filter parameters such as Name, and/or Code.
Alternatively, you may select the current status of the contracting client under the Status
field, click Go, and then choose from the list.
Step 3: Once you find the result, click on the contracting client's name in the first column to
land on the View Contracting Client page. Then, hover over 'Status,' click 'Change Status,'
and select a status from the drop-down list. Add any remarks if necessary.
Step 4: Click Update Status.
7.7.4 Contractor WO
Once a contractor is selected and created on the In4Suite application for the construction or
related work, a work order detailing scope, timelines, and other contractual terms is
created. This work order before execution requires an approval.
To approve a Contractor WO, follow the below steps:
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Approvals > Contractor WO > Contractor WO List
Step 2: Search for the contractor work order using filter parameters such as project, sub
project, work category, work sub category, etc. Alternatively, you may select the current
status of the contractor work order under the Status field, click Go, and then choose the
work order no. from the list.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Step 3: Once you find the result, click on the contractor work order no in the first column to
land on the View Work Order page. Then, hover over 'Status,' click 'Change Status,' and
select a status from the drop-down list. Add any remarks if necessary.
Step 4: Click Update Status.
7.7.5 Consultant WO
Once a consultant is approved and consultant work order is created on the In4Suite
application, the consultant work order needs an approval before its execution.
To approve a Consultant WO, follow the below steps:
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Approvals > Consultant WO > Contractor WO List
Step 2: Search for the consultant work order using filter parameters such as project, sub
project, work category, work sub category, etc. Alternatively, you may select the current
status of the consultant work order under the Status field, click Go, and then choose the
work order no. from the list.
Step 3: Once you find the result, click on the contractor work order number in the first
column to land on the View Work Order page. Then, hover over 'Status,' click 'Change
Status,' and select a status from the drop-down list. Add any remarks if necessary.
Step 4: Click Update Status.
7.7.6 Internal WO
When a developer decides to work on a project themselves rather than assigning it to a contractor /
consultant, an internal work order needs to be created on the In4Suite application. Even this
requires a formal approval on the In4Suite application before the commencement of the project /
sub project.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
To approve an Internal WO, follow the below steps:
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Approvals > Internal WO > Internal WO List
Step 2: Search for the internal work order using filter parameters such as project, sub
project, work category, work sub category, work order number, etc. Alternatively, you may
select the current status of the internal work order under the Status field, click Go, and then
choose the work order no. from the list.
Step 3: Once you find the result, click on the internal work order number in the first column
to land on the View Work Order page. Then, hover over 'Status,' click 'Change Status,' and
select a status from the drop-down list. Add any remarks if necessary.
Step 4: Click Update Status.
7.7.7 Labour WO
Approval for labor-related tasks, including hiring, deployment, and management of workforce
on-site.
To approve a Labour WO, follow the below steps:
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Approvals > Labour WO > Labour WO List
Step 2: Search for the labour work order using filter parameters such as project, sub project,
work category, work sub category, work order number, etc. Alternatively, you may select the
current status of the internal work order under the Status field, click Go, and then choose
the work order no. from the list.
Step 3: Once you find the result, click on the labour work order number in the first column to
land on the View Work Order page. Then, hover over 'Status,' click 'Change Status,' and
select a status from the drop-down list. Add any remarks if necessary.
Step 4: Click Update Status.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
7.7.8 BOQ
Approval of the detailed list of materials, quantities, and costs required for the construction
project.
To approve a BOQ, follow the below steps:
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Approvals > BOQ > BOQ List
Step 2: Search for the BOQ using filter parameters such as project, sub project, work
category, work sub category, BOQ description, etc. Alternatively, you may select the current
status of the BOQ under the Status field, click Go, and then choose the BOQ whose status
need to be changed from the list.
Step 3: Once you find the result, click on the BOQ in the Description column to land on the
View BOQ page. Then, hover over 'Status,' click 'Change Status,' and select a status from
the drop-down list. Add any remarks if necessary.
Step 4: Click Update Status.
7.7.9 Abstract
An abstract is the measurement of the quantity of work completed. This is typically done by a
site engineer. Once the work is measured and recorded on the In4Suite application, it needs
to be approved by the authority who has been authorized to perform the approval action.
To approve an abstract, follow the below steps:
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Approvals > Abstract > Abstract List
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Step 2: Search for the abstract using filter parameters such as project, sub project, work
category, work sub category, work order, etc. Alternatively, you may select the current status
of the abstract under the Status field, click Go, and then choose the abstract whose status
needs to be changed from the list.
Step 3: Once you find the result, click on the work order under the Work Order No column to
land on the View Abstract page. Then, hover over 'Status,' click 'Change Status,' and select
a status from the drop-down list. Add any remarks if necessary.
Step 4: Click Update Status.
7.7.10 MBook
Approval of records containing measurements of work done on-site, used for billing and
verification purposes.
To approve an MBook, follow the below steps:
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Approvals > MBook > MBook List
Step 2: Search for the measurement book using filter parameters such as project, sub
project, work category, work sub category, work order, etc. Alternatively, you may select the
current status of the measurement book under the Status field, click Go, and then choose
the measurement book whose status needs to be changed from the list.
Step 3: Once you find the result, click on the measurement book under the MBook No
column to land on the View MBook page. Then, hover over 'Status,' click 'Change Status,'
and select a status from the drop-down list. Add any remarks if necessary.
Step 4: Click Update Status.
Inventory
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
7.7.11 Indent
An indent is the requisition for materials or equipment, which typically comes from the site
engineer. Once created, it will undergo the approval process based on the defined workflow.
To approve an indent, follow the below steps:
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Approvals > Indent > Approvals (Indent)
Step 2: Search for the indent using filter parameters such as project, sub project, work
category, work sub category, work order, indent number, etc. Alternatively, you may select
the current status of the indent under the Status field, click Go, and then choose the indent
whose status needs to be changed from the list.
Step 3: Once you find the result, click on the indent number in the Indent No. column to land
on the View Indent page. Then, hover over 'Status,' click 'Change Status,' and select a
status from the drop-down list. Add any remarks if necessary.
Step 4: Click Update Status.
7.7.12 Service Indent
A service indent is a requisition for services, typically initiated by the site engineer, specifying
the need for external services such as maintenance, repair, or specialized tasks required for
the project. Once created, it will undergo the approval process based on the defined
workflow..
To approve a service indent, follow the below steps:
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Approvals > Service Indent > Approvals (Service Indent’s)
Step 2: Search for the service indent using filter parameters such as project, sub project,
work category, work sub category, work order, indent number, etc. Alternatively, you may
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
select the current status of the service indent under the Status field, click Go, and then
choose the service indent whose status needs to be changed from the list.
Step 3: Once you find the result, click on the service indent number in the Service Indent No.
column to land on the View Service Indent page. Then, hover over 'Status,' click 'Change
Status,' and select a status from the drop-down list. Add any remarks if necessary.
Step 4: Click Update Status.
7.7.13 GRN
Goods Received Note (GRN) is a document used in the process of receiving goods from a
supplier or vendor. It serves as an acknowledgment or proof of receipt of goods by the
buyer. Once the goods are delivered to the store, A GRN is created, which requires approval
by the user who has been authorised to perform the approval action.
To create a GRN approval, follow the below steps:
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Approvals > GRN > GRN List
Step 2: Search for the GRN using filter parameters such as project, supplier, material,
material / asset type, material / asset name, etc. Alternatively, you may select the current
status of the GRN under the Status field, click Go, and then choose the GRN whose status
needs to be changed from the list.
Step 3: Once you find the result, click on the GRN in the GRN No. column to land on the
View GRN page. Then, hover over 'Status,' click 'Change Status,' and select a status from
the drop-down list. Add any remarks if necessary.
Step 4: Click Update Status.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
7.7.14 Issue
Before materials or equipment are issued from the inventory or warehouse, they will undergo
the approval process based on the defined workflow.
To approve material or asset to be issued from a store, follow the below steps:
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Approvals > Issue > Issue Inventory List
Step 2: Search for the issue number using filter parameters such as project, material,
material / asset type, etc. Alternatively, you may select the current status of the Issue under
the Status field, click Go, and then choose the Issue whose status needs to be changed
from the list.
Step 3: Once you find the result, click on the issue in the Issue No. column to land on the
View Issue Details page. Then, hover over 'Status,' click 'Change Status,' and select a status
from the drop-down list. Add any remarks if necessary.
Step 4: Click Update Status.
7.7.15 Return
When materials, equipment, or any asset are returned to the inventory or storage after use
or for other reasons, they need to undergo an approval process based on the defined
hierarchy. This ensures that the return is authorized, documented, and aligns with inventory
management protocols, maintaining accurate records of stock levels and asset utilization.
To approve material or asset, follow the below steps:
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Approvals > Return > Return Inventory List
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Step 2: Search for the return number using filter parameters such as project, material,
material / asset type, etc. Alternatively, you may select the current status of the returnable
material or asset under the Status field, click Go, and then choose the return whose status
needs to be changed from the list.
Step 3: Once you find the result, click on the return in the Return No. column to land on the
View Return Details page. Then, hover over 'Status,' click 'Change Status,' and select a
status from the drop-down list. Add any remarks if necessary.
Step 4: Click Update Status.
7.7.16 Transfer Order
When materials, equipment or any asset are to be transferred from one store to another
store within the construction site or between sites, they will undergo an approval process
based on the defined hierarchy.
To approve material or asset to be transferred from one store to another, follow the below
steps:
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Approvals > Transfer Order > Transfer Order List
Step 2: Search for the transfer order using filter parameters such as from store, to store,
transfer order number, material, etc. Alternatively, you may select the current status of the
transferrable material or asset under the Status field, click Go, and then choose the transfer
order whose status needs to be changed from the list.
Step 3: Once you find the result, click on the transfer order in the Transfer Order No.
column to land on the View Transfer Order Details page. Then, hover over 'Status,' click
'Change Status,' and select a status from the drop-down list. Add any remarks if necessary.
Step 4: Click Update Status.
7.7.17 Gate Pass
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
A gate pass is an official document authorizing the movement of goods into or out of a
controlled area, like a construction site or warehouse. On the In4Suite applicable, a gate
pass, once created, needs to be approved by the user who has been authorised to perform
approval actions.
To approve a gate pass, follow the below steps:
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Approvals > Gate Pass > Gate Pass List
Step 2: Search for the gate pass using filter parameters such as the type of gate pass that
was created and the dates when those gate passes were created. Alternatively, you may
select the current status of the gate pass under the Status field, click Go, and then choose
the gate pass whose status needs to be changed from the list.
Step 3: Once you find the result, click on the gate pass in the Gate Pass No. column to land
on the View Gate Pass page. Then, hover over 'Status,' click 'Change Status,' and select a
status from the drop-down list. Add any remarks if necessary.
Step 4: Click Update Status.
Payments
7.7.18 Work Order
A work order is a legal agreement between a developer and a contractor which serves as
the foundation for their collaboration. Once created, it needs the approval and then sent to
the client to commence the work.
To approve a work order, follow the below steps:
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Approvals > Work Order > Work Order Certificate List
Step 2: Search for the work order certificate using filter parameters such as the project, sub
project, work category, work sub category, abstract dates, etc. Alternatively, you may select
the current status of the work order certificate under the Status field, click Go, and then
choose the work order certificate whose status needs to be changed from the list.
Step 3: Once you find the result, click on the certificate in the Certificate No. column to land
on the View Certificate page. Then, hover over 'Status,' click 'Change Status,' and select a
status from the drop-down list. Add any remarks if necessary.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Step 4: Click Update Status.
7.7.19 Misc. Expenses
Misc. Expenses are costs not covered under specific categories and require approval once
created within the In4Suite system. It tracks miscellaneous expenditures like temporary
labour, small equipment purchases, or minor repairs.
To approve Misc. Expenses, follow the below steps:
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Approvals > Misc. Expenses > Misc. Expenses List
Step 2: Search for the misc. expenses using filter parameters such as the project, sub
project, misc. expenses number, misc. expenses contractor, etc. Alternatively, you may
select the current status of the misc. expenses under the Status field, click Go, and then
choose the misc. expenses whose status needs to be changed from the list.
Step 3: Once you find the result, click on the misc. expense number in the Misc. Expenses
No. column to land on the View Misc. Expenses page. Then, hover over 'Status,' click
'Change Status,' and select a status from the drop-down list. Add any remarks if necessary.
Step 4: Click Update Status.
7.7.20 Advance
Any advance payment that is to be made to a contractor or a consultant must be approved
on the In4Suite application.
To approve an advance, follow the below steps:
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Approvals > Advance > Advance List
Step 2: Search for the advance using filter parameters such as the project, sub project, type
of advance, etc. Alternatively, you may select the current status of the advance under the
Status field, click Go, and then choose the advance whose status needs to be changed from
the list.
Step 3: Once you find the result, choose the advance certificate number in the Certificate
No. column to land on the View Advance page. Then, hover over 'Status,' click 'Change
Status,' and select a status from the drop-down list. Add any remarks if necessary.
Step 4: Click Update Status.
7.7.21 Debit Note
Debit note issued to contractors / consultants for various purposes such as adjustments,
corrections, or additional charges. When created, debit notes need to be approved first
within the In4Suite application.
To approve a debit note, follow the below steps:
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Approvals > Debit Note > Debit Note List
Step 2: Search for the debit note using filter parameters such as the project, sub project,
debit note ID, work order, etc. Alternatively, you may select the current status of the debit
note under the Status field, click Go, and then choose debit note whose status needs to be
changed from the list.
Step 3: Once you find the result, choose the debit note ID in the Certificate No. column to
land on the View Debit Note page. Then, hover over 'Status,' click 'Change Status,' and
select a status from the drop-down list. Add any remarks if necessary.
Step 4: Click Update Status.
7.7.22 Debit Note Receipt
A debit note can be understood as a confirmation document which acknowledges that the
seller has received the debit note from the buyer and has processed the requested
adjustment. This needs approval from the individual who has been empowered to make
approval actions.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
To approve a debit note receipt, follow the below steps:
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Approvals > Debit Note Receipt > Debit Note List
Step 2: Search for the debit note receipt using filter parameters such as certifying company,
project, sub project, etc. Alternatively, you may select the current status of the debit note
receipt under the Status field, click Go, and then choose debit note whose status needs to
be changed from the list.
Step 3: Once you find the result, choose the debit note receipt number in the Receipt No.
column to land on the View Debit Note Receipt page. Then, hover over 'Status,' click
'Change Status,' and select a status from the drop-down list. Add any remarks if necessary.
Step 4: Click Update Status.
7.7.23 Labour Payment
Any payment made towards labour need an approval on the In4Suite system from the
individual who has been authorized to perform approval actions.
To approve labour payment, follow the below steps:
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Approvals > Labour Payment > Labour Payment List
Step 2: Search for the labour payment certificate using filter parameters such as project, sub
project, type of payment, Abstract/DPR dates, certificate number, etc. Alternatively, you may
select the current status of the labour payment under the Status field, click Go, and then
choose the labour payment whose status needs to be changed from the list.
Step 3: Once you find the result, choose the labour payment certificate in the Certificate
No. column to land on the View Labour Payment page. Then, hover over 'Status,' click
'Change Status,' and select a status from the drop-down list. Add any remarks if necessary.
Step 4: Click Update Status.
Budgets
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
7.7.24 Work Category
Payments against work categories require an approval on the In4Suite system to ensure that
necessary payments are made in alignment with project budgets.
To approve a work category, follow the below steps:
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Approvals > Work Category > Work Category List
Step 2: Search for the work category using Project as a parameter. Alternatively, you may
select the current status of the work category under the Status field, click Go, and then
choose the sub project that has the work categories listed under.
Step 3: Once you find the result, choose a sub project in the second column to land on the
View Work Category Budget page. Then, hover over 'Status,' click 'Change Status,' and
select a status from the drop-down list. Add any remarks if necessary.
Step 4: Click Update Status.
7.7.25 Material
Payments against materials require an approval on the In4Suite system to ensure that
necessary payments are made in alignment with project budgets.
To approve a material payment, follow the below steps:
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Approvals > Material > Sub Project Material Budget ListList
Step 2: Search for the material budget using Project as a parameter. Alternatively, you may
select the current status of the material under the Status field, click Go, and then choose the
sub project that the material budget is linked to.
Step 3: Once you find the result, choose a sub project in the second column to land on the
View Material Budget page. Then, hover over 'Status,' click 'Change Status,' and select a
status from the drop-down list. Add any remarks if necessary.
Step 4: Click Update Status.
Contracting
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
7.7.26 Contracting Order
A contracting order refers to the formal arrangement that outline the sequence of
agreements on roles, responsibilities, timelines, deliverables, and financial terms between a
client and a contractor. Once a contracting order is created on the In4Suite system, it
requires an approval.
To approve a contracting order, follow the below steps:
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Approvals > Contracting Order > Contracting Order List
Step 2: Search for the contracting order using project and sub project as parameters.
Alternatively, you may select the current status of the contracting order under the Status
field, click Go, and then choose the contracting oder.
Step 3: Once you find the result, choose a contracting order in the first column under
Contracting Order No to land on the View Contracting Order page. Then, hover over
'Status,' click 'Change Status,' and select a status from the drop-down list. Add any remarks
if necessary.
Step 4: Click Update Status.
7.7.27 Invoice
When an invoice (being a request for payment) is generated against abstracts or based on
the mutual agreement on the In4Suite system by a contractor, it requires approval before
being processed.
Note:
1. An invoice generated for any advance will need to be approved separately under
Engg > Approvals > Invoice (Advance).
2. Advance Invoice has been designed to not mandate the attachment of BOQ when it
is created.
To approve an invoice, follow the below steps
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Approvals > Invoice > Invoice List
Step 2: Search for the invoice using the parameters such as project, sub project, invoice ID,
contracting order, etc. Alternatively, you may select the current status of the invoice under
the Status field, click Go, and then choose the invoice and follow the below step.
Step 3: Once you find the result, choose an invoice in the first column under Invoice ID to
land on the View Invoice page. Then, hover over 'Status,' click 'Change Status,' and select a
status from the drop-down list. Add any remarks if necessary.
Step 4: Click Update Status.
7.7.28 Invoice (Advance)
An advance invoice (being request for payment) is created, based on the mutual agreement
between a client and a contractor. Once created, it requires an approval of the individual
who has been authorized to perform approval actions.
To approve an advance invoice, follow the below steps
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Approvals > Invoice (Advance) > Advance Invoices List
Step 2: Search for the advance using the parameters such as project, sub project, advance
invoice ID, contracting order, etc. Alternatively, you may select the current status of the
advance invoice under the Status field, click Go, and then choose the advance invoice and
follow the below step.
Step 3: Once you find the result, choose an advance invoice in the first column under
Advance ID to land on the View Advance Invoice page. Then, hover over 'Status,' click
'Change Status,' and select a status from the drop-down list. Add any remarks if necessary.
Step 4: Click Update Status.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
7.7.29 Receipt
A receipt is generated once payment(s) are made against an invoice(s). It is issued by the
contractor to the client after payment has been received. Once a receipt is created on the
In4Suite system, it requires an approval from the individual who has been authorized to
perform approval actions.
To approve a receipt upon being created, follow the below steps
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Approvals > Receipt > Receipt List
Step 2: Search for the receipt using the parameters such as client, project, sub project,
invoice number, etc. Alternatively, you may select the current status of receipt under the
Status field, click Go, and then choose receipt and follow the below step.
Step 3: Once you find the result, choose a receipt in the first column under Receipt ID to
land on the View Receipt page. Then, hover over 'Status,' click 'Change Status,' and select a
status from the drop-down list. Add any remarks if necessary.
Step 4: Click Update Status.
7.7.30 Credit Note
A credit note is issued by the contractor to the client to indicate that the client owes less than
the amount originally invoiced. This document is used when there is a decrease in the
amount originally invoiced. Once a credit note is created on the In4Suite system, it needs an
approval from the individual who has been authorized to perform approval actions.
To approve a credit note upon being created, follow the below steps
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Approvals > Credit Note > Credit Note List
Step 2: Search for the credit note using the parameters such as client, project, sub project,
credit note number, etc. Alternatively, you may select the current status of credit note under
the Status field, click Go, and then choose a credit note and follow the below step.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Step 3: Once you find the result, choose a credit note in the first column under Credit Note
No to land on the View Credit Note page. Then, hover over 'Status,' click 'Change Status,'
and select a status from the drop-down list. Add any remarks if necessary.
Step 4: Click Update Status.
7.7.31 CO Abstract
The Contracting Order Abstracts or CO Abstract is designed to measure and record the work
completed by a contractor. This feature allows developers to efficiently track progress,
approve work abstracts, and facilitate invoicing and payment processes. Once a CO
Abstract is created by a contractor, it needs an approval from the client.
To approve a CO Abstract, follow the below steps:
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Approvals > Credit Note > Credit Note List
Step 2: Search for the CO Abstract using the parameters such as project, sub project, work
category, work sub category, etc. Alternatively, you may select the current status of CO
Abstract under the Status field, click Go, and then choose a CO Abstract and follow the
below step.
Step 3: Once you find the result, choose a CO Abstract in the second column under CO
Display No to land on the View CO Abstract page. Then, hover over 'Status,' click 'Change
Status,' and select a status from the drop-down list. Add any remarks if necessary.
Step 4: Click Update Status.
Termination
7.7.32 Contractor WO
Terminating a Contractor Work Order requires approval to ensure compliance with
contractual obligations and to manage any financial or operational impacts.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
To terminate a Contractor WO, follow the below steps:
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Approvals > Termination > Contractor WO > Termination
(Contractor WO's)
Step 2: Search for the contractor WO using the parameters such as project, sub project,
work category, work sub category, work order number, etc. Alternatively, you may select the
current status of Contractor WO under the Status field, click Go, and then choose a
Contractor WO and follow the below step.
Step 3: Once you find the result, choose a Contractor WO in the first column under Work
Order No to land on the View Work Order page. Then, hover over 'Status,' click 'Change
Status,' and select a status from the drop-down list. Add any remarks if necessary.
Step 4: Click Update Status.
Note: A work order can be terminated only after its approval. Otherwise, it can only be
cancelled. When a work order needs to be terminated, the following is the typical status
order. However, you can create your own custom status order.
1. Approval
2. Locked
3. Verified
4. Terminated
7.7.33 Consultant WO
Terminating a consultant work order requires approval to ensure compliance with contractual
obligations and to manage any financial or operational impacts.
To terminate a Consultant WO, follow the below steps:
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Approvals > Termination > Consultant WO > Termination
(Consultant WO's)
Step 2: Search for the Consultant WO using the parameters such as project, sub project,
work category, work sub category, work order number, etc. Alternatively, you may select the
current status of Consultant WO under the Status field, click Go, and then choose a
Consultant WO and follow the below step.
Step 3: Once you find the result, choose a Consultant WO in the first column under Work
Order No to land on the View Work Order page. Then, hover over 'Status,' click 'Change
Status,' and select a status from the drop-down list. Add any remarks if necessary.
Step 4: Click Update Status.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Note: A work order can be terminated only after its approval. Otherwise, it can only be
cancelled. When a work order needs to be terminated, the following is the typical status
order. However, you can create your own custom status order.
1. Approval
2. Locked
3. Verified
4. Terminated
7.7.34 Internal WO
Terminating an Internal Work Order requires approval to ensure that internal resources are
reallocated appropriately and that the termination does not disrupt organizational operations.
To terminate an Internal WO, follow the below steps:
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Approvals > Termination > Internal WO > Termination (Internal
WO's)
Step 2: Search for the Internal WO using the parameters such as project, sub project, work
category, work sub category, work order number, etc. Alternatively, you may select the
current status of internal WO under the Status field, click Go, and then choose a internal
WO and follow the below step.
Step 3: Once you find the result, choose a work order number in the first column under
Work Order No to land on the View Work Order page. Then, hover over 'Status,' click
'Change Status,' and select a status from the drop-down list. Add any remarks if necessary.
Step 4: Click Update Status.
Note: A work order can be terminated only after its approval. Otherwise, it can only be
cancelled. When a work order needs to be terminated, the following is the typical status
order. However, you can create your own custom status order.
1. Approval
2. Locked
3. Verified
4. Terminated
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
7.7.35 Labour WO
Labour WO refers to the labour-related tasks, including hiring, deployment, and
management of workforce on-site.
To terminate Labour WO, follow the below steps:
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Approvals > Termination > Labour WO > Termination (Labour
WO's)
Step 2: Search for the Labour WO using the parameters such as project, sub project, work
category, work sub category, work order number, etc. Alternatively, you may select the
current status of Labour WO under the Status field, click Go, and then choose a labour WO
and follow the below step.
Step 3: Once you find the result, choose a work order number in the first column under
Work Order No to land on the View Work Order page. Then, hover over 'Status,' click
'Change Status,' and select a status from the drop-down list. Add any remarks if necessary.
Step 4: Click Update Status.
Note: A work order can be terminated only after its approval. Otherwise, it can only be
cancelled. When a work order needs to be terminated, the following is the typical status
order. However, you can create your own custom status order.
1. Approval
2. Locked
3. Verified
4. Terminated
7.7.36 Purchase Order
Terminating a Purchase Order requires approval to ensure that procurement policies are
followed and to address any financial implications or supply chain disruptions.
To terminate a purchase order, follow the below steps:
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Approvals > Termination > Purchase Order > Purchase Order
List
Step 2: From the list, choose a purchase order in the first column under PO No to land on
the View Purchase Order page. Then, hover over 'Status,' click 'Change Status,' and select a
status from the drop-down list. Add any remarks if necessary.
Step 3: Click Update Status.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Note: A purchase order can be terminated only after its approval. Otherwise, it can only be
cancelled. When a work order needs to be terminated, the following is the typical status
order. However, you can create your own custom status order.
1. Approval
2. Locked
3. Verified
4. Terminated
7.7.37 Rental Modification
Terminating a Rental Modification Order requires approval to verify that all contractual terms
are honoured and to handle any logistical or financial adjustments.
To terminate rental modification, follow the below steps:
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Approvals > Termination > Rental Modification > Approvals
(Modifications)
Step 2: Search for the Labour WO using the parameters such as project name, sub project
name, term sheet number, etc. Alternatively, you may select the current status of rental
modification under the Status field, click Go, and then choose a rental modification item and
follow the below step.
Step 3: Once you find the result, choose a rental modification number in the first column
under Modification ID to land on the View Modification Details page. Then, hover over
'Status,' click 'Change Status,' and select a status from the drop-down list. Add any remarks
if necessary.
Step 4: Click Update Status.
Note: A rental modification order can be terminated only after its approval. Otherwise, it can
only be cancelled. When a work order needs to be terminated, the following is the typical
status order. However, you can create your own custom status order.
1. Approval
2. Locked
3. Verified
4. Terminated
Tendering
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
7.7.38 Tender Document
This document outlines the details of the tender, including the scope of work, terms and
conditions, and evaluation criteria. Additionally, note that this document requires formal
approval before any decisions based on its contents can be taken.
To approve a tender document, follow the below steps:
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Approvals > Tendering > Tender Document
Step 2: Search for the tender document using the parameters such as project, sub project,
work category, tender document number, etc. Alternatively, you may select the current
status of tender document under the Status field, click Go, and then choose a tender
document and follow the below step.
Step 3: Once you find the result, choose a tender document in the first column under
Tender Document No to land on the View Tender Document page. Then, hover over
'Status,' click 'Change Status,' and select a status from the drop-down list. Add any remarks
if necessary.
Step 4: Click Update Status.
7.7.39 Pre-Tender Estimate
This is a cost estimate prepared before the tender is floated to give an idea of the expected
expenditure. Additionally, note that this document requires formal approval before any
decisions based on its contents can be taken.
To approve a pre-tender estimate, follow the below steps:
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Approvals > Pre-Tender Estimate > Pre-Tender Estimate(PTE)
List
Step 2: Search for the pre-tender estimate using the parameters such as project, pre-tender
estimate number, etc. Alternatively, you may select the current status of pre-tender estimate
under the Status field, click Go, and then choose a pre-tender estimate and follow the below
step.
Step 3: Once you find the result, choose a pre-tender estimate in the first column under Pre-
Tender Estimate No to land on the View Pre-Tender Estimate page. Then, hover over
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
'Status,' click 'Change Status,' and select a status from the drop-down list. Add any remarks
if necessary.
Step 4: Click Update Status.
7.7.40 Tender Receipt
This involves the formal receipt of tender submissions from various bidders within the
stipulated deadline. Additionally, note that this document requires formal approval before any
decisions based on its contents can be taken.
To approve a tender receipt, follow the below steps:
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Approvals > Tendering > Tender Receipt
Step 2: Search for the tender receipt using the parameters such as project,
contractor/consultant, tender receipt number, etc. Alternatively, you may select the current
status of tender receipt under the Status field, click Go, and then choose a tender receipt
and follow the below step.
Step 3: Once you find the result, choose a tender receipt in the first column under Tender
Receipt No to land on the View Tender Receipt page. Then, hover over 'Status,' click
'Change Status,' and select a status from the drop-down list. Add any remarks if necessary.
Step 4: Click Update Status.
7.7.41 Float Tender
This is the process of officially releasing the tender to potential bidders, inviting them to
submit their bids. Additionally, note that this document requires formal approval before any
decisions based on its contents can be taken.
To approve a float tender, follow the below steps:
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Approvals > Float Tender > Float Tender List
Step 2: Search for the float tender using the parameters such as project, sub project, work
category, sub work category, float tender dates, etc. Alternatively, you may select the current
status of float tender under the Status field, click Go, and then choose a float tender and
follow the below step.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Step 3: Once you find the result, choose a float tender in the first column under Float
Tender No to land on the View Float Tender page. Then, hover over 'Status,' click 'Change
Status,' and select a status from the drop-down list. Add any remarks if necessary.
Step 4: Click Update Status.
7.7.42 Rate Comparison
This involves the comparison of the rates quoted by different bidders to determine the most
competitive and cost-effective bid. Additionally, note that this document requires formal
approval before any decisions based on its contents can be taken.
To approve a rate comparison upon being created, follow the below steps:
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Approvals > Rate Comparison > Approvals (Tender Rate
Comparison)
Step 2: Search for the rate comparison using the parameters such as project, tender
document number, tender dates, etc. Alternatively, you may select the current status of rate
comparison under the Status field, click Go, and then choose a rate comparison and follow
the below step.
Step 3: Once you find the result, choose a rate comparison in the first column under Rate
Comparison No to land on the Create / View Rate Comparison page. Then, hover over
'Status,' click 'Change Status,' and select a status from the drop-down list. Add any remarks
if necessary.
Step 4: Click Update Status.
7.8 Modification
A customer may request for modification in the unit(s) they have purchased. A salesperson who is
engaged with the customer will take the modification order and feed it to the In4Suite system. The
engineer, in turn, will review the request and check for feasibility. If feasible, the engineer will
prepare a feasibility document, upload it and then approve the request.
To view the modification request, follow the below steps:
1. Navigate to Engg > Modification
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
2. Choose a sub project that the unit falls under using the filter that includes Project,
Sub Project, Floor No, Unit No, Customer and Engg Status. Then, click Go.
3. Once you click Go, click on View Details in the extreme right column.
4. Depending on the feasibility of the request, change the status under Engineer
Feedback. Also, you may add remarks, if any.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
7.9 Checklist
Checklist is an essential tool for managing and verifying the completion of
construction tasks for each unit. By systematically marking tasks as completed,
users can ensure that every aspect of the construction process is addressed,
thereby maintaining the quality and integrity of the project.
To view the checklist, follow the below steps:
1. Navigate to Engg > Checklist
2. Search for the unit using the filer that includes filter options such as Project,
Sub Project, Floor No., etc.
3. Mark Completed for the components that are completed.
Note:
Checklist items are created in Projects > Masters > Master Tables > Unit Checklist.
Once the checklist items are defined at the master level, you can create a checklist
for a specific unit:
To create checklist at the unit level, follow the below steps:
1. Navigate to Sales > Sales Stock
2. Search for the unit using the filter
3. Click on the Checklist tab
7.10 Templates
Templates provide a clear and structured approach to adding and managing documents
within the Engineering module of your ERP system. It ensures accurate and consistent
documentation practices.
7.10.1 Document Template
To add a document, follow the below steps:
1. Navigate to Engg > Templates > Document Template > Sales Document Template
List.
2. Click Add Document, choose a file and then click Upload.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
7.11 Portal
7.11.1 About Portal
The Portal menu offers a variety of features designed to facilitate communication and
information sharing with contractors. Here is an overview of the available functionalities:
Home Page: Configure the homepage display layout for contractors.
Banners: Set advertisement banners for the homepage and top frame.
Home News: Enter news items to display on the homepage.
Contacts: Define and manage contact information.
Menu Configuration: Customize the contractor menu.
Poll: Add contractor-specific polls to the homepage.
FAQs: Add frequently asked questions for users on the homepage.
Help Desk: Define help desk information for the homepage.
Send Password: Send user ID and password to customers.
Feedback: Define and manage feedback options.
These features help streamline interactions, provide essential information, and enhance the
user experience for contractors using the portal.
7.11.2 Menu Configuration
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Menu Configuration allows the owner to configure the navigation menu for contractors. They
can choose which menu items (e.g., Home, Tender, Work Orders, Advance, Invoice, etc.)
will be visible and accessible to the contractors. This ensures that contractors only see the
functionalities relevant to their role.
To configure the contractor menu, follow the below steps
1. Navigate to Engg > Portal > Menu Configuration
2. Once you are on the Menu Configuration page, search for the contractor using the
filter options, which include fields such as Contractor Name, PAN, City, Work
Category, Work Sub Category, etc. Alternatively, you may click Go without filling in or
selecting any field in the filter if you want to configure the contractor menu for all
contractors. In this case, after clicking Go, checkmark Select All in the Select
Supplier field
3. Once you find the contractor, checkmark and select from the list of menu items which
will be visible on the contractor’s portal.
4. Click Update.
7.11.3 Template Configuration
This feature enables the owner to create and apply a template that defines the visual design
and layout of the contractor’s interface. This includes the look and feel, branding elements,
and overall aesthetic of the portal.
To configure the template menu, follow the below steps
1. Navigate to Engg > Portal > Template Configuration
2. On the Template Configuration page, use the filter to search for the contractor. The
filter fields include Contractor Name, PAN, City, Work Category, Work Sub Category,
and more.
3. After locating the contractor, select a template from the Template field in the filter.
Then, scroll down, checkmark, and select the menu items to be displayed on the
contractor’s portal.
4. Click Update.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
7.11.4 Login Configuration
This feature allows the owner to set up and customize the login process for contractors.
To configure the login menu, follow the below steps
1. Navigate to Engg > Portal > Login Configuration
2. The Login Configuration include the following sections and fields within.
a. Header Panel
i. Text
ii. Background Color
iii. Font Family
iv. Font Size
v. Font Weight
vi. Font Color
b. Footer Panel
i. Text
ii. Background Color
iii. Font Family
iv. Font Size
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
v. Font Weight
vi. Font Color
c. Main Panel
i. Text
ii. Background Color
iii. Font Family
iv. Font Size
v. Font Weight
vi. Font Color
d. Button
i. Text
ii. Background Color
iii. Font Family
iv. Font Size
v. Font Weight
vi. Font Color
e. Login tabs
i. Background Color
ii. Font Color
f. Menu Panel
i. Background Color
ii. Font Color
g. Social Media
h. Others
i. Form Width
ii. Login Text
iii. Password Text
iv. Link Color
v. Logo Navigate URL
vi. Logo Path*
vii. Preview (Logo)
3. Click Preview / Update.
7.11.5 Send Password
This functionality enables the owner to send login credentials (username and password) to
contractors. This is typically used when a new contractor is onboarded or if a contractor
forgets their password.
To send password, follow the below steps:
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
1. Navigate to Engg > Portal > Send Password
2. On the Send Password page, use the filter to search for the contractor. The filter
fields include Contractor Name, PAN, City, Work Category, Work Sub Category, and
more.
3. After locating the contractor, select an action from the Action to Perform* field in the
filter and click Go. Then, scroll down, checkmark, and select the contractor.
4. Click Enable.
7.11.6 Feedback Master
The Feedback Master allows the owner to create a standardized feedback form. Contractors
can use this form to provide feedback on various aspects, ensuring that the feedback is
collected in a consistent and structured manner.
To add a feedback master, follow the below steps:
1. Navigate to Engg > Portal > Feedback Master
2. Move the cursor to the top right and click Add Feedback.
3. Enter Title, Description, and Email. Select an employee to whom the feedback will be
assigned from the Assigned Employee* field.
4. Click Submit
7.11.7 Contacts Master
This feature is used to manage the list of contacts relevant to the contractor. It includes
details such as names, roles, phone numbers, and email addresses. It serves as a directory
for contractors to find and connect with the appropriate personnel.
To add a contacts master, follow the below steps:
1. Navigate to Engg > Portal > Contacts Master
2. Move the cursor to the top right and click Add Contact.
3. Select the Category and the employee name who will be the point of contact for the
contractor from the Employee Name field. Enter the Display Name, Phone Number,
Email ID, and FAX.
4. Click Submit.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
7.11.8 Contacts Category
This allows developers to categorize contacts into different groups (e.g., project managers,
site supervisors). It helps in organizing and filtering contacts for easier access and
management.
To add a contact category, follow the below steps:
1. Navigate to Engg > Portal > Contacts Category.
2. Move the cursor to the top right and click Add Contacts Category.
3. Enter the Category Name.
4. Click Submit.
7.11.9 Home Page Images
Owners can upload and manage images displayed on the contractor portal’s home page.
This could include promotional banners, project images, or any other relevant visuals.
To upload an image, follow the below steps:
1. Navigate to Engg > Portal > Home Page Images.
2. Move the cursor to the top right and click Add Images.
3. Enter the Title, Navigate Url, validity dates, and Description. Click Choose File, select
a file from the local storage, and then click Open.
4. Click Submit.
Home
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
7.11.10 News
This section allows developers to post news and updates related to the real estate projects,
company announcements, or industry news that contractors need to be aware of.
To add and post a news article, follow the below steps:
1. Navigate to Engg > Portal > Home > News
2. Move the cursor to the top right and click Add Home News.
3. Enter the News Title and News Description, select the File Type (photo or video), and
choose the validity dates from the calendar. Click Choose File, select a file from local
storage, and then click Open.
4. Click Submit.
7.11.11 Partners
Here, developers can list their partners, such as subcontractors, suppliers, and other key
stakeholders. This helps in acknowledging partnerships and provides contractors with a
network of associated entities.
To add a partner, follow the below steps:
1. Navigate to Engg > Portal > Home > Partners
2. Move the cursor to the top right and click Add Partner.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
3. Once you click on Add Partner, you will be prompted to fill in and select the
necessary details as mentioned in the table below.
Fields
Explanation
Partner Name
Enter the name of the partner
Frequency
Specify the frequency in days, from 0 to 60,
for how often the partnership information or
associated content should be updated or
reviewed. A value of 0 might indicate that
no regular updates are required
Partner Path*
Choose a file
Valid From*
Select the start date from which the
partnership is considered active
Navigate URL
Enter a URL that users can navigate to for
more information about the partner.
Alternate Text
Provide alternative text for any images or
media associated with the partner. This
improves accessibility and provides a text
description for users who cannot view the
media.
Description
Provide a detailed description of the partner
and the nature of the partnership. Include
information about the partner's role,
contributions, and other relevant details.
4. Click Submit
7.11.12 Poll
This feature allows developers to create and manage polls on the home page. Polls can be
used to gather opinions or feedback from contractors on various topics.
To create a Poll, follow the below steps:
1. Navigate to Engg > Portal > Home > Poll
2. Move the cursor to the top right and click Add Poll.
3. Once you click on Add Poll, you will be prompted to fill in and select the necessary
details as mentioned in the table below.
Fields
Explanation
Question *
Enter the poll question that you want
participants to respond to
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Response Type
Choose the type of responses allowed for
the poll. The options are:
Yes/No: Participants can only choose
between "Yes" or "No".
Yes/No/Maybe: Participants can choose
"Yes", "No", or "Maybe" as their response.
Output Type
Select the format in which the poll results
will be displayed. The options are:
Pie Chart: Results will be shown as a pie
chart, illustrating the proportions of each
response.
Bar Chart: Results will be shown as a bar
chart, indicating the count or percentage of
each response.
Validity From
Specify the start date from which the poll
will be active and available for responses.
Validity To
Specify the end date until which the poll will
remain active. After this date, the poll will
be closed for responses.
4. Click Submit
7.11.13 Poll Results
This section displays the results of the polls conducted. Developers can view the outcomes
and insights derived from the poll responses.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
7.11.14 FAQ Category
Developers can create categories for frequently asked questions (FAQs) to organize them
by topic. This makes it easier for contractors to find answers to common queries.
To add an FAQ Category, follow the below steps:
1. Navigate to Engg > Portal > Home > FAQ Category
2. Move the cursor to the top right and click Add FAQ Category
3. Enter the Category Name and Description.
4. Click Submit.
7.11.15 FAQs
This is where the actual FAQs are listed, categorized under the appropriate sections.
Contractors can refer to this section to get answers to their questions without needing to
contact support.
To add an FAQ, follow the below steps:
1. Navigate to Engg > Portal > Home > FAQs
2. Move the cursor to the top right and click Add FAQs
3. Choose a Category from the drop-down. Enter a Question and an Answer.
4. Click Submit.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
7.11.16 Help Desk
This feature provides a platform for contractors to reach out for help and support.
To create a help desk, follow the below steps:
1. Navigate to Engg > Portal > Home > Help Desk
2. Move the cursor to the top right and click Add Help Desk
3. Choose Contact Name*, Gender, Phone*, Mobile*, Email* and Chat ID*.
4. Click Submit.
Reports
This section provides various reports that help in monitoring and analyzing the portal’s usage
and performance.
7.11.17 Usage Statistics
This report gives insights into how contractors are using the portal, including metrics such as
page views, time spent on pages, and overall engagement levels.
To see the report on usage statistics, follow the below steps:
1. Navigate to Engg > Portal > Reports > Usage Statistics
2. Choose the dates and select how you want to view the report (Daily, Monthly, etc.)
under View by.
3. Click Show Report.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
7.11.18 Frequently Used Pages
This report highlights the most frequently visited pages by contractors. It helps in
understanding which sections of the portal are most valuable or need more attention.
To see the report on frequently used pages, follow the below steps:
1. Navigate to Engg > Portal > Reports > Frequently Used Pages
2. Choose the dates and select how you want to view the report (Daily, Monthly, etc.)
under View by.
3. Click Show Report.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
7.11.19 User Login/Logout
This report tracks login and logout activities of contractors. It provides details on user access
patterns, peak login times, and can help in identifying any unusual login activities.
To see the report on user login/logout, follow the below steps:
1. Navigate to Engg > Portal > Reports > User Login/Logout
2. Choose the dates
3. Click Show Report.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
7.11.20 Summary of Polls
Offers a summarized view of reports and analytics generated from portal usage and
contractor activities. This section provides an overview of key insights and findings from the
reports generated.
To create a summary of reports, follow the below steps:
1. Navigate to Engg > Portal > Reports > Summary of Reports > Summary of Polls &
Surveys - Report
2. Choose the dates
3. Click Show Report.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
7.12 Masters
7.12.1 Master Tables
Real estate business processes are complex and detailed. Business records or documents
contain numerous fields at the time of creation. Some fields are filled out by the user, admin,
or executive, while others are populated through drop-down lists sourced from master tables
within respective modules. These master tables provide the data for the drop-down fields
used during the creation process. Almost all modules have a master table each, and these
tables are created and edited based on business requirements.
Here are the various Master Table categories under the Engineering module:
Activity/Sub-Activity Master
Bidbond Charge
Bond Type
Condition Category
Condition Master
Constitutions Type Master
Contract Credit Note Reason Master
Contracting Competitor
Contracting Contact Method
Contracting Contact Type
Contracting Industry
Contracting Industry Type
Contracting Job Stage
Contracting Job Status
Contracting Job Type
Contracting Lead/Client Stage
Contracting Reason Type
Contracting Source
Contractor Ranks
Debit Note Reason Type Master
Engg. Floor Type Master
Material Reconciliation Reason Master
Payment Schedule Manual Event Master
Policy Periodicity Master
Project Staffing Roles
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
SAC Master
Service Indent TAT Type Master
Tender Contract Master
Tender Document Checklist Master
Tender Qualification Master
Tender Type Master
Unit Type Master
Work Category Type Master
Work Order Retention Type
7.12.1.1 Activity/Sub-Activity Master
The master data added here will appear in
Creating Activity/Sub-Activity Master
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Activity/Sub-Activity master from the drop-down list and click Go.
3. Click on Create on the top right. The Activity/Sub-Activity master window
will appear.
4. Specify the Name, select a Parent category from the drop-down and click on
Create to complete the step.
5. The new record will now be visible in the list of records.
Edit Activity/Sub-Activity Master
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Activity/Sub-Activity master from the drop-down list and click on
Go.
3. All existing records under this master will be listed. To edit a record, click on
the button, which is an edit button.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
4. The Edit Activity/Sub-Activity Master window appears. Update Name and
Parent fields. Then, click on Update to complete the step.
5. The changes will now be reflected in the list.
Changing the Status
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Activity/Sub-Activity master from the drop-down list and click on
Go.
3. All existing records under this Master will be listed. To change the status of
a record, click on icon, which is a status icon. A pop-window will appear
asking for confirmation. Click OK to complete the step.
4. The record will now indicate an inactive status with the icon.
Deleting the record
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Activity/Sub-Activity master from the drop-down list and click
on Go.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
3. All existing records under this Master will be listed. To delete a record,
click on icon, which is a delete icon. A pop-window will appear asking
for confirmation. click on OK. Another pop-up window will appear
displaying the message "Deleted Successfully." This completes the step.
4. The deleted record will no longer appear in the list.
7.12.1.2 Bidbond Charge
The master data added here will appear in Engg > Contracting > Bond Request
> Charges
Creating Bidbond Charge Master
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Bidbond Charge master from the drop-down list and click Go.
3. Click on Create on the top right. The Bidbond Charge master window will
appear.
4. Specify the Charge Name and click on Create to complete the step.
5. The new record will now be visible in the list of records.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Edit Bidbond Charge Master
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Bidbond Charge master from the drop-down list and click on Go.
3. All existing records under this Master will be listed. To edit a record, click on
the button, which is an edit button.
4. The Edit Bidbond Charge master window appears. Update Charge Name
and click on Update to complete the step.
5. The changes will now be reflected in the list.
Changing the Status
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Bidbond Charge master from the drop-down list and click on Go.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
3. All existing records under this Master will be listed. To change the status of
a record, click on icon, which is a status icon. A pop-window will appear
asking for confirmation. Click OK to complete the step.
4. The record will now indicate an inactive status with the icon.
Deleting the record
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Bidbond Charge master from the drop-down list and click on Go.
3. All existing records under this Master will be listed. To delete a record,
click on icon, which is a delete icon. A pop-window will appear asking
for confirmation. click on OK. Another pop-up window will appear
displaying the message "Deleted Successfully." This completes the step.
4. The deleted record will no longer appear in the list.
7.12.1.3 Bond Type
The master data added here will appear in Engg > Contracting > Bond Request
> Create Bond Request > Bond Type
Creating Bond Type Master
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Bond Type master from the drop-down list and click Go.
3. Click on Create on the top right. The Bond Type Master window will appear.
4. Specify the Type Name and click on Create to complete the step.
5. The new record will now be visible in the list of records.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Edit Bond Type Master
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Bond Type master from the drop-down list and click on Go.
3. All existing records under this Master will be listed. To edit a record, click on
the button, which is an edit button.
4. The Edit Bond Type master window appears. Update Type Name and click
on Update to complete the step.
5. The changes will now be reflected in the list.
Changing the Status
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Bond Type master from the drop-down list and click on Go.
3. All existing records under this Master will be listed. To change the status of
a record, click on icon, which is a status icon. A pop-window will appear
asking for confirmation. Click OK to complete the step.
4. The record will now indicate an inactive status with the icon.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Deleting the record
1. Navigate to Engg >Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Bond Type master from the drop-down list and click on Go.
3. All existing records under this Master will be listed. To delete a record,
click on icon, which is a delete icon. A pop-window will appear asking
for confirmation. click on OK. Another pop-up window will appear
displaying the message "Deleted Successfully." This completes the step.
4. The deleted record will no longer appear in the list.
7.12.1.4 Condition Category
The master data added here will appear in Engg > Projects > Project / Sub
Project > Work Order > Work Order (WO) No. > Terms and Conditions
Creating Condition Category Master
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Condition Category master from the drop-down list and click Go.
3. Click on Create on the top right. The Condition Category master window
will appear.
4. Specify the Name and click on Create to complete the step.
5. The new record will now be visible in the list of records.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Edit Condition Category Master
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Condition Category master from the drop-down list and click on Go.
3. All existing records under this Master will be listed. To edit a record, click on
the button, which is an edit button.
4. The Edit Condition Category master window appears. Update Name and
then click on Update to complete the step.
5. The changes will now be reflected in the list.
Changing the Status
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Condition Category master from the drop-down list and click on
Go.
3. All existing records under this Master will be listed. To change the status of
a record, click on icon, which is a status icon. A pop-window will appear
asking for confirmation. Click OK to complete the step.
4. The record will now indicate an inactive status with the icon.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Deleting the record
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Condition Category master from the drop-down list and click on
Go.
3. All existing records under this Master will be listed. To delete a record,
click on icon, which is a delete icon. A pop-window will appear asking
for confirmation. click on OK. Another pop-up window will appear
displaying the message "Deleted Successfully." This completes the step.
4. The deleted record will no longer appear in the list.
7.12.1.5 Condition Master
The master data added here will appear in Engg > Projects > Project / Sub
Project > Work Order > Work Order (WO) No. > Terms and Conditions
Creating Condition Master
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Condition Master from the drop-down list and click Go.
3. Click on Create on the top right. The Condition Master window will appear.
4. Specify the Name, Remarks, and select Condition Category. Then, click on
Create to complete the step.
5. The new record will now be visible in the list of records.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Edit Condition Master
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Condition Master from the drop-down list and click on Go.
3. All existing records under this Master will be listed. To edit a record, click on
the button, which is an edit button.
4. The Edit Condition Master window appears. Update Name, Remarks, and
select Condition Category. Then, click on Update to complete the step.
5. The changes will now be reflected in the list.
Changing the Status
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Condition Master from the drop-down list and click on Go.
3. All existing records under this Master will be listed. To change the status of
a record, click on icon, which is a status icon. A pop-window will appear
asking for confirmation. Click OK to complete the step.
4. The record will now indicate an inactive status with the icon.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Deleting the record
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Condition Master from the drop-down list and click on Go.
3. All existing records under this Master will be listed. To delete a record,
click on icon, which is a delete icon. A pop-window will appear asking
for confirmation. click on OK. Another pop-up window will appear
displaying the message "Deleted Successfully." This completes the step.
4. The deleted record will no longer appear in the list.
7.12.1.6 Constitutions Type Master
The master data added here will appear in
1. Engg > Masters > Contractor > Constitution
2. Engg > Masters > Contracting Client > Vendor Type
Creating Condition Type Master
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Condition Type Master from the drop-down list and click Go.
3. Click on Create on the top right. The Condition Type Master window will
appear.
4. Specify the Name and click on Create to complete the step.
5. The new record will now be visible in the list of records.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Edit Condition Type Master
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Condition Type Master from the drop-down list and click on Go.
3. All existing records under this Master will be listed. To edit a record, click on
the button, which is an edit button.
4. The Edit Condition Type Master window appears. Update Name and then
click on Update to complete the step.
5. The changes will now be reflected in the list.
Changing the Status
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Condition Type Master from the drop-down list and click on Go.
3. All existing records under this Master will be listed. To change the status of
a record, click on icon, which is a status icon. A pop-window will appear
asking for confirmation. Click OK to complete the step.
4. The record will now indicate an inactive status with the icon.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Deleting the record
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Condition Type Master from the drop-down list and click on Go.
3. All existing records under this Master will be listed. To delete a record,
click on icon, which is a delete icon. A pop-window will appear asking
for confirmation. click on OK. Another pop-up window will appear
displaying the message "Deleted Successfully." This completes the step.
4. The deleted record will no longer appear in the list.
7.12.1.7 Contract Credit Note Reason Master
The master data added here will appear in Engg > Billing > Contracting > Credit
Note > Credit Note List > Create Credit Note > Reason Type
Creating Contract Credit Note Reason Master
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Contract Credit Note Reason Master from the drop-down list and
click Go.
3. Click on Create on the top right. The Contract Credit Note Reason Master
window will appear.
4. Specify the Name and Remarks. Then, click on Create to complete the step.
5. The new record will now be visible in the list of records.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Edit Contract Credit Note Reason Master
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Contract Credit Note Reason Master from the drop-down list and
click on Go.
3. All existing records under this Master will be listed. To edit a record, click on
the button, which is an edit button.
4. The Edit Contract Credit Note Reason Master window appears. Update
Name, Remarks, and then click on Update to complete the step.
5. The changes will now be reflected in the list.
Changing the Status
5. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
6. Select Contract Credit Note Reason Master from the drop-down list and
click on Go.
7. All existing records under this Master will be listed. To change the status of
a record, click on icon, which is a status icon. A pop-window will appear
asking for confirmation. Click OK to complete the step.
8. The record will now indicate an inactive status with the icon.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Deleting the record
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Contract Credit Note Reason Master from the drop-down list
and click on Go.
3. All existing records under this Master will be listed. To delete a record,
click on icon, which is a delete icon. A pop-window will appear asking
for confirmation. click on OK. Another pop-up window will appear
displaying the message "Deleted Successfully." This completes the step.
4. The deleted record will no longer appear in the list.
7.12.1.8 Contracting Competitor
The master data added here will appear in Engg > Contracting > Leads > Create
Leads > Competitor
Creating CONTRACTING COMPETITOR Master
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select CONTRACTING COMPETITOR master from the drop-down list and
click Go.
3. Click on Create on the top right. The Contracting Competitor master
window will appear.
4. Specify the Competitor Name and then click on Create to complete the
step.
5. The new record will now be visible in the list of records.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Edit Contracting Competitor Master
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Contracting Competitor master from the drop-down list and click on
Go.
3. All existing records under this Master will be listed. To edit a record, click on
the button, which is an edit button.
4. The Edit Contracting Competitor master window appears. Update Name
and then click on Update to complete the step.
5. The changes will now be reflected in the list.
Changing the Status
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Contracting Competitor master from the drop-down list and click
on Go.
3. All existing records under this Master will be listed. To change the status of
a record, click on icon, which is a status icon. A pop-window will appear
asking for confirmation. Click OK to complete the step.
4. The record will now indicate an inactive status with the icon.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Deleting the record
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Contracting Competitor master from the drop-down list and
click on Go.
3. All existing records under this Master will be listed. To delete a record,
click on icon, which is a delete icon. A pop-window will appear asking
for confirmation. click on OK. Another pop-up window will appear
displaying the message "Deleted Successfully." This completes the step.
4. The deleted record will no longer appear in the list.
7.12.1.9 Contracting Contact Method
The master data added here will appear in Engg > Contracting > Contacts >
Contacts tab >Contact Type
Creating Contracting Contact Method Master
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Contracting Contact Method master from the drop-down list and
click Go.
3. Click on Create on the top right. The Contracting Contact Method master
window will appear.
4. Specify the Contact Method and click on Create to complete the step.
5. The new record will now be visible in the list of records.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Edit Contracting Contact Method Master
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Contracting Contact Method master from the drop-down list and
click on Go.
3. All existing records under this Master will be listed. To edit a record, click on
the button, which is an edit button.
4. The Edit Contracting Contact Method master window appears. Update
Contact Method and click on Update to complete the step.
5. The changes will now be reflected in the list.
Changing the Status
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Contracting Contact Method master from the drop-down list and
click on Go.
3. All existing records under this Master will be listed. To change the status of
a record, click on icon, which is a status icon. A pop-window will appear
asking for confirmation. Click OK to complete the step.
4. The record will now indicate an inactive status with the icon.
Deleting the record
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Contracting Contact Method master from the drop-down list
and click on Go.
3. All existing records under this Master will be listed. To delete a record,
click on icon, which is a delete icon. A pop-window will appear asking
for confirmation. click on OK. Another pop-up window will appear
displaying the message "Deleted Successfully." This completes the step.
4. The deleted record will no longer appear in the list.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
7.12.1.10 Contracting Contact Type
The master data added here will appear in Engg > Contracting > Contacts >
Create Contacts > Contact Type
Creating Contracting Contact Type Master
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Contracting Contact Type master from the drop-down list and click
Go.
3. Click on Create on the top right. The Contracting Contact Type master
window will appear.
4. Specify the Contact Type and click on Create to complete the step.
5. The new record will now be visible in the list of records.
Edit Contracting Contact Type Master
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Contracting Contact Type master from the drop-down list and click
on Go.
3. All existing records under this Master will be listed. To edit a record, click on
the button, which is an edit button.
4. The Edit Contracting Contact Type master window appears. Update
Contact Type and then click on Update to complete the step.
5. The changes will now be reflected in the list.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Changing the Status
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Contracting Contact Type master from the drop-down list and click
on Go.
3. All existing records under this Master will be listed. To change the status of
a record, click on icon, which is a status icon. A pop-window will appear
asking for confirmation. Click OK to complete the step.
4. The record will now indicate an inactive status with the icon.
Deleting the record
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Contracting Contact Type master from the drop-down list and
click on Go.
3. All existing records under this Master will be listed. To delete a record,
click on icon, which is a delete icon. A pop-window will appear asking
for confirmation. Click on OK. Another pop-up window will appear
displaying the message "Deleted Successfully." This completes the step.
4. The deleted record will no longer appear in the list.
7.12.1.11 Contracting Industry
The master data added here will appear in Engg > Contracting > Leads > Create
Leads > Industry
Creating Contracting Industry Master
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Contracting Industry master from the drop-down list and click Go.
3. Click on Create on the top right. The Contracting Industry master window
will appear.
4. Specify the Industry Name and click on Create to complete the step.
5. The new record will now be visible in the list of records.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Edit Contracting Industry Master
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Contracting Industry master from the drop-down list and click on Go.
3. All existing records under this Master will be listed. To edit a record, click on
the button, which is an edit button.
4. The Edit Contracting Industry master window appears. Update Industry
Name and then click on Update to complete the step.
5. The changes will now be reflected in the list.
Changing the Status
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Contracting Industry master from the drop-down list and click on
Go.
3. All existing records under this Master will be listed. To change the status of
a record, click on icon, which is a status icon. A pop-window will appear
asking for confirmation. Click OK to complete the step.
4. The record will now indicate an inactive status with the icon.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Deleting the record
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Contracting Industry master from the drop-down list and click on
Go.
3. All existing records under this master will be listed. To delete a record,
click on icon, which is a delete icon. A pop-window will appear asking
for confirmation. click on OK. Another pop-up window will appear
displaying the message "Deleted Successfully." This completes the step.
4. The deleted record will no longer appear in the list.
7.12.1.12 Contracting Industry Type
The master data added here will appear in Engg > Contracting > Leads > Create
Leads > Type
Creating Contracting Industry Type Master
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Contracting Industry Type master from the drop-down list and click
Go.
3. Click on Create on the top right. The Contracting Industry Type master
window will appear.
4. Specify the Industry Type and click on Create to complete the step.
5. The new record will now be visible in the list of records.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Edit Contracting Industry Type Master
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Contracting Industry Type master from the drop-down list and click
on Go.
3. All existing records under this master will be listed. To edit a record, click on
the button, which is an edit button.
4. The Edit Contracting Industry Type master window appears. Update
Industry Type and then click on Update to complete the step.
5. The changes will now be reflected in the list.
Changing the Status
5. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
6. Select Contracting Industry Type master from the drop-down list and click
on Go.
7. All existing records under this Master will be listed. To change the status of
a record, click on icon, which is a status icon. A pop-window will appear
asking for confirmation. Click OK to complete the step.
8. The record will now indicate an inactive status with the icon.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Deleting the record
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Contracting Industry Type master from the drop-down list and
click on Go.
3. All existing records under this Master will be listed. To delete a record,
click on icon, which is a delete icon. A pop-window will appear asking
for confirmation. click on OK. Another pop-up window will appear
displaying the message "Deleted Successfully." This completes the step.
4. The deleted record will no longer appear in the list.
7.12.1.13 Contracting Job Stage
The master data added here will appear in Engg > Contracting > Jobs > Job
Details > Stage
Creating Contracting Job Stage Master
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Contracting Job Stage master from the drop-down list and click Go.
3. Click on Create on the top right. The Contracting Job Stage master window
will appear.
4. Specify the Stage Name and Stage Percentage and click on Create to
complete the step.
5. The new record will now be visible in the list of records.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Edit Contracting Job Stage Master
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Contracting Job Stage master from the drop-down list and click on
Go.
3. All existing records under this Master will be listed. To edit a record, click on
the button, which is an edit button.
4. The Edit Contracting Job Stage master window appears. Update Stage
Name and Stage Percentage and then click on Update to complete the
step.
5. The changes will now be reflected in the list.
Changing the Status
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Contracting Job Stage master from the drop-down list and click on
Go.
3. All existing records under this Master will be listed. To change the status of
a record, click on icon, which is a status icon. A pop-window will appear
asking for confirmation. Click OK to complete the step.
4. The record will now indicate an inactive status with the icon.
Deleting the record
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Contracting Job Stage master from the drop-down list and click
on Go.
3. All existing records under this Master will be listed. To delete a record,
click on icon, which is a delete icon. A pop-window will appear asking
for confirmation. Click on OK. Another pop-up window will appear
displaying the message "Deleted Successfully." This completes the step.
4. The deleted record will no longer appear in the list.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
7.12.1.14 Contracting Job Status
The master data added here will appear in Engg > Contracting > Jobs > Job
Details > Status
Creating Contracting Job Status Master
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Contracting Job Status master from the drop-down list and click Go.
3. Click on Create on the top right. The Contracting Job Status master window
will appear.
4. Specify the Status Name and click on Create to complete the step.
5. The new record will now be visible in the list of records.
Edit Contracting Job Status Master
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Contracting Job Status master from the drop-down list and click on
Go.
3. All existing records under this master will be listed. To edit a record, click on
the button, which is an edit button.
4. The Edit Contracting Job Status master window appears. Update Status
Name and then click on Update to complete the step.
5. The changes will now be reflected in the list.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Changing the Status
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Contracting Job Status master from the drop-down list and click on
Go.
3. All existing records under this Master will be listed. To change the status of
a record, click on icon, which is a status icon. A pop-window will appear
asking for confirmation. Click OK to complete the step.
4. The record will now indicate an inactive status with the icon.
Deleting the record
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Contracting Job Status master from the drop-down list and click
on Go.
3. All existing records under this Master will be listed. To delete a record,
click on icon, which is a delete icon. A pop-window will appear asking
for confirmation. click on OK. Another pop-up window will appear
displaying the message "Deleted Successfully." This completes the step.
4. The deleted record will no longer appear in the list.
7.12.1.15 Contracting Job Type
The master data added here appear in The master data added here will appear in
Engg > Contracting > Jobs > Job Details > Type
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Creating Contracting Job Type Master
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Contracting Job Type master from the drop-down list and click Go.
3. Click on Create on the top right. The Contracting Job Type master window
will appear.
4. Specify the Job Type and click on Create to complete the step.
5. The new record will now be visible in the list of records.
Edit Contracting Job Type Master
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Contracting Job Type master from the drop-down list and click on
Go.
3. All existing records under this Master will be listed. To edit a record, click on
the button, which is an edit button.
4. The Edit Contracting Job Type master window appears. Update Job Type
and click on Update to complete the step.
5. The changes will now be reflected in the list.
Changing the Status
5. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
6. Select Contracting Job Type master from the drop-down list and click on
Go.
7. All existing records under this Master will be listed. To change the status of
a record, click on icon, which is a status icon. A pop-window will appear
asking for confirmation. Click OK to complete the step.
8. The record will now indicate an inactive status with the icon.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Deleting the record
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Contracting Job Type master from the drop-down list and click
on Go.
3. All existing records under this Master will be listed. To delete a record,
click on icon, which is a delete icon. A pop-window will appear asking
for confirmation. click on OK. Another pop-up window will appear
displaying the message "Deleted Successfully." This completes the step.
4. The deleted record will no longer appear in the list.
7.12.1.16 Contracting Lead/Client Stage
The master data added here appear in Engg > Contracting > Leads > Create
Leads > Stage
Creating Contracting Lead/Client Stage Master
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Contracting Lead/Client Stage master from the drop-down list and
click Go.
3. Click on Create on the top right. The Contracting Lead/Client Stage master
window will appear.
4. Specify the Stage Name and Stage Percentage and click on Create to
complete the step.
5. The new record will now be visible in the list of records.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Edit Contracting Lead/Client Stage Master
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Contracting Lead/Client Stage master from the drop-down list and
click on Go.
3. All existing records under this master will be listed. To edit a record, click on
the button, which is an edit button.
4. The Edit Contracting Lead/Client Stage master window appears. Update
Stage Name and Stage Percentage and click on Update to complete the
step.
5. The changes will now be reflected in the list.
Changing the Status
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Contracting Lead/Client Stage master from the drop-down list and
click on Go.
3. All existing records under this master will be listed. To change the status of
a record, click on icon, which is a status icon. A pop-window will appear
asking for confirmation. Click OK to complete the step.
4. The record will now indicate an inactive status with the icon.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Deleting the record
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Contracting Lead/Client Stage master from the drop-down list
and click on Go.
3. All existing records under this Master will be listed. To delete a record,
click on icon, which is a delete icon. A pop-window will appear asking
for confirmation. click on OK. Another pop-up window will appear
displaying the message "Deleted Successfully." This completes the step.
4. The deleted record will no longer appear in the list.
7.12.1.17 Contracting Reason Type
The master data added here will appear in Engg > Contracting > Jobs > Job
Details > Reason Type
Creating Contracting Reason Type Master
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Contracting Reason Type master from the drop-down list and click
Go.
3. Click on Create on the top right. The Contracting Reason Type master
window will appear.
4. Specify the Reason Type and click on Create to complete the step.
5. The new record will now be visible in the list of records.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Edit Contracting Reason Type Master
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Contracting Reason Type master from the drop-down list and click
on Go.
3. All existing records under this Master will be listed. To edit a record, click on
the button, which is an edit button.
4. The Edit Contracting Reason Type master window appears. Update
Reason Type and click on Update to complete the step.
5. The changes will now be reflected in the list.
Changing the Status
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Contracting Reason Type master from the drop-down list and click
on Go.
3. All existing records under this Master will be listed. To change the status of
a record, click on icon, which is a status icon. A pop-window will appear
asking for confirmation. Click OK to complete the step.
4. The record will now indicate an inactive status with the icon.
Deleting the record
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Contracting Reason Type master from the drop-down list and
click on Go.
3. All existing records under this master will be listed. To delete a record,
click on icon, which is a delete icon. A pop-window will appear asking
for confirmation. click on OK. Another pop-up window will appear
displaying the message "Deleted Successfully." This completes the step.
4. The deleted record will no longer appear in the list.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
7.12.1.18 Contracting Source
The master data added here will appear in Engg > Contracting > Leads > Create
Leads > Source
Creating Contracting Source Master
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Contracting Source master from the drop-down list and click Go.
3. Click on Create on the top right. The Contracting Source master window will
appear.
4. Specify the Source Name and click on Create to complete the step.
5. The new record will now be visible in the list of records.
Edit Contracting Source Master
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Contracting Source master from the drop-down list and click on Go.
3. All existing records under this master will be listed. To edit a record, click on
the button, which is an edit button.
4. The Edit Contracting Source master window appears. Update Source
Name and click on Update to complete the step.
5. The changes will now be reflected in the list.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Changing the Status
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Contracting Source master from the drop-down list and click on Go.
3. All existing records under this Master will be listed. To change the status of
a record, click on icon, which is a status icon. A pop-window will appear
asking for confirmation. Click OK to complete the step.
4. The record will now indicate an inactive status with the icon.
Deleting the record
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Contracting Source master from the drop-down list and click on
Go.
3. All existing records under this Master will be listed. To delete a record,
click on icon, which is a delete icon. A pop-window will appear asking
for confirmation. click on OK. Another pop-up window will appear
displaying the message "Deleted Successfully." This completes the step.
4. The deleted record will no longer appear in the list.
7.12.1.19 Contractor Ranks
The master data added here will appear in Engg > Masters > Contractor > Rank
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Creating Contracting Ranks Master
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Contracting Ranks master from the drop-down list and click Go.
3. Click on Create on the top right. The Contracting Ranks master window will
appear.
4. Specify the Name and click on Create to complete the step.
5. The new record will now be visible in the list of records.
Edit Contracting Ranks Master
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Contracting Ranks master from the drop-down list and click on Go.
3. All existing records under this master will be listed. To edit a record, click on
the button, which is an edit button.
4. The Edit Contracting Ranks master window appears. Update Name and
click on Update to complete the step.
5. The changes will now be reflected in the list.
Changing the Status
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Contracting Ranks master from the drop-down list and click on Go.
3. All existing records under this master will be listed. To change the status of
a record, click on icon, which is a status icon. A pop-window will appear
asking for confirmation. Click OK to complete the step.
4. The record will now indicate an inactive status with the icon.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Deleting the record
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Contracting Ranks master from the drop-down list and click on
Go.
3. All existing records under this master will be listed. To delete a record,
click on icon, which is a delete icon. A pop-window will appear asking
for confirmation. click on OK. Another pop-up window will appear
displaying the message "Deleted Successfully." This completes the step.
4. The deleted record will no longer appear in the list.
7.12.1.20 Debit Note Reason Type Master
The master data added here will appear in Engg > Billing > Debit Note > Create
Debit Note > Reason Type
Creating Debit Note Reason Type Master
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Debit Note Reason Type Master from the drop-down list and click
Go.
3. Click on Create on the top right. The Debit Note Reason Type Master
window will appear.
4. Specify the Name and click on Create to complete the step.
5. The new record will now be visible in the list of records.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Edit Debit Note Reason Type Master
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Debit Note Reason Type Master from the drop-down list and click
on Go.
3. All existing records under this master will be listed. To edit a record, click on
the button, which is an edit button.
4. The Edit Debit Note Reason Type Master window appears. Update Name
and click on Update to complete the step.
5. The changes will now be reflected in the list.
Changing the Status
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Debit Note Reason Type Master from the drop-down list and click
on Go.
3. All existing records under this master will be listed. To change the status of
a record, click on icon, which is a status icon. A pop-window will appear
asking for confirmation. Click OK to complete the step.
4. The record will now indicate an inactive status with the icon.
Deleting the record
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Debit Note Reason Type Master from the drop-down list and
click on Go.
3. All existing records under this Master will be listed. To delete a record,
click on icon, which is a delete icon. A pop-window will appear asking
for confirmation. click on OK. Another pop-up window will appear
displaying the message "Deleted Successfully." This completes the step.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
4. The deleted record will no longer appear in the list.
7.12.1.21 Engg. Floor Type Master
The master data added here will appear in Engg > Utilities > Bulk Upload > Bulk
Assign PLC > Floor Type
Creating Engg. Floor Type Master
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Engg. Floor Type Master from the drop-down list and click Go.
3. Click on Create on the top right. The Engg. Floor Type Master window will
appear.
4. Specify the Name and click on Create to complete the step.
5. The new record will now be visible in the list of records.
Edit Engg. Floor Type Master
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Engg. Floor Type Master from the drop-down list and click on Go.
3. All existing records under this master will be listed. To edit a record, click on
the button, which is an edit button.
4. The Edit Engg. Floor Type Master window appears. Update Name and
click on Update to complete the step.
5. The changes will now be reflected in the list.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Changing the Status
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Engg. Floor Type Master from the drop-down list and click on Go.
3. All existing records under this master will be listed. To change the status of
a record, click on icon, which is a status icon. A pop-window will appear
asking for confirmation. Click OK to complete the step.
4. The record will now indicate an inactive status with the icon.
Deleting the record
1. Navigate to Engg>>Masters>>Master Tables.
2. Select Engg. Floor Type Master from the drop-down list and click on
Go.
3. All existing records under this master will be listed. To delete a record,
click on icon, which is a delete icon. A pop-window will appear asking
for confirmation. Click on OK. Another pop-up window will appear
displaying the message "Deleted Successfully." This completes the step.
4. The deleted record will no longer appear in the list.
7.12.1.22 Material Reconciliation Reason Master.
The master data added here will appear in Engg > Inventory > Material
Reconciliation > Create Material Reconciliation > Reason
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Creating Material Reconciliation Reason Master
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Material Reconciliation Reason Master from the drop-down list and
click Go.
3. Click on Create on the top right. The Material Reconciliation Reason
Master window will appear.
4. Specify the Name and click on Create to complete the step.
5. The new record will now be visible in the list of records.
Edit Material Reconciliation Reason Master
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Material Reconciliation Reason Master from the drop-down list and
click on Go.
3. All existing records under this master will be listed. To edit a record, click on
the button, which is an edit button.
4. The Edit Material Reconciliation Reason Master window appears. Update
Name and click on Update to complete the step.
5. The changes will now be reflected in the list.
Changing the Status
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Material Reconciliation Reason Master from the drop-down list
and click on Go.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
3. All existing records under this master will be listed. To change the status of
a record, click on icon, which is a status icon. A pop-window will appear
asking for confirmation. Click OK to complete the step.
4. The record will now indicate an inactive status with the icon.
Deleting the record
1. Navigate to Engg>>Masters>>Master Tables.
2. Select Material Reconciliation Reason Master from the drop-down list
and click on Go.
3. All existing records under this Master will be listed. To delete a record,
click on icon, which is a delete icon. A pop-window will appear asking
for confirmation. Click on OK. Another pop-up window will appear
displaying the message "Deleted Successfully." This completes the step.
4. The deleted record will no longer appear in the list.
7.12.1.23 Payment Schedule Manual Event Master
The master data added here will appear in
Engg > Projects > Project / Sub Project > Work Order > Payment Schedule >
Ament Manual Event
Creating Payment Schedule Manual Event Master
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Payment Schedule Manual Event Master from the drop-down list
and click Go.
3. Click on Create on the top right. The Payment Schedule Manual Event
Master window will appear.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
4. Specify the Name and click on Create to complete the step.
5. The new record will now be visible in the list of records.
Edit Payment Schedule Manual Event Master
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Payment Schedule Manual Event Master from the drop-down list
and click on Go.
3. All existing records under this master will be listed. To edit a record, click on
the button, which is an edit button.
4. The Edit Payment Schedule Manual Event Master window appears.
Update Name and click on Update to complete the step.
5. The changes will now be reflected in the list.
Changing the Status
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Payment Schedule Manual Event Master from the drop-down list
and click on Go.
3. All existing records under this master will be listed. To change the status of
a record, click on icon, which is a status icon. A pop-window will appear
asking for confirmation. Click OK to complete the step.
4. The record will now indicate an inactive status with the icon.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Deleting the record
1. Navigate to Engg>>Masters>>Master Tables.
2. Select Payment Schedule Manual Event Master from the drop-down
list and click on Go.
3. All existing records under this Master will be listed. To delete a record,
click on icon, which is a delete icon. A pop-window will appear asking
for confirmation. Click on OK. Another pop-up window will appear
displaying the message "Deleted Successfully." This completes the step.
4. The deleted record will no longer appear in the list.
7.12.1.24 Policy Periodicity Master
The master data added here will appear in
Creating Policy Periodicity Master Master
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Policy Periodicity Master from the drop-down list and click Go.
3. Click on Create on the top right. The Policy Periodicity Master window will
appear.
4. Specify the Name and click on Create to complete the step.
5. The new record will now be visible in the list of records.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Edit Policy Periodicity Master Master
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Policy Periodicity Master from the drop-down list and click on Go.
3. All existing records under this master will be listed. To edit a record, click on
the button, which is an edit button.
4. The Edit Policy Periodicity Master window appears. Update Name and
click on Update to complete the step.
5. The changes will now be reflected in the list.
Changing the Status
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Policy Periodicity Master from the drop-down list and click on Go.
3. All existing records under this master will be listed. To change the status of
a record, click on icon, which is a status icon. A pop-window will appear
asking for confirmation. Click OK to complete the step.
4. The record will now indicate an inactive status with the icon.
Deleting the record
1. Navigate to Engg>>Masters>>Master Tables.
2. Select Policy Periodicity Master from the drop-down list and click on
Go.
3. All existing records under this Master will be listed. To delete a record,
click on icon, which is a delete icon. A pop-window will appear asking
for confirmation. Click on OK. Another pop-up window will appear
displaying the message "Deleted Successfully." This completes the step.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
4. The deleted record will no longer appear in the list.
7.12.1.25 Project Staffing Roles
The master data added here will appear in Engg > Projects > Sub Project >
Staffing > Role
Creating Project Staffing Roles Master
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Project Staffing Roles Master from the drop-down list and click Go.
3. Click on Create on the top right. The Project Staffing Roles Master window
will appear.
4. Specify the Name and Application Role and click on Create to complete the
step.
5. The new record will now be visible in the list of records.
Edit Project Staffing Roles Master
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Project Staffing Roles Master from the drop-down list and click on
Go.
3. All existing records under this master will be listed. To edit a record, click on
the button, which is an edit button.
4. The Edit Project Staffing Roles Master window appears. Update Name
and Application Role and click on Update to complete the step.
5. The changes will now be reflected in the list.
Changing the Status
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Project Staffing Roles Master from the drop-down list and click on
Go.
3. All existing records under this master will be listed. To change the status of
a record, click on icon, which is a status icon. A pop-window will appear
asking for confirmation. Click OK to complete the step.
4. The record will now indicate an inactive status with the icon.
Deleting the record
1. Navigate to Engg>>Masters>>Master Tables.
2. Select Project Staffing Roles Master from the drop-down list and click
on Go.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
3. All existing records under this master will be listed. To delete a record,
click on icon, which is a delete icon. A pop-window will appear asking
for confirmation. click on OK. Another pop-up window will appear
displaying the message "Deleted Successfully." This completes the step.
4. The deleted record will no longer appear in the list.
7.12.1.26 SAC Master
The master data added here will appear in Engg > Masters > Master Tables >
Work Category Type Masters
SAC Master also reflects in many other pages of the In4Suite application.
Creating SAC Master
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select SAC Master from the drop-down list and click Go.
3. Click on Create on the top right. The SAC Master window will appear.
4. Specify the SAC and click on Create to complete the step.
5. The new record will now be visible in the list of records.
Edit SAC Master
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select SAC Master from the drop-down list and click on Go.
3. All existing records under this master will be listed. To edit a record, click on
the button, which is an edit button.
4. The Edit SAC Master window appears. Update SAC and click on Update to
complete the step.
5. The changes will now be reflected in the list.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Changing the Status
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select SAC Master from the drop-down list and click on Go.
3. All existing records under this master will be listed. To change the status of
a record, click on icon, which is a status icon. A pop-window will appear
asking for confirmation. Click OK to complete the step.
4. The record will now indicate an inactive status with the icon.
Deleting the record
1. Navigate to Engg>>Masters>>Master Tables.
2. Select SAC Master from the drop-down list and click on Go.
3. All existing records under this master will be listed. To delete a record,
click on icon, which is a delete icon. A pop-window will appear asking
for confirmation. Click on OK. Another pop-up window will appear
displaying the message "Deleted Successfully." This completes the step.
4. The deleted record will no longer appear in the list.
7.12.1.27 Service Indent TAT Type Master
The master data added here will appear in Engg > Inventory > Service Indent >
Create Service Indent > Service Indent Type
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Creating Service Indent TAT Type Master
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Service Indent TAT Type Master from the drop-down list and click
Go.
3. Click on Create on the top right. The Service Indent TAT Type Master
window will appear.
4. Specify the Name and TAT Period and click on Create to complete the step.
5. The new record will now be visible in the list of records.
Edit Service Indent TAT Type Master
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Service Indent TAT Type Master from the drop-down list and click
on Go.
3. All existing records under this master will be listed. To edit a record, click on
the button, which is an edit button.
4. The Edit Service Indent TAT Type Master window appears. Update Name
and TAT Period and click on Update to complete the step.
5. The changes will now be reflected in the list.
Changing the Status
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Service Indent TAT Type Master from the drop-down list and click
on Go.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
3. All existing records under this master will be listed. To change the status of
a record, click on icon, which is a status icon. A pop-window will appear
asking for confirmation. Click OK to complete the step.
4. The record will now indicate an inactive status with the icon.
Deleting the record
1. Navigate to Engg>>Masters>>Master Tables.
2. Select Service Indent TAT Type Master from the drop-down list and
click on Go.
3. All existing records under this master will be listed. To delete a record,
click on icon, which is a delete icon. A pop-window will appear asking
for confirmation. Click on OK. Another pop-up window will appear
displaying the message "Deleted Successfully." This completes the step.
4. The deleted record will no longer appear in the list.
7.12.1.28 Tender Contract Master
The master data added here will appear in Engg > Tender Document > Create
Tender Document > Contract Type
Creating Tender Contract Master
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Tender Contract Master from the drop-down list and click Go.
3. Click on Create on the top right. The Tender Contract Master window will
appear.
4. Specify the Name and click on Create to complete the step.
5. The new record will now be visible in the list of records.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Edit Tender Contract Master
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Tender Contract Master from the drop-down list and click on Go.
3. All existing records under this master will be listed. To edit a record, click on
the button, which is an edit button.
4. The Edit Tender Contract Master window appears. Update Name and click
on Update to complete the step.
5. The changes will now be reflected in the list.
Changing the Status
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Tender Contract Master from the drop-down list and click on Go.
3. All existing records under this master will be listed. To change the status of
a record, click on icon, which is a status icon. A pop-window will appear
asking for confirmation. Click OK to complete the step.
4. The record will now indicate an inactive status with the icon.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Deleting the record
1. Navigate to Engg>>Masters>>Master Tables.
2. Select Tender Contract Master from the drop-down list and click on Go.
3. All existing records under this master will be listed. To delete a record,
click on icon, which is a delete icon. A pop-window will appear asking
for confirmation. Click on OK. Another pop-up window will appear
displaying the message "Deleted Successfully." This completes the step.
4. The deleted record will no longer appear in the list.
7.12.1.29 Tender Document Checklist Master
The master data added here will appear in Engg > Tender Document > Tender
Document No > Checklist Details > Checklist
Creating Tender Document Checklist Master
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Tender Document Checklist Master from the drop-down list and
click Go.
3. Click on Create on the top right. The Tender Document Checklist Master
window will appear.
4. Specify the Name and click on Create to complete the step.
5. The new record will now be visible in the list of records.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Edit Tender Document Checklist Master
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Tender Document Checklist Master from the drop-down list and
click on Go.
3. All existing records under this master will be listed. To edit a record, click on
the button, which is an edit button.
4. The Edit Tender Document Checklist Master window appears. Update
Name and click on Update to complete the step.
5. The changes will now be reflected in the list.
Changing the Status
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Tender Document Checklist Master from the drop-down list and
click on Go.
3. All existing records under this master will be listed. To change the status of
a record, click on icon, which is a status icon. A pop-window will appear
asking for confirmation. Click OK to complete the step.
4. The record will now indicate an inactive status with the icon.
Deleting the record
1. Navigate to Engg>>Masters>>Master Tables.
2. Select Tender Document Checklist Master from the drop-down list and
click on Go.
3. All existing records under this master will be listed. To delete a record,
click on icon, which is a delete icon. A pop-window will appear asking
for confirmation. Click on OK. Another pop-up window will appear
displaying the message "Deleted Successfully." This completes the step.
4. The deleted record will no longer appear in the list.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
7.12.1.30 Tender Qualification Master
The master data added here will appear in Engg > Tender Receipt > Deviation
Creating Tender Qualification Master
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Tender Qualification Master from the drop-down list and click Go.
3. Click on Create on the top right. The Tender Qualification Master window
will appear.
4. Specify the Qualification and select Qualification Type from the drop-down
list. Then, click on Create to complete the step.
5. The new record will now be visible in the list of records.
Edit Tender Qualification Master
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Tender Qualification Master from the drop-down list and click on
Go.
3. All existing records under this master will be listed. To edit a record, click on
the button, which is an edit button.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
4. The Edit Tender Qualification Master window appears. Update
Qualification and Qualification Type and then click on Update to complete
the step.
5. The changes will now be reflected in the list.
Changing the Status
5. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
6. Select Tender Qualification Master from the drop-down list and click on
Go.
7. All existing records under this master will be listed. To change the status of
a record, click on icon, which is a status icon. A pop-window will appear
asking for confirmation. Click OK to complete the step.
8. The record will now indicate an inactive status with the icon.
Deleting the record
5. Navigate to Engg>>Masters>>Master Tables.
6. Select Tender Qualification Master from the drop-down list and click
on Go.
7. All existing records under this master will be listed. To delete a record,
click on icon, which is a delete icon. A pop-window will appear asking
for confirmation. Click on OK. Another pop-up window will appear
displaying the message "Deleted Successfully." This completes the step.
8. The deleted record will no longer appear in the list.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
7.12.1.31 Tender Type Master
The master data added here will appear in Engg > Tender Document > Tender
Document List > Tender Document List > Contract Type
Creating Tender Type Master
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Tender Type Master from the drop-down list and click Go.
3. Click on Create on the top right. The Tender Type Master window will
appear.
4. Specify the Name and click on Create to complete the step.
5. The new record will now be visible in the list of records.
Edit Tender Type Master
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Tender Type Master from the drop-down list and click on Go.
3. All existing records under this master will be listed. To edit a record, click on
the button, which is an edit button.
4. The Edit Tender Type Master window appears. Update Name and click on
Update to complete the step.
5. The changes will now be reflected in the list.
Changing the Status
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
2. Select Tender Type Master from the drop-down list and click on Go.
3. All existing records under this master will be listed. To change the status of
a record, click on icon, which is a status icon. A pop-window will appear
asking for confirmation. Click OK to complete the step.
4. The record will now indicate an inactive status with the icon.
Deleting the record
1. Navigate to Engg>>Masters>>Master Tables.
2. Select Tender Type Master from the drop-down list and click on Go.
3. All existing records under this master will be listed. To delete a record,
click on icon, which is a delete icon. A pop-window will appear asking
for confirmation. Click on OK. Another pop-up window will appear
displaying the message "Deleted Successfully." This completes the step.
4. The deleted record will no longer appear in the list.
7.12.1.32 Unit Type Master
The master data added here will appear in Engg > Projects > Sub Project > Stock
> Units >Add Unit > Unit Type
Creating Unit Type Master
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Unit Type Master from the drop-down list and click Go.
3. Click on Create on the top right. The Unit Type Master window will appear.
4. Specify the Name and Description and then click on Create to complete the
step.
5. The new record will now be visible in the list of records.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Edit Unit Type Master
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Unit Type Master from the drop-down list and click on Go.
3. All existing records under this master will be listed. To edit a record, click on
the button, which is an edit button.
4. The Edit Unit Type Master window appears. Update Name and
Description and then click on Update to complete the step.
5. The changes will now be reflected in the list.
Changing the Status
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Unit Type Master from the drop-down list and click on Go.
3. All existing records under this master will be listed. To change the status of
a record, click on icon, which is a status icon. A pop-window will appear
asking for confirmation. Click OK to complete the step.
4. The record will now indicate an inactive status with the icon.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Deleting the record
1. Navigate to Engg>>Masters>>Master Tables.
2. Select Unit Type Master from the drop-down list and click on Go.
3. All existing records under this master will be listed. To delete a record,
click on icon, which is a delete icon. A pop-window will appear asking
for confirmation. Click on OK. Another pop-up window will appear
displaying the message "Deleted Successfully." This completes the step.
4. The deleted record will no longer appear in the list.
7.12.1.33 Work Category Type Master
The master data added here will appear in Engg > Projects > Sub Project > Work
Order > Create Work Order > Work Category
Creating Work Category Type Master
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Work Category Type Master from the drop-down list and click Go.
3. Click on Create on the top right. The Work Category Type Master window
will appear.
4. Specify the Name, Short Name, and Benchmark Lead Time. Select Parent
and SAC, then click on Create to complete the step.
5. The new record will now be visible in the list of records.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Edit Work Category Type Master
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Work Category Type Master from the drop-down list and click on
Go.
3. All existing records under this master will be listed. To edit a record, click on
the button, which is an edit button.
4. The Edit Work Category Type Master window appears. Update Name,
Short Name, Benchmark Lead Time, Parent and SAC, then click on
Update to complete the step.
5. The changes will now be reflected in the list.
Changing the Status
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Work Category Type Master from the drop-down list and click on
Go.
3. All existing records under this master will be listed. To change the status of
a record, click on icon, which is a status icon. A pop-window will appear
asking for confirmation. Click OK to complete the step.
4. The record will now indicate an inactive status with the icon.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Deleting the record
5. Navigate to Engg>>Masters>>Master Tables.
6. Select Work Category Type Master from the drop-down list and click
on Go.
7. All existing records under this master will be listed. To delete a record,
click on icon, which is a delete icon. A pop-window will appear asking
for confirmation. Click on OK. Another pop-up window will appear
displaying the message "Deleted Successfully." This completes the step.
8. The deleted record will no longer appear in the list.
7.12.1.34 Work Order Retention Type
The master data added here will appear in Engg > Projects > Sub Project > Work
Order > Create Work Order > Retention Details > Type
Creating Work Order Retention Type Master
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Work Order Retention Type Master from the drop-down list and
click Go.
3. Click on Create on the top right. The Work Order Retention Type Master
window will appear.
4. Specify the Name and click on Create to complete the step.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
5. The new record will now be visible in the list of records.
Edit Work Order Retention Type Master
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Work Order Retention Type Master from the drop-down list and
click on Go.
3. All existing records under this master will be listed. To edit a record, click on
the button, which is an edit button.
4. The Edit Work Order Retention Type Master window appears. Update
Name and click on Update to complete the step.
5. The changes will now be reflected in the list.
Changing the Status
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Master Tables.
2. Select Work Order Retention Type Master from the drop-down list and
click on Go.
3. All existing records under this master will be listed. To change the status of
a record, click on icon, which is a status icon. A pop-window will appear
asking for confirmation. Click OK to complete the step.
4. The record will now indicate an inactive status with the icon.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Deleting the record
1. Navigate to Engg>>Masters>>Master Tables.
2. Select Work Order Retention Type Master from the drop-down list and
click on Go.
3. All existing records under this master will be listed. To delete a record,
click on icon, which is a delete icon. A pop-window will appear asking
for confirmation. Click on OK. Another pop-up window will appear
displaying the message "Deleted Successfully." This completes the step.
4. The deleted record will no longer appear in the list.
7.12.2 Store Master
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
The Store master is a centralized hub for managing inventory, construction materials, and
assets across various project sites. Whether located on-site or elsewhere, the Store provides
centralized control and visibility over stock levels, procurement, and distribution processes.
To create a store, follow the below steps:
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Masters > Store Master Store List > Click Create Store
Step 2: Once you click on Create Store, you will be prompted to fill in and select necessary
details.
Fields
Explanation
Store Name *
Enter a name for the store
Store Code *
Enter a code for the store
Certifying Company *
Select the company that owns or authorizes
the operation of the store
Contact Person
Enter name of the individual who will be a
primary point of contact for the store
Remarks
Add remarks, if any
Active*
Choose from the binary indicator whether
the store is currently active or inactive
within the system
Add Sub Project
This option allows users to associate the
store with one or more sub-projects
To choose a sub project, click Add Sub
Project. First, choose a Project and then a
Sub Project.
Contact Details
This field captures the contact information
(e.g., phone number, address) of the store
Step 3: Click Create.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
7.12.3 Consultant
The Consultant allows users to add and manage consultants associated with a project / sub
project. This feature serves as a centralized database for storing information about
consultants hired to provide specialized services or execute specific tasks.
To create a consultant, follow the below steps:
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Consultant > Consultant List > Click Create Consultant
Step 2: Once you click on Create Consultant, you will be prompted to fill in and select
necessary details.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Basic Details
Fields
Explanation
Consultant Firm Name *
Enter the name of the consultant firm or
entity offering services
Consultant Code
Assign a unique code to the consultant
Vendor Type *
Choose a Vendor Type: Company OR
Non-Company
PAN No. / Tax ID *
Enter the Permanent Account Number
(PAN) or Tax Identification Number (Tax ID)
of the consultant firm. It is essential for
taxation and regulatory compliance
purposes.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
GSTIN No.
Provide the Goods and Services Tax
Identification Number (GSTIN) of the
consultant firm, if applicable.
MSME No.
If the consultant firm is registered under the
Micro, Small, and Medium Enterprises
(MSME) Act, users can input the MSME
registration number in this field.
Statutory Registration
Enter statutory registration details of the
consultant firm
Notes
Add any additional notes or comments
relevant to the consultant
Profile Document
Upload profile documents or other
supporting materials related to the
consultant firm, such as company
brochures, credentials, certifications, or
project portfolios.
To add a document(s), click Add New,
choose a file and then click Update.
Approved *
Choose between Yes and NO statuses to
confirm whether the consultant has been
approved for engagement by the relevant
authorities or stakeholders.
Registration Type
Specify the type of registration held by the
consultant firm, such as Composition,
Regular, Unregistered, etc.
Party Type
Define the party type of the consultant firm,
such as Deemed Export, SEZ, etc.
Constitution
Specify the legal constitution or structure of
the consultant firm, such as sole
proprietorship, partnership, LLP, private
limited company, etc.
Favouring
If payments to the consultant are made in
favor of a specific entity or individual, users
can specify the recipient in this field.
LST No.
Enter LST No. (Local Sales Tax Number)
CST No.
Enter CST No. (Central Sales Tax Number)
PF No.
Enter PF No. (Provident Fund Number)
VAT Registration Number
Enter relevant tax registration numbers
required for regulatory compliance and
taxation purposes.
Active *
Choose between Yes and No statuses to
indicate whether the consultant is currently
active or inactive within the system
ESI No.
Enter ESI No. (Employee State Insurance
Number)
Excise Duty No.
Enter Excise Duty No. (Excise Duty
registration number)
Service Tax No.
Enter Service Tax No. (Service Tax
number)
Stop Payment
An option to indicate if payments to the
consultant have been halted or suspended
for any reason.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Grid
Registered Office Address
This field captures the official address of the consultant firm's registered office. It includes
details such as street address, city, state, postal code, country, etc.
Expertise
The Expertise grid allows users to specify the areas of specialization or industry domains in
which the consultant firm possesses proficiency.
To add an expertise, click Add row, choose Main Skill and Sub Skill. Then, list the
specialities of the consultant under Speciality.
Contact Details
Contact details fields capture various means of communication with the consultant firm,
including phone numbers, email addresses, fax numbers, etc.
To add contact details, click Add row, add Name, Designation, Address, Email, Phone,
Mobile and Fax.
Step 3: Click Create.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
7.12.4 Contractor
The Contractor allows users to add and manage contractors associated with a project / sub
project. This feature serves as a centralized database for storing information about
contractors hired to provide construction services or execute BOQs.
To create a contractor, follow the below steps:
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Contractor > Contractor List > Click Create Contractor
Step 2: Once you click on Create Contractor, you will be prompted to fill in and select
necessary details.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Basic Details
Fields
Explanation
Contractor Firm Name *
Enter the name of the contractor firm or
entity providing construction services.
Contractor Code
Assign a unique code to the contractor.
Vendor Type *
Choose a Vendor Type: Company OR
Non-Company
PAN No. / Tax ID *
Enter the Permanent Account Number
(PAN) or Tax Identification Number (Tax ID)
of the consultant firm. It is essential for
taxation and regulatory compliance
purposes.
GSTIN No.
Provide the Goods and Services Tax
Identification Number (GSTIN) of the
contractor, if applicable.
MSME No.
If the contractor is registered under the
Micro, Small, and Medium Enterprises
(MSME) Act, users can input the MSME
registration number in this field.
Statutory Registration
Enter statutory registration details of the
contractor
Notes
Add any additional notes or comments
relevant to the contractor, such as
contractual agreements, performance
history, or special considerations.
Profile Document
Upload profile documents or other
supporting materials related to the
contractor firm, such as company profiles,
licenses, certifications, or project portfolios.
Approved *
Choose between Yes and NO statuses to
confirm whether the contractor has been
approved for engagement by the relevant
authorities or stakeholders.
Registration Type
Specify the type of registration held by the
contractor, such as Composition, Regular,
Unregistered, etc.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Party Type
Define the party type of the contractor, such
as Deemed Export, SEZ, etc.
Constitution
Specify the legal constitution or structure of
the contractor, such as sole proprietorship,
partnership, LLP, private limited company,
etc.
Misc. Contractor
Checkbox to indicate if the contractor is a
miscellaneous contractor, with specific
implications or considerations.
Favouring
If payments to the contractor are made in
favor of a specific entity or individual, users
can specify the recipient in this field.
LST No.
Enter LST No. (Local Sales Tax Number)
CST No.
Enter CST No. (Central Sales Tax Number)
PF No.
Enter PF No. (Provident Fund Number)
VAT Registration Number
Enter relevant tax registration numbers
required for regulatory compliance and
taxation purposes.
Active *
Choose between Yes and No statuses to
indicate whether the consultant is currently
active or inactive within the system
ESI No.
Enter ESI No. (Employee State Insurance
Number)
Excise Duty No.
Enter Excise Duty No. (Excise Duty
registration number)
Service Tax No.
Enter Service Tax No. (Service Tax
number)
Rank.
An option to indicate if payments to the
contractor have been halted or suspended
for any reason.
Stop Payment
If payments to the contractor are made in
favor of a specific entity or individual, users
can specify the recipient in this field.
Grid
Registered Office Address
This field captures the official address of the contractor's registered office. It includes details
such as street address, city, state, postal code, country, etc.
Expertise
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
The Expertise grid allows users to specify the areas of specialization or industry domains in
which the consultant firm possesses proficiency.
To add an expertise, click Add row, choose Main Skill and Sub Skill. Then, list the
specialities of the consultant under Speciality.
Contact Details
Contact details fields capture various means of communication with the consultant firm,
including phone numbers, email addresses, fax numbers, etc.
To add contact details, click Add row, add Name, Designation, Address, Email, Phone,
Mobile and Fax.
Contractor Evaluation
Use this field to record evaluations or assessments of the contractor's performance, quality
of work, adherence to schedules, etc.
To create a contractor evaluation, click Add row, and select Category and Parameter
Name. Then, enter Parameter Value and Rating.
ITR Compliance
Indicate whether the contractor firm is compliant with Income Tax Return (ITR) filing
requirements.
To create an ITR Compliance record, click Add row, and choose between Yes and No
statuses to indicate whether the contractor is ITR compliant or not. The, Choose a From
Date and add Reference No.
Step 3: Click Create.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
7.12.5 Contracting Client
The Contracting Client master allows users to create and manage clients for developers or
contractors. It serves as a centralized database for storing information about clients who
engage developers or contractors to build or maintain structures.
To create a contracting client, follow the below steps:
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Contracting Client > Contracting Client List > Click Create
Contracting Client
Step 2: Once you click on Create Contracting Client, you will be prompted to fill in and
select necessary details.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Client Details
Fields
Explanation
Client Name *
Enter name of the contracting client
Client Code *
Assign a unique code to the contracting
client.
Vendor Type *
Choose a Vendor Type: Company OR
Non-Company
PAN No. / Tax ID *
Enter the Permanent Account Number
(PAN) or Tax Identification Number (Tax ID)
of the contracting client. It is essential for
taxation and regulatory compliance
purposes.
GSTIN
Provide the Goods and Services Tax
Identification Number (GSTIN) of the
contracting client, if applicable.
MSME No.
If the contracting client is registered under
the Micro, Small, and Medium Enterprises
(MSME) Act, users can input the MSME
registration number in this field.
PF No.
Enter statutory registration details of the
contracting client
LST No.
Enter the Permanent Account Number
(PAN) or Tax Identification Number (Tax ID)
of the contracting client. It is essential for
taxation and regulatory compliance
purposes.
CST No.
Provide the Goods and Services Tax
Identification Number (GSTIN) of the
contracting client, if applicable.
Statutory Registration
If the contracting client is registered under
the Micro, Small, and Medium Enterprises
(MSME) Act, users can input the MSME
registration number in this field.
Remarks
Add any additional notes or comments
relevant to the client, such as specific terms
of engagement, preferences, or special
considerations.
Service Tax No.
Enter Service Tax No. (Service Tax
number)
Vendor Type
Choose a Vendor Type: Company OR
Non-Company
VAT Registration No.
Enter VAT Registration No. (VAT
Registration number)
Excise Duty No.
Enter Excise Duty No. (Excise Duty
registration number)
Active
Choose between Yes and No statuses to
indicate whether the contracting client is
currently active or inactive within the system
Grid
Office Address
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
This field captures the official address of the client's registered office. It includes details such
as street address, city, state, postal code, country, etc.
Contact Details
Contact details fields capture various means of communication with the consultant firm,
including phone numbers, email addresses, fax numbers, etc.
To add contact details, click Add row, add Name, Designation, Address, Email, Phone,
Mobile and Fax.
Documents
Add any documents related to the contract between developer / contractor and client. To add
a document(s), click Add New, choose a file and click Update.
Step 3: Click Create.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
7.12.6 BOQ
Bill of Quantities (BOQ) is a feature that is designed to enable construction developers to
seamlessly create BOQs from scratch. This ensures accurate and detailed specifications
tailored to each project / sub project’s requirements. Additionally, developers have the
flexibility to modify existing BOQs to reflect any changes or adjustments throughout the
project lifecycle.
One of the standout capabilities of this feature is the ability to copy BOQs across various
project levels. Construction developers can effortlessly duplicate BOQs from the
organizational level to specific subproject levels. Moreover, they can also transfer BOQs
between different subprojects, as well as from subproject levels to work orders and
contracting orders.
Important
Creation of BOQ will be possible at organizational project and subproject level
Users can create BOQ either at Work Category level or at Work Sub Category level
Material Estimated Qty = Co efficient Factor * BOQ Qty
On the BOQ screen, you can view the work orders with which the BOQ has been
associated by clicking Link to View BOQ Associated Work Order(s).
Create BOQ
Prerequisites
Define the work flow for the BOQ by going to Home >> Admin >> Configure Workflow >>
Engg Workflow Master
Create the Work Category/Sub Work Category by going to >> Engineering >> Masters >>
Master table
To create a BOQ using the first method, follow the below steps:
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Masters > BOQ > Click Create BOQ
Step 2: Once you click Create BOQ, you will be prompted to fill in and select necessary
details.
Fields
Explanation
Project *
Select a project from the drop-down list
Sub Project *
Select a sub project from the drop-down list
Work Category *
Select a work category from the drop-down
list
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Work Sub Category
If you are creating a BOQ at sub category
level, select a work sub category from the
drop-down list
BOQ Item Name *
Give a name to the BOQ
BOQ Description *
Describe the BOQ
UOM *
Select the unit of measurement from the
drop-down list
BOQ Quantity (Cost)
Input the quantity of material
BOQ Rate (Cost)
Input the rate of quantity of material
BOQ Amount (Cost)
BOQ amount gets calculated based on the
formula: BOQ Quantity X BOQ Rate
Notes
Add any additional notes or comments
(Main) BOQ Items
(Main) BOQ Items level is ideal for standardized projects where quantities and rates remain
consistent across multiple instances. Users can input basic details like BOQ Item Name and
BOQ Description, followed by filling the BOQ Quantity and BOQ Rate. They can then specify
the requirements for Materials, Labour, Assets, and Output Material under (Main) BOQ
Items.
Materials
Materials are listed along with material types, quantities and cost.
Labour
Labour represents the human effort required to complete tasks within the project. This
includes skilled and unskilled workers, contractors, supervisors, and other personnel
involved in construction or project execution. Labour is listed in the BOQ along with the types
of work to be performed, the number of workers required, and the cost.
Assets
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Assets refer to the equipment, machinery, tools, and other tangible resources needed to
carry out project activities. This can include construction vehicles, cranes, excavators,
scaffolding, and specialized tools. Assets are included in the BOQ to account for the
resources required for construction or project execution beyond just materials and labour.
Output Material
Output materials are the products or materials produced or extracted as a result of project
activities. This can include by-products, waste materials, or any materials reclaimed or
recycled during the project. Output materials are listed in the BOQ to account for their
generation or disposal during project execution.
BOQ Sub Item
Alternatively, users can opt for the BOQ Sub Item level for a more detailed breakdown of the
BOQ. Here, users create lists for each specific requirement, and this allows for granular
specification and individualized costing. When BOQs are created at this level, the main BOQ
Quantity and BOQ Rate become zero, as quantities and costs are calculated from the
detailed lists provided. This level is beneficial for projects with varying requirements,
enabling users to tailor specifications to each unique instance, such as different
requirements for each floor of a building.
Step 5: Once you complete the BOQ, submit it for approval. It will get forwarded to
individuals who are authorized to perform the approval action.
Attach / Copy BOQ
The Copy/Attach BOQ feature allows users to duplicate Bill of Quantities (BOQ) from
organizational or project levels to specific project or sub-project levels within the system.
This feature streamlines the process of replicating existing BOQs, enhancing efficiency in
project management and cost estimation.
Some of the scenarios where users can use the Attach / Copy BOQ feature
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
When a project / sub project has the exact same BOQ as that of one that a developer
has already created
When a contractor, in case of a contracting model, wants to estimate revenue from a
Cost BOQ.
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > BOQ > BOQ List > Attach / Copy BOQ
2. Once you click on Attach / Copy BOQ, you will be prompted to select and enter the
necessary details.
3. On the left side of the screen, choose a project, sub project, work category, etc., and
click Show.
4. Choose a BOQ (at least one BOQ).
5. Now, on the right side of the screen, choose the option that you wish to copy the
BOQ to. You can copy a BOQ to a project / sub project, work order, contracting
order, and a tender document.
Copy To: Project / Sub Project
Copy To: Work Order
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Copy To: Contracting Order
Copy To: Tender Document
6. After select the option that a BOQ will be copied to, click Copy.
Bulk Delete
Use this option to delete multiple BOQs simultaneously, instead of deleting them one at a
time, which can be time-consuming.
Import / Export BOQ
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Bulk upload is a feature designed to streamline data entry processes by allowing users to
upload multiple files or datasets simultaneously into a system. This method replaces manual
input for efficiency, ensuring faster data integration and reducing the potential for errors. It's
particularly useful in scenarios where large volumes of data need to be imported quickly and
accurately.
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > BOQ > Bulk Upload BOQ.
2. Download the provided Excel template and arrange your BOQ data according to the
format in the template.
3. Select Import to upload BOQ data or Export to download current BOQ data.
Import
Export
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
4. Click Validate to check for errors during the import process. If validation is
successful, confirm the upload. Click Download during the export process.
Create Floor / Unit Mapping
Floor / Unit Mapping is a feature that allows users to map units (such as apartments or
offices) either floor-wise or unit-wise within a project / sub project.
To map units, follow the below steps:
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > BOQ > Create Floor / Unit Mapping > Create Floor /
Unit Mapping
2. Once you click Create Floor / Unit Mapping, you will be prompted to select the
necessary options.
3. Click Create.
7.12.7 Labour
The Labour master facilitates the systematic organization and management of labour
resources by allowing the creation of hierarchical classifications that range from broad
categories to specific types, and finally, individual laborers. This structure enables efficient
allocation, tracking, and utilization of labour resources throughout various construction
projects.
Navigation: Engg > Masters > Labour
Labour Category
This refers to the broad classification or group to which a particular type of labour belongs.
For example, you might have categories like Skilled Labour, Unskilled Labour, Technical
Labour, etc.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Follow the below steps to create Labour Category
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Masters > Labour > Select Labour Category > Labour Category
List > Click Create Labour Category.
Step 2: Once you click Create Labour Category, you will be prompted to fill in Labour
Category and Description.
Labour SubCategory
Labour Sub Category provides further refinement within a Labour Category. It allows for
more specific classification of labor types within a broader category. For instance, within the
Skilled Labour category, you might have sub-categories like Carpenters, Electricians,
Plumbers, etc.
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Masters > Labour > Select Labour SubCategory > Labour Sub
Category List > Click Create Labour Sub Category.
Step 2: Once you click Create Labour Category, you will be prompted to select Labour
Category and fill in Labour Category and Description.
Labour Type
Labour Type represents the specific type of work or skill set that a labourer possesses. It
could include designations like Journeyman Carpenter, Master Electrician, Apprentice
Plumber, etc. This classification allows for precise identification of the expertise level or
specialization of each labourer.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Masters > Labour > Select Labour Type > Labour Type List >
Click Create Labour Type.
Step 2: Once you click Create Labour Type, you will be prompted to fill in and select the
necessary details.
Fields
Explanation
Category
Select the appropriate category from a
predefined list or create a new category if
necessary by navigating to Labour
Category.
Sub Category
Select the appropriate sub category from a
predefined list or create a new sub category
if necessary by navigating to Labour Sub
Category.
Labour Type Name
Enter a name for the type of work or skill set
that a laborer possesses
Description
Add additional details about the labour type.
It could include a brief description of the
skills, qualifications, experience level, or
any other relevant information that helps
distinguish this labor type from others.
Quantity
Enter the quantity of laborers of this type
required
UOM
Define the unit of measure for the quantity
specified. It could be units like person, hour,
day, week, etc., depending on how labor
resources are to be paid
Rate
Enter the rate that you will pay to hire
laborers in this category.
Labour
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
This is where individual laborers are entered into the system. Each laborer is associated with
a Labour Type, which in turn belongs to a Labour Sub Category and ultimately to a Labour
Category. Additionally, this record might include details such as contact information,
qualifications, certifications, work history, hourly rates, availability, etc.
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Masters > Labour > Select Labour > Labour List > Click Create
Labour.
Step 2: Once you click Create Labour, you will be prompted to fill in and select the
necessary details.
Fields
Explanation
Upload Photo
Upload a photograph of the laborer. It
provides a visual identification of the
individual and can be helpful for human
resources, project management, and
security purposes.
Labour Type
Select the type of laborer being added to
the system from the drop-down menu
First Name
Enter the first name
Last Name
Enter the last name, surname, or family
name
Address
Enter the residential or mailing address of
the laborer
Tax ID
Enter the tax identification number of the
laborer, which is used for tax reporting and
compliance purposes. Depending on the
country or jurisdiction, this could be a PAN
number, social security number, national
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
insurance number, or other tax identification
number.
Middle Name
Enter the middle name or initial of the
laborer
Phone No.
Enter the contact phone number of the
laborer
Email ID
Enter the Email ID of the labourer
Grid
Documents
Upload and attach relevant documents associated with the laborer, such as identification
documents, certifications, licenses, permits, training records, or any other documentation
required for compliance, qualification, or verification purposes.
To add a document(s), click Add New, choose a file and click Update.
7.12.8 Rate Master
The Rate Master feature allows users to set rates for materials, labour, and assets within
specific projects and sub-projects. This feature enables precise management of costs and
pricing.
To create a Rate Master, follow the below steps:
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Masters > Rate Master
Step 2: Using the filter, select the desired Project and Sub-Project. Then, specify the Item
Type, Category, Sub-Category, and click Go.
Step 3: After applying the filters, navigate to the bottom of the filter panel. In the extreme
right column, locate and click on the Edit option. Specify the effective date for the rate to
become active, enter the rate for the selected material, labour, or asset, and choose the
appropriate unit of measurement. Finally, click the Update button to save the changes.
7.12.9 Labour Mapping
The Labour Mapping allows developers / contractors to assign and manage labour
resources within projects or sub-projects.
To map labour to sub project, follow the below steps:
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Masters > Labour Mapping > Labour Mapping List > Click
Create Labour Mapping.
Step 2: Once you click Create Labour Mapping, you will be prompted to select a sub project.
Select a project, sub project and click Go.
Step 3: Click Add under the Labour grid, checkmark the Labour Name(s) and click Accept
and Continue.
7.12.10 Estimation Charge Type
The Estimation Charge Type allows users to define and manage various charge types that
can be applied to transactions. These charges can be calculated based on a percentage, a
fixed amount, or a custom formula, providing flexibility and precision in financial estimations.
To create an estimation charge type, follow the below steps:
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Masters > Estimation Charge Type > Click Create Estimation
Charge Type
Step 2: Enter a name for the charge type under Enter Charge Type
Step 3: Choose the calculation method: Percentage, Fixed Amount, or Formula.
Percentage: Enter the percentage rate.
Fixed Amount: Enter the exact amount to be charged.
Formula: Enter the custom formula using predefined variables and operators. To create a
formula, select Formula radio button and then click Add. A new window opens, prompting
you to create a formula using operators.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Step 4: Specify the base value to which the percentage, fixed amount or formula will be
applied under Apply To. Choose from the options whether it will apply to BOQ, Labour,
Material, Asset, or a combination of these options.
Step 5: Click Create.
Asset
7.12.11 Asset Type
Asset Type is a broad category used to classify various assets. It provides a high-level
grouping of assets that share similar characteristics or purposes. For example, Furniture.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
To create an asset type, navigate to Engg > Masters > Asset > Asset Type > Click Create
Asset Type.
Select Group Type, and then enter Asset Type, Short Name and Description. Once you
have filled in or selected necessary details, click Submit.
7.12.12 Asset SubType
Asset Subtype is a more specific classification within an Asset Type. It provides further
granularity by grouping assets that share even more specific characteristics or functions. For
example, Chair.
To create an asset type, navigate to Engg > Masters > Asset > Asset SubType > Click
Create Asset SubType.
Select Asset Group Type and Asset Type and then enter Asset Sub Type, Short Name
and Description. Once you have filled in or selected necessary details, click Submit.
7.12.13 Asset
Once asset type and asset sub types are defined, it is time to create assets on the system.
This master has been uniquely designed to capture possibly every detail of an asset so that
can asset is uniquely and easily distinguishable.
To create an asset, follow the below steps:
Step 1: Fill in and select the necessary details.
Fields
Explanation
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Asset Group Type
This field categorizes assets into different
groups based on common characteristics or
purposes. For example, it could include
groups like heavy machinery, construction
equipment, hand tools, or office equipment.
Asset Type*
Within each asset group, there are different
types of assets. For instance, within the
heavy machinery group, asset types could
include excavators, bulldozers, or cranes.
Asset Sub Type*
Further classification within each asset
type. For example, within the cranes asset
type, subtypes could include tower cranes,
mobile cranes, or overhead cranes.
Asset *
This field specifies the individual asset or
piece of equipment within the system. It
could be a unique identifier such as a serial
number or a name assigned to distinguish
one asset from another.
Short Name*
This is a concise identifier for the asset. For
example, "Excavator 1" or "Hammer Set A".
Description
A brief explanation or summary of the
asset, providing additional details beyond
the name or short identifier. For instance,
the description for an excavator could
include its make, model, capacity, and any
notable features.
UOM*
This field indicates the unit in which the
asset is measured or quantified. For
machinery, it could be measured in tons or
horsepower.
Minimum Order Quantity
This field specifies the minimum quantity of
the asset that can be ordered or acquired at
one time.
Bench Mark Lead Time*
This refers to the standard or benchmark
lead time required to procure or acquire the
asset. Lead time is the time it takes from
placing an order to receiving the asset.
HSN Code
This is a standardized system of names
and numbers for classifying goods to
facilitate international trade. In the context
of assets like machinery or tools, it might be
used for taxation, regulatory compliance, or
classification purposes.
Grid
Brand Names
This grid is used to create or record specific brands or manufacturers of the assets within the
system. Including brand names allows for better organization and identification of assets,
especially when dealing with multiple products or equipment from various manufacturers. It
helps in tracking warranty information, maintenance requirements, and product
specifications.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
To add a brand name, click Add Brand and chose a brand from the drop-down.
Terms and Conditions
Terms and Conditions grid is used to create or record contractual terms and conditions
associated with the procurement or use of the assets within the system. Including terms and
conditions in the Asset master allows users to easily reference and adhere to the agreed-
upon terms when dealing with procurement, maintenance, disposal, or any other asset-
related activities. These terms and conditions may include payment terms, warranty details,
service level agreements, and other relevant contractual obligations.
To add Terms and Conditions, click Add Condition and chose a condition from the drop-
down. Then, add remarks, if any.
Attribute Category
Attribute Category is used to classify or group specific attributes that are assigned to assets
for better categorization and organization. Attributes can include various properties such as
size, weight, material, color, and / or any other relevant characteristics that help in describing
and differentiating assets.
To add an attribute category, click Add Row, type an attribute group and then select an
attribute.
GRN Conversion Factors
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
GRN stands for Goods Receipt Note, which is a document used to record the receipt of
goods from a supplier. Conversion factors in this context refer to the conversion ratios or
factors used to convert quantities of goods received into standardized units of measurement.
To create a GRN Conversion Factor, click Add Row. Then, select a unit of measurement or
UOM to which the value will be converted. Note that the user will first need to define a unit of
measurement from the UOM field above. It is a mandatory field.
Step 2: Click Submit.
Planning
7.12.14 Define Activity
Define Activity master allows users to efficiently plan project tasks, milestones, and events.
This feature facilitates the creation of detailed activities with specific attributes. This enabes
project managers to effectively organize project workflows and allocate resources.
To define an activity, navigate to Engg > Masters > Planning > Define Activity > Click Add New.
Once you click Add New, you can start planning for the activities.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Note in the above screenshot that activity for a project has been planned and created in 65
levels.
7.12.15 Map Activity
The Map Activity master enables users to establish a direct link between project activities
and relevant BOQ items. This integration enhances cost estimation, resource allocation, and
project control by ensuring alignment between planned activities and project specifications.
To map an activity, follow the below steps:
Step 1: Navigate to Engg > Masters > Map Activity
Step2: Select a sub project using the filter and click Go.
Step 3: Now, click an activity under Map BOQ column and a new window opens.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Step 4: Select a BOQ item using the filter and click Submit. Once you click Submit, the BOQ
item(s) get mapped to the relevant activity(s).
Estimation
7.12.16 BOQ Estimation
The BOQ (Bill of Quantities) Estimation feature helps developers estimate the quantities and
costs of materials, labor, and other resources required for a construction project. This feature
helps in planning, budgeting, and managing project costs effectively.
To create a BOQ estimation, follow the below steps:
1. Navigate to Engg > Masters > Estimation > BOQ Estimation > Click Create BOQ
Estimation
2. Add a BOQ: Select a Project, and a Sub Project. Enter an Estimation Name, and
then select dates for validity range from the Valid From and Valid To calendars. Click
Add BOQ
3. Once you click Add BOQ, a new window opens. Use the filter to search for BOQ,
select a BOQ and click Add BOQ at the bottom of the page.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
4. After clicking on Add BOQ, you will arrive at a grid where quantity and rate can be
entered to achieve an estimated BOQ cost.
7.13 Utilities
The Utility functionality is an important component that is designed to handle situations
where sudden and significant changes need to be made, particularly in bulk, to various
aspects of the system. This feature ensures that the In4Suite application remains flexible,
responsive to regulatory changes, and capable of managing extensive data efficiently.
7.13.1 Work Order Tax Utility
When government regulations mandate changes in tax rates or tax structures, it impacts
various financial aspects of real estate projects. The Utility functionality enables users to
update tax rates across multiple records and documents quickly and accurately.
Look at this scenario: a new tax law is introduced, increasing the service tax rate from 10%
to 12%. The Utility tool allows the bulk update of all relevant financial records to reflect this
new rate, ensuring compliance without manual intervention on each record.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Change of Tax Percentage
Description: To replace an existing (expired) tax with a new tax.
Follow the below steps to change tax percentage
1. Choose "Change of Tax Percentage".
2. Under From Tax, select Project, Sub Project, Work Order Type, Tax Category and
Tax Sub Category
3. Under To Tax, select Tax Category, and Tax Sub Category.
4. Click Go. Then, select a WO number from the list and click Submit.
Note: The sub-tax categories must be different, or the action will fail. This is because you
are migrating the work order from one tax to another.
Insert Tax
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Description: To replace an existing tax with a new tax
Existing: To find a specific tax and insert a new tax (or CESS) attached to it in all work
orders of a selected project.
New: To add a new tax in all work orders of a selected project, regardless of the previous
taxes.
Follow the below steps to replace an existing tax with a new tax
1. Choose "Insert Tax".
2. Under Existing Tax, select Project*, Sub Project, Work Order Type*, Tax Category
and Tax Sub Category
3. Under New Tax, select Tax Category*, and Tax Sub Category*.
4. Click Go.
Note: The tax sub categories have to be different. Else, the action will fail. Because you are
migrating the work order from one tax to another.
End Tax
Description: To close a tax and mark all certificates created up to the date of execution as
tax paid/committed.
To perform the above action, follow the below steps:
1. Choose "End Tax".
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
2. Then, select Project*, Sub Project, Work Order Type*, Tax Category and Tax Sub
Category
3. Click Go.
7.13.2 BOQ Rate Change
The rates specified in the Bill of Quantities (BOQ) can change due to market conditions,
contractor adjustments, or project scope changes. The Utility function allows for these rate
changes to be applied uniformly across all BOQs.
To perform the BOQ Rate Change action, follow the below steps:
1. Navigate to Engg > Utilities > BOQ Rate Change > > BOQ Rate Change List
2. Select a Project, Sub Project, Budget Period, Work Category, Sub Work Category,
and Work Order No.*, then click Show BOQ.
Note: Make sure the abstracts are approved, if any. Else, it won’t let you continue further.
3. Move the cursor to the extreme right and enter a new rate under the New Rate
column.
4. Click Update.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Bulk Upload
Managing large volumes of data such as budgets, BOQ, sales stock, and bulk orders can be
cumbersome. The Utility functionality supports bulk uploads, streamlining the process of
importing and updating large datasets.
7.13.3 Budget
Upload budget details for multiple projects. This ensures that financial planning is up-to-date
and consistent.
To upload budget details for multiple projects, follow the below steps:
1. Navigate to Engg > Utilities > Bulk Upload > Budget > Bulk Upload Budget
2. Upload a file. Before you do so, download the template first and ensure that the
budget data is prepared in the prescribed format
3. Click Upload Sheet and choose a sheet name. In case there are multiple sheets in
your Excel file, the names of sheet will automatically reflect. Choose the desired
sheet name.
4. Then Select a project and click Show.
5. Checkmark and select the sub projects to which the budget will be uploaded. There
is also an option to overwrite existing budgets, allowing for complete replacement of
previous data with the new upload.
7.13.4 BOQ
BOQs are quite detailed and are generally prepared in Excel sheets. Uploading them
manually to the In4Suite system will consume significant time. Users can upload the entire
Excel sheet with BOQ details effortlessly provided the data is in the same format as
prescribed the template that can be downloaded from the BOQ interface.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
There are also situations when you have to make numerous changes to the BOQ on the
In4Suite system. In that case, user would like to export the entire BOQ, make changes
offline and then import it. There can be multiple such use cases.
Before performing any import / export action, have a look at the following notes:
BOQs can be created only at the Sub Project level.
Existing BOQs at the Organization, Project, or Sub Project level can be exported,
modified with suitable changes, and then re-imported.
BOQs in any status (except Cancelled/Rejected) can be exported. If a BOQ is
amended, the previously approved BOQ will be exported.
Existing Sub Items/Resources cannot be deleted using Import BOQ.
Newly added Sub Items/Resources will be imported to the Project/Sub Project.
Existing BOQs, Sub Item BOQs, and Resources will not be modified unless the user
checks the checkbox to modify.
For Import/Export of BOQ by Floor/Unit, the entity must be selected against the
mapped Sub Projects.
For Import BOQ with or without UOM, only 255 columns are allowed.
Import
1. Navigate to Engg > Utilities > Bulk Upload > BOQ > Bulk Upload BOQ > Choose
‘Import’ action. You can also choose whether you want to update existing resources
by checkmarking Update Existing Resources.
2. Select whether you want to create a new BOQ or update an existing BOQ from the
Create / Update BOQ * field
3. Select a Project and Sub Project, then select a Work Category
4. Choose a file that you want to import by clicking Choose File under File to Import*
5. Finally, enter a name for the sheet under the Excel Sheet Name field, and click
Validate.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Export
1. Navigate to Engg > Utilities > Bulk Upload > BOQ > Bulk Upload BOQ > Choose
‘Export’ action. You can also choose whether you want to export it with a unit of
measurement (UOM) or Without UOM.
2. Choose a work category using the BOQ filter that includes selecting Project, Sub
Project, Work Category, Work Sub Category, BOQ Name, BOQ Description, and
BOQ ID.
3. Once you have selected the above search parameters, click Show, then select the
BOQs below and click Download.
7.13.5 Sales Stock
Builders often start marketing and selling units even before construction begins. Sales are
linked to construction progress. For example, a customer who has signed up for a unit will
receive a notification to pay the first instalment when the first slab is completed, and
subsequent payments will follow as construction advances. As a strategy, therefore, sales
are closely tied to engineering progress.
Data maintained offline does not need to be manually entered into the In4Suite system.
Instead, users can download a template from the Sales Stock interface, modify the data in
the specified format, and import it directly into the system.
To perform sales stock upload action, follow the below steps:
1. Navigate to Engg > Utilities > Bulk Upload > Sales Stock > Bulk Upload Sales Stock.
2. Select a Project and Sub Project
3. Choose a file that you want to import by clicking Choose File under File to Import*
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
4. Finally, enter a name for the sheet under the Excel Sheet Name field, and click
Upload.
7.13.6 Bulk Assign PLC
Many customers will have certain preferences in mind when choosing a unit. Such units that
are attractive are in high demand and sell at premium called PLCs or Preferential Location
Charges. Using Bulk Assign PLC, users can effortlessly map the PLCs to units.
To assign PLCs to units, follow the below steps:
1. Navigate to Engg > Utilities > Bulk Upload > Bulk Assign PLC > Bulk Assign PLCs To
Units
2. Choose a sub project or units using the filter. The filter has the following different
fields to choose from or enter details into:
Fields
Explanation
Project *
Select the main project to which the units
belong
Sub Project *
Select a specific sub-project or phase within
the main project
Unit Type
Choose the type of unit you are looking to
assign PLCs to
Sales Status
This field allows users to filter units based
on their sales status. Sales statuses might
include options like 'Available', 'Sold',
'Reserved', etc.
Show Units With
This field provides additional filtering
options to show None, All or Selection
Units.
Fl.No / St.No
This field allows users to enter specific floor
numbers or street numbers. This helps in
targeting units located on particular floors or
streets within the sub-project.
Floor Type
Users can filter units based on the type of
floor they are on. Floor types might include
'Ground Floor', 'First Floor', 'Penthouse',
etc.
Sort On
This field provides options for sorting the
units in a specific order, such as by
saleable area, unit type, floor type, etc., to
make the selection process easier and
more efficient.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
Area Type
Users can filter units based on the type of
area they are located in. Area types might
include Common, 'Saleable', etc.
3. Once you have selected and/or entered the essential search parameters, click Go.
4. You will see PLC Type and unit details, allowing you to map the PLC Type to the
corresponding units.
7.13.7 Contractor Work Order Copying
Some work orders, which are official orders to commence work for a contractor, may have
common BOQs and/or terms and conditions that need not be created each time, as it
consumes a lot of time. Instead, a developer may use the Contractor Work Order Copying
functionality to replicate some or all components of a work order to others.
To copy a contractor work order, follow the below steps:
1. Navigate to Engg > Utilities > Bulk Upload > Contractor Work Order Copying
2. Select an existing work order using the filter. Choose from the Project, Sub Project,
Work Category, Contractor and Work Order Status drop-down lists. Then, click
Show.
3. From the list that appears, choose a work order and move the cursor to the top right
to choose what components of the work order you want to copy.
4. Choose a project click List Sub Projects
5. User will be able to see all sub projects with options to select a contractor(s) against
those sub projects. They can also enter start and end dates.
Main Menu
Confidential and License use only
Copyright © In4velocity Systems Pvt. Ltd. 2024
7.14 Search
Search makes it easier to search for any work or item at the project, sub project, inventory
and payment levels, as illustrated in the screenshot.
7.15 Reports
7.15.1 Abstract
7.15.2 BOQ
7.15.3 Budget
7.15.4 Cash Flow
7.15.5 Consultant
7.15.6 Contractor
7.15.7 Contractor Payment
7.15.8 DPR
7.15.9 Inventory
7.15.10 MBook
7.15.11 Project